Operator Manual en

Steiger 335
Steiger 385
Steiger 435
Steiger 485
Steiger 535
Tractors
Operator’s Manual
Print No. 87562869

1st edition
English 07/07
CASE
PERSONAL SAFETY
!
THIS SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL INDICATES IMPORTANT SAFETY MESSAGES IN THIS MANUAL.
WHEN YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL, CAREFULLY READ THE MESSAGE THAT FOLLOWS AND BE
ALERT TO THE POSSIBILITY OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. M171C
Throughout this manual and on the machine’s safety decals, you will find precautionary statements: DANGER,
WARNING or CAUTION followed by specific instructions or ISO two panel safety pictorial symbols. These
precautions are intended for your personal safety.
Failure to follow the DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION instructions may result in death or serious bodily injury.
DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION are defined as follows:
● DANGER: Indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
The color associated with Danger is RED.
● WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury. The color associated with Warning is ORANGE.
● CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. The color associated with Caution is YELLOW.
ISO two panel pictorial symbol decals are defined as follows:
● The first panel indicates the nature of the hazard.
● The second panel indicates the appropriate avoidance of the hazard.
● Background color is YELLOW.
● Prohibition symbols such as and STOP if used, are RED.
! WAR NI NG
IMPROPER OPERATION OF THIS MACHINE CAN CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY. BEFORE USING THIS MACHINE, MAKE CERTAIN THAT EVERY OPERATOR:
● Is instructed in safe and proper use of the machine.

● Reads and understands the Manual(s) pertaining to the machine.
● Reads and understands ALL Safety Decals on the machine.
● Clears the area of other persons.

● Learns and practices safe use of machine controls in a safe, clear area before
operating this machine on a job site.
It is your responsibility to observe pertinent laws and regulations and follow CNH
America LLC instructions on machine operation and maintenance.
GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
1-TO THE OWNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
TRACTOR ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CHEMICAL TANK MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
BUSINESS BAND RADIO READY (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
QUADTRAC UNITS ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2-SAFETY/DECALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PERSONAL SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
INSTRUCTIONAL SEAT SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
MAINTENANCE SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
FIRE SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
BATTERY SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
MACHINE OPERATION AND ROLL-OVER SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SAFETY DECALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ARTICULATION CYLINDER LOCKING BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING THE TRACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
ROLLOVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
CLEANING CAB WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
RH SERVICE WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
SEAT BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
TRACTOR WARNING LAMPS AND SMV SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
IMPLEMENT WARNING LAMPS AND SMV SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SAFETY CHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3-OPERATING CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
TRACTOR ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
OPERATOR’S SEAT WITH AIR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
INSTRUCTIONAL SEAT (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
FOOT PEDALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CENTER CONSOLE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
24-SPEED TRANSMISSION CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
RIGHT HAND ARMREST CONSOLE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
RH ARMREST CONTROL CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ARMREST CONSOLE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6TH-7TH/TWINFLOW ELECTRIC REMOTE VALVES (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
AUTO GUIDANCE ROADING SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
UPPER CONSOLE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
MP3 PLAYER JACK (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
HVAC CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
POWER MIRROR CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4-INSTRUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ROPS POST INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAY MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
OLD HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
PROGRAM ADJUST MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
WARNING FAULT DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
INSTRUMENTATION CLUSTER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
i
5-OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
SEAT BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
COLD WEATHER STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
STOPPING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
COLD TEMPERATURE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
TOWING THE TRACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
TRANSPORTING THE TRACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
FRONT STEERING OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
24-SPEED TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
CONSTANT ENGINE SPEED OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6-FIELD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

POWER TAKEOFF (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
OPERATING THE POWER TAKEOFF (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
STANDARD DRAWBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
THREE POINT HITCH PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
HITCH COUPLER - CATEGORY III OR IV-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
HITCH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
RAISING AND LOWERING THE HITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
REMOTE HYDRAULICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
AUXILIARY IMPLEMENT POWER CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7-IN-FIELD PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

TRACTOR BALLAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
FRONT AND REAR SUITCASE WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
WHEEL WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
WHEEL WEIGHT BOLT TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
TIRE AND RIM SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
TIRE PRESSURE FOR MAXIMUM TIRE LOAD AT RATED INFLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
WHEEL BOLT TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
SCRAPER OPERATING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
8-LUBRICATION/FILTERS/FLUID/MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
ENGINE LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
GRILLE AND HOOD ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
PRESSURE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
SCA SERVICE REQUIREMENTS (335 AND 535 ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
INSPECTION OF TRACKS AND UNDERCARRIAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
TRACK ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
TRACK (BELT) TENSION RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
TRACK (BELT) ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
9-ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
ii
10-SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
TRACTOR WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
APPROXIMATE TRAVEL SPEEDS (MPH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
APPROXIMATE OVERALL MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
11-DETAIL INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
iii
This Page Left Blank
iv
Template Name: OML_2_col Rac 0-00000
Template Date: 2001_03_06
1 - TO THE OWNER
GENERAL INFORMATION
Introduction to this Manual

This manual contains important information about All persons training to operate, or who will be
t h e s a fe o p e r a t i o n , a d j u s t m e n t a n d r o u t i n e operating this tractor, should be old enough to
maintenance of your Case IH Steiger Series Tractor. possess a valid local vehicle operating permit (or
The manual is divided into ten sections as outlined in other applicable local age requirement) and must
the General Table of Contents Page(s). Refer to the have demonstrated the ability to operate and service
Detail Index at the end of this manual for locating the tractor correctly and safely.
specific items about your tractor.
If your tractor requires replacement parts, do not use
Use this manual as a guide. Your tractor will remain a unauthorized parts or substitute materials. Case
reliable working machine as long as it is kept in good dealers stock Case IH approved service parts and
working condition and serviced properly. have technicians with special training that know the
best methods of repair and maintenance for your
Read this manual before you start the engine or tractor.
operate this tractor. If any information in this manual
is not understood, or if you need more information or
assistance, contact your dealer.
Statement of Tractor Intended Use

The Steiger Series Tractor, with standard equipment Installation of utility (dozer) blades, tile plows, front
and authorized attachments, is intended to be used loaders or push bars on the tractor is not
for customary farming, land leveling and related recommended. Any tractor damage resulting from
agriculture operations. the installation and/or use of such equipment is not
covered by the tractor warranty.
Operator Manual Storage Compartment
MK99H025
DO NOT permit anyone to operate or service this Make sure the manual is complete and in good
tractor until you or other operators have read this condition. Store the Operator’s Manual and other
manual. The Operator’s Manual is a part of your i m p o r t a n t t r ac to r i nfo r m a ti o n i n t h e s t or a g e
tractor and must be available to all operators. compartment provided on the rear side of the seat
backrest.
1
1 - TO THE OWNER
TRACTOR ORIENTATION
Th e S teiger Ser ies Tractor i s classified as a
four-wheel drive articulating vehicle. The standard
tractor consists of front and rear frame assemblies
that steer by pivoting at the center articulation joint 2
(1).
The standard tractor front frame (2) incorporates the

engine, front axle, transmission and cab. The rear
frame (3) incorporates the rear axle and fuel tank.
The right hand (RH) (4) and left hand (LH) (5) side of
the tractor as used in this manual are the same as
your right hand and left hand when sitting in the
operator’s seat looking forward over the engine. 5 4
3
1
MA00A013
1. CENTER ARTICULATION JOINT 4. RIGHT-HAND SIDE
2. STANDARD TRACTOR FRONT 5. LEFT-HAND SIDE
FRAME
3. REAR FRAME
2
1 - TO THE OWNER
STEIGER SERIES TRACTORS
MT05M077
STEIGER WHEEL TRACTOR
MT05M072
STEIGER QUADTRAC TRACTOR
3
1 - TO THE OWNER
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS

W r i te you r ma c h in e M od e l N um be r, P r o du c t If needed, give these numbers to your dealer when
Identification Number (P.I.N.) and Serial Numbers of you need parts or information for your machine.
major components on the lines provided.
Tractor Model and Product

Identification Numbers
Model:____________________________________
P.I.N. * Z:__________________________________
Located on the upper back side of the LH front

fender.
MT04M004
Rollover Protective Structure

(ROPS) Serial Number
_________________________________________
Located under the cover of the LH front ROPS post.
MK01G271
Engine Serial Number (335)

_________________________________________
Located on the top LH side of the engine fuel pump

drive cover.
MT07F140
4
1 - TO THE OWNER
Engine Serial Number (385 - 435)

__________________________________________
Located on the LH upper side under the heat shield.
MT05M015
Engine Serial Number (485) 1 3
__________________________________________
Located on the LH upper side behind compound

turbo gear box.
MT07F083
Engine Serial Number (535) 1 3
__________________________________________
Located on the LH upper side under the heat shield.
MT05M016
Transmission Serial Number 1 3
__________________________________________
Located on the LH rear side of the transmission.
MT07F084
5
1 - TO THE OWNER
Axle Serial Number (335)

Front _____________________________________
Rear _____________________________________
Located on the side of the axle center housing.
MK99K097
Axle Serial Number (385, 435, 485, 1 3
535)
Front _____________________________________
Rear _____________________________________
Located on the final drive housing.
MK01G070
6
1 - TO THE OWNER
This Page Left Blank
7
1 - TO THE OWNER
Chemical Tank Mounting

Reference Illustrations
MA07E028
Figure A
MA00K026
Figure B
MA00K032
Figure C
8
1 - TO THE OWNER
CHEMICAL TANK MOUNTING
IMPORTANT: The tanks MUST NOT be individually

WARNING: ADDITIONAL CARE MUST BE
supported by the tractor side frames.
TAKEN WHEN OPERATING A TRACTOR WITH
CHEMICAL TANKS. OPERATING, HANDLING
4. To reduce the dynamic forces associated with
AND BRAKING PERFORM ANCE O F THE
chemical tanks, the tank support structure must
! TRACTOR MAY BE AFFECTED. AVOID HIGH
also have a rigid type brace extending from each
SPEED OPERATION. TRAVEL SPEED SHOULD
side of the tank support structure to the front side
BE SUCH THAT COMPLETE CONTROL AND
of the front axle center housing. Use the existing
MACHINE STABILITY IS MAINTAINED AT ALL
pre-drilled and tapped 20 mm holes in the center
TIMES. M418
housing to attach the braces using class 10.9
fasteners (C).
Chemical tanks and mounting are not factor y
supplied. Chemical tanks can be mounted on each
5. Front tanks must be mounted to allow the
front side of the tractor. The maximum tank capacity cleanout trap door to open and allow unrestricted
for side mounted installation is two 350 gallon (1326 access to all service points.
liter) tanks.
6. Refer to the Tire Load And Inflation Tables in this
To avoid str uctural damage, vendor supplied manual for the correct tire size and load capacity
chemical tanks must be installed according to the for your application. Tires must be inflated to the
following instructions: correct load capacity to suppor t the added
weight. To avoid exceeding tire load capacity,
1. Side mounted chemical tanks must be mounted remove all front wheel weights.
in pairs with a rigid structure supporting both
tanks (A). Side tanks must be interconnected so 7. Each U.S. gallon (3.8 liter) of tank capacity will
that the fluid level is the same in both tanks at all add approximately 14 lb. (6.3 Kg) to the front axle
times. weight and decrease rear axle weight. DO NOT
exceed tire or tractor maximum operating
2. Chemical tanks must be mounted as close to the weights
front axle as possible. Front wheel tread setting
is not affected by side tank installation, however IMPORTANT: Tanks filled to capacity must not be
the shape and/or size of the tanks can be used as primary ballast for heavy tillage operation.
affected by the requir ed 100 mm (4 inch)
minimum clearance in front of the tires (B). NOTE: A generic chemical tank support structure is
illustrated only to show acceptable attaching points.
3. The tank support structure must be attached to Final support structure design and testing is the
the front frame belly pan in the same location as responsibility of the manufacturer.
the front suitcase weight support frame using
class 10.9 fasteners (C).
9
1 - TO THE OWNER
BUSINESS BAND RADIO READY (If Equipped)

Provisions for installing business band radios have
been provided for tractors equipped with the 1
Business Band Radio Option.
The antenna mast mounting threaded spud (1) and

antenna lead wire (if equipped) are factory installed
in the roof of the cab approximately 2 inches (50
mm) under the cab top. The spud is already wired
with RF-58/U cable.
RH02H173
1. ANTENNA MAST MOUNTING THREADED SPUD
A locating dimple (2) in the cab top marks the

location for drilling the hole for the antenna mast.
NOTE: The antenna mast for a one-quarter (1/4)

2
wave UHF business band radio must be purchased
locally and must be compatible with an Antenna
Specialist Model K-794 low profile antenna mount.
See Antenna Specialist at www.antenna.com for
additional information.
MK00E007
2. LOCATING DIMPLE
10
1 - TO THE OWNER
The radio antenna lead wire (if equipped) (3) and

power and ground connector (4) are located under
the right side rear ROPS post trim cover.
MK00E041
3. RADIO ANTENNA LEAD WIRE
4. POWER AND GROUND CONNECTOR
The recommended location for mounting the

business band radio is under the RH stereo speaker
box. The mounting bracket supplied with the radio
must be used.
RI01009
If necessary, the stereo speaker may be removed to
install the radio mounting bracket.
NOTE: See your Case IH dealer for additional

information and procedures for installing a business
band radio if your tractor is not business band radio
ready.
RI01D008
11
1 - TO THE OWNER
QUADTRAC UNITS ONLY
1
5
3 2
MT05M014
1. DRIVE WHEEL 4. UNDERCARRIAGE
2. IDLER WHEEL 5. BELT DRIVE LUGS
3. ROLLER WHEELS 6. BELT TRACTION LUGS
TRACK AND UNDERCARRIAGE
Pre-Conditioning Rubber Tracks Hard Surface Road Transporting

New rubber tracks must be pre-conditioned BEFORE Long distance, hard surface roading of QUADTRAC
initial use and before roading the tractor on clean model tractors carrying HEAVY LOADS such as; full
hard roads to reduce accelerated belt scuffing. chemical tanks, TPH mounted equipment, or loaded
scrapers must be avoided whenever possible.
New tracks should be pre-conditioned with dirt or
some other non-caustic particulate material. This is High speed roading for long distances with heavy
done by spreading a thin layer of the material over loads can cause the tracks to overheat and cause
the entire undercarriage engaging surface of the severe damage.
belts and driving the tractor slowly for a brief time.
The silica present in dirt or similar material will act as If hard surface road transporting of heavy equipment
a lubricant and help the track conditioning process. cannot be avoided, the operator MUST reduce speed
periodically during transport to allow the tracks to
Conditioning may need to be done more than once if cool, and/or pull over and stop to check the tracks for
the tractor is roaded for extended distances. overheating.
After initial conditioning, the tractor should be
operated in normal tillage operations to fur ther Track Tensioning
condition the tracks. The track conditioning process
should be closely monitored for the first 150 hours of Mechanical track tension adjustments are not
service. After a reasonable amount of field time the required. Tracks are automatically tensioned
drive lug contact areas will SURFACE-HARDEN and whenever a remote hydraulic function is performed. If
become more resistant to heat and scuffing. track tension must be relieved for any reason, refer to
Track Tension Release section of this manual. DO
If accelerated scuffing should occur with high heat on NOT operate a tractor with tracks that are not
the drive lugs, see Track Alignment and Track properly tensioned.
Rotation section of this manual or contact your dealer
for service.
12
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
This section gives important safety information for your tractor.
SAFETY
Understand that your safety and the safety of other The safety information given in this manual does not
persons is measured by how you ser vice and replace safety codes, insurance needs, federal, state
operate this machine. Know the positions and and local laws. Make sure your machine has the
operation of all controls before you try to operate. correct equipment needed by the local laws and
MAKE SURE YOU CHECK ALL CONTROLS IN A regulations.
SAFE AREA BEFORE STARTING YOUR WORK.
CNH AMERICA, LLC is continuing to work for your
READ THIS MANUAL COMPLETELY and make sure safety by making tractors with better protection and
you understand the controls. All equipment has by providing these rules for safe operation.
limits. Make sure you understand the speed, brakes,
steering stability and load characteristics of this
machine before you start to operate.
WARNING: THIS SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL INDICATES IMPORTANT

SAFETY MESSAGES IN THIS MANUAL. WHEN YOU SEE THIS
! SYMBOL, CAREFULLY READ THE MESSAGE THAT FOLLOWS AND
BE ALERT TO THE POSSIBILITY OF PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
SM171B
! Safety Rules !
● Always sound horn before starting the tractor. ● A frequent cause of death or serious injury is
persons falling off machinery and being run over.
● Before starting the engine, be sure all operating Keep cab door closed. Instructional seat is used
controls are in neutral or park lock position. This only for instructing or service diagnosing only. DO
will eliminate accidental movement of the NOT permit others to ride, especially children.
machine or start up of power driven equipment. Seat belt (if equipped) must be worn at all times.
R106E M488C
● Operate controls only when seated in the ● Before leaving the tractor, stop the engine, put all
operator’s seat. R137A controls in neutral or park lock position, remove
the key from the key switch. R301B
● Securely fasten your seat belt. Your machine is
equipped with a ROPS cab, ROPS canopy or ● Stay off slopes too steep for safe operation. Shift
ROPS frame for your protection. The seat belt down before you start up or down a hill with a
can help insure your safety if it is used and heavy load. Avoid “free wheeling”. R123A
maintained. Never wear a seat belt loosely or
with slack in the belt system. Never wear the belt ● Do not drive on roads, or at high speed anywhere,
in a twisted condition or pinched between the with the differential lock engaged. Difficult
seat structural members. Inspect seat belt steering will occur and can result in an accident.
webbing, buckle and retractors to ensure they are In field operation, use the differential lock for
not damaged. If damage is apparent, repair traction improvement, but release for turning at
before operating the tractor. M437A row ends. R116A
13
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
! Safety Rules !
● Travel speed should be such that complete control ● When doing stationary PTO work, install the front
and machine stability are maintained at all times. and rear frame articulation block to prevent
Where possible, avoid operating near ditches, accidental articulation of the tractor. Put the
embankments and holes. Reduce speed when transmission control lever in the park position or
turning, crossing slopes, and on rough, slick or apply the park brake. R298B
muddy surfaces. R109B
● Never operate the engine in a closed building.
● Collision of high speed road traffic and slow
Proper ventilation is required under all
moving machines can cause personal injury or
circumstances. R142A
death. On roads, use flasher lights according to
local laws. Keep SMV emblem visible. Pull over to
● Never refuel the machine when the engine is hot
let faster traffic pass. Slow down and signal
or running. Never smoke while refueling. R139C
before turning off. R110E
● Check and service cooling system according to

● Make sure that the weight of a trailed vehicle that the maintenance instructions. Hot coolant can
is not equipped with brakes NEVER EXCEEDS spray out if the deaeration tank cap is removed
the weight of the machine that is towing the while system is hot. To remove the deaeration
vehicle. Stopping distance increases with tank cap, let system cool, turn to first notch, then
increasing speed as the weight of the towed load wait until all pressure is released. Scalding can
increases, especially on hills and slopes. R114B result from fast removal of the cap. R141C
● Extra weight and bad traction conditions such as ● Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel leaking under pressure
mud or ice increase your stopping distance. can penetrate the skin and cause infection or
Remember that liquid in the tires, weights on the other injury.
machine or wheels, tanks filled with fertilizer, To Prevent Personal Injury:
herbicides or insecticides - all these add weight Relieve all pressure before disconnecting fluid
and increase the distance you need in which to lines.
stop. R138B B e fo r e a p p l y i n g p r e s s u r e , m a ke s u r e a l l
connections are tight and components are in
● PTO driven machinery can cause serious injury. good condition.
Before working on or near the PTO shaft, or Never use your hand to check for suspected leaks
servicing or clearing the driven machine, put the under pressure.
PTO lever in the DISENGAGE position and Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this
STOP the engine. R154A purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your
doctor immediately.
● Whenever a PTO driven machine is in operation, R149B
the PTO guard must be in place for most
● Battery explosion and/or damage to electrical
operations to prevent injury to the operator or
components can result from improper connection
bystanders. Where attachments, such as pumps,
of booster batteries or charger. Connect positive
are installed on the PTO shaft (especially if the
to positive and negative to negative. Externally,
tractor PTO guard is moved upward or removed),
battery acid can cause burns and blindness, and
extended shielding equivalent to the PTO guard
taken internally it is poisonous. R146B
must be installed with the attachment. Install the
PTO guard to its original position immediately ● It is good practice to carry a fire extinguisher on
when the attachment is removed. R273A
the machine. Be sure that the extinguisher is
properly maintained and be familiar with its
● When doing stationary PTO work and dismounting proper use. R102B
from the tractor with the PTO running, keep clear
of all moving parts as they are a potential safety ● Clean tractor of field trash daily or more frequently
hazard. R127A depending upon conditions. Trash accumulation
on the tractor can cause damage and fire. M791
14
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
! Safety Rules !
● Do not turn the steering wheel until everyone is ● Do not tamper with the ballast on the High
clear of the equipment and the center hinge area. Intensity Discharge Head Lamp as it contains
Turning the steering wheel can swing the tractor high voltage. Personal injury or death can occur.
and equipment from side to side. R303A M639
● Always use the hand rails when mounting or ● To prevent tractor movement, always apply the
dismounting from the tractor. Always face the park brake whenever the tractor is parked with
tractor when mounting and dismounting. This will the engine running. The park brake is applied
provide more secure hand and feet mobility to automatically when the engine is shut down. M627
help prevent slipping and possible injury. R304A
● Always start the engine from the operator’s seat.
● Always keep the cab windows and rear view Never attempt to bypass start, the tractor may
mirrors clean to provide the best all around suddenly start and move resulting in serious or
visibility while operating the tractor. R416 fatal injury. M787
● Do not pull with elastic tow ropes. Elastic tow rope ● To avoid possible eye damage from microwave
store energy. Sudden release may cause injury signals emitted by the radar sensor, do not look
or death. directly into the sensor face. M788
M425
● The operator cab does not protect against inhaling
● Young children should not be permitted to operate
harmful pesticides or chemicals. Please utilize an
or ride the tractor under any circumstances. M630
approved respirator or other personal protection
● Do not look directly into the High Intensity equipment as recommended by the chemical
Discharge Head Lamp. Eye damage can occur. supplier when using these materials.
M792
M638
15
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
! PERSONAL SAFETY !
Throughout this manual and on the machine’s safety ● CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous
decals, you will find precautionar y statements: situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor
DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION followed by or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert
specific instructions or ISO two panel safety pictorial against unsafe practices. The color associated
symbols. These precautions are intended for your with Caution is YELLOW.
personal safety.
ISO two panel pictorial symbol decals are defined
Failure to follow the DANGER, WARNING or as follows:
CAUTION instructions may result in death or serious
bodily injury. ● The first panel indicates the nature of the hazard.
DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION are defined as ● The second panel indicates the appropriate
follows: avoidance of the hazard.
● DANGER: Indicates an immediate hazardous ● Background color is YELLOW.

situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. The color associated with Danger Prohibition symbols such as and STOP
is RED. if used, are RED.
● WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous

situation that, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury. The color associated with
Warning is ORANGE.
! INSTRUCTIONAL SEAT SAFETY !

● Extra riders, especially children, are not permitted ● When the Instructional Seat is occupied, the
to ride on the machine. following precautions must be taken:
A. Machine should be driven at a slower speed
● The Instructional Seat is used only when training a
and on level ground.
new operator or when a service technician is
diagnosing a mechanical problem. B. Avoid driving on highways or public roads.
C. Avoid quick starts or stops.
● A frequent cause of personal injury or death is
persons falling off and being run over. DO NOT D. Avoid sharp turns.
permit others to ride, except in designated
E. Always wear seat belts.
instructional seat.
F. Cab door must be closed at all times.
WARNING: Before starting the engine make sure seat belts are securely fastened. The seat belt can help
ensure your safety if it is used and properly maintained. Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the
! belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted condition or pinched between the seat structural members.
M422B
WARNING: A frequent cause of personal injury or death is persons falling off and being run over. DO NOT
! permit others to ride, except in designated instructional seat. Instructor must wear the instructional seat belt.
M488A
16
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
! MAINTENANCE SAFETY !
● Always keep safety and informational decals clean ● Always stop the engine and remove the key from
and visible. Replace decals that are damaged, the key switch when leaving the operator’s seat
lost, painted over or cannot be read. or the machine.
● When assembling, operating or servicing the ● When servicing the machine, always have the
machine, wear protective clothing and personal machine on a firm, level surface.
safety devices that are necessary for the
particular procedure. Some personal safety ● If shields or guards are removed or opened for
devices that may be necessary are protective service, always replace them before operating
shoes, face and/or eye protection, hard hat, the machine. Never operate machine with
heavy gloves, filter mask and hearing protection. missing or open shields or guards.
● DO NOT wear jewelry or loose fitting clothing that ● Keep the area used for servicing the machine
may get caught in moving parts. Always wear clean and dry. Wet or oily floors are slippery. Wet
close fitting clothing. Keep hands, feet, clothing spots can be dangerous when working with
and hair away from moving parts. electrical equipment. Be sure all electrical outlets
and tools are properly grounded.
● Never attempt to clear obstructions or objects from
the machine while the engine is running.
! FIRE SAFETY !
● Fire risks can be minimized by frequent removal of ● DO NOT use ether or starting fluid to start tractors
accumulated crop material, trash or debris from equipped with a grid heater in the engine intake
the machine. system. Using ether or starting fluid can result in
an explosion or fire.
● Remove all crop material, trash or debris from the
machine each day. Especially, check the engine Refer to Fire Prevention in the Maintenance Section
area and exhaust system. of this manual for additional information.
● Engine fuel can cause an explosion or fire. DO

NOT fill the fuel tank with the engine running; if
you are near an open fire; or if you are welding,
smoking, etc.
17
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
! BATTERY SAFETY !
● DO NOT make sparks or use an open flame near ● BATTERY ACID CAUSES SEVERE BURNS.
the battery. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with
skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote: EXTERNAL -
● When disconnecting battery terminals, remove the flush with water. INTERNAL - Drink large
Negative (-) cable first; then remove the Positive quantities of water or milk. DO NOT induce
(+). When connecting cables, connect the vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.
Positive (+) cable first, then connect the Negative EYES - Flush with water for 15 minutes and seek
(-). medical attention immediately. BATTERIES
PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES. Keep sparks,
● Disconnect the battery (both terminals) before flame, cigars and cigarettes away. Ventilate when
welding on any part of the machine. Failure to do charging or using in enclosed area. Always wear
so may cause damage to sensitive electrical eye protection when working near batteries.
components. Wash hands after handling. KEEP OUT OF
REACH OF CHILDREN.
● When working around storage batteries,

remember that all of the exposed metal parts are
“live”. Never lay a metal object across the
terminals because a spark, short circuit,
explosion or personal injury may result.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
! MACHINE OPERATION AND ROLL-OVER SAFETY !

● DO NOT allow other persons to ride on the ● Before you service your machine, check the
machine. Other persons can fall or can cause an MSDS for each fluid, lubricant, etc., used in this
accident. machine. This information indicates what the
risks are and how to service the machine safely.
● DO NOT operate the machine while under the Follow this information when servicing the
influence of alcohol or drugs. machine.
● Be alert and always know the location of all ● Before you service this machine and before you
workers in your area. Keep all other persons dispose of the old fluids and lubricants, always
completely away from your machine. Injury or remember the environment. DO NOT put oil or
death can result if you do not follow these fluids into the ground or into containers that can
instructions. leak.
● Check with your local environmental or recycling

center or your Case IH dealer for correct disposal
information.
18
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
! HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS !
● If you are exposed to or come in contact with ● Before you service your machine, check the
hazardous chemicals, you can be seriously MSDS for each fluid, lubricant, etc., used in this
injured. The fluids, lubricants, paints, adhesives, machine. This information indicates what the
coolants, etc., used with your machine can be risks are and how to service the machine safely.
hazardous. Follow this information when servicing the
machine.
● Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) provide
information about the chemical substances within ● Before you service this machine and before you
a product, safe handling procedures, first aid dispose of the old fluids and lubricants, always
measures and procedures to be taken when the remember the environment. DO NOT put oil or
product is accidentally spilled or released. MSDS fluids into the ground or into containers that can
are available from your Case IH dealer. leak.
● Check with your local environmental or recycling

center or your dealer for correct disposal
information.
19
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
SAFETY DECALS
IMPORTANT: Install new decals if the old decals are To prevent personal injury:
destroyed, lost, painted over or cannot be read.
● Stay clear of hinge area when engine is running.
When parts are replaced that have decals, make
sure you install a new decal with each new part. ● Shut off engine before servicing hinge area.
Keep the decals clean. When you clean the decals,
● Install articulation cylinder locking blocks before
use only a cloth, water and soap. Do not use solvent,
lifting tractor, transporting tractor on another
gasoline, etc.
vehicle, performing maintenance in hinge area or
NOTE: New decals are available from your dealer. operating stationary PTO equipment.
● Be sure to remove locking blocks before driving
tractor.
1
● Keep driveline shields in place.
MK99K145
341953A2
1. ARTICULATION HINGE DECAL
RR00G093
327567A3
2. PTO DECAL
20
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
MK01G270
MT06A022
ENGINE AIR CLEANER TOP COVER

AND AIR STACK DECAL
325936A2
3. ROPS POST DECAL
21
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
MK01G112 A187743
4. RADAR SENSOR DECAL
MT07F085
41074A1
INSTRUCTIONAL SEAT DECAL

TOP OF FRONT LEFT
ROPS POST
5. FRONT WEIGHT DECAL
22
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
MA03G019
6. BATTERY DECAL
6
MA03G010
MA03G035
7
7. BATTERY CHARGING POST DECAL
MA03G010
MA03G006
8. THREE POINT HITCH REMOTE

CONTROL DECAL
MA03G017
23
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
MA07F041 MT05M089
9. RH WINDOW EXIT DECAL
24
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
ARTICULATION CYLINDER LOCKING BLOCKS

Steering cylinder locking blocks are supplied with the
tractor. The locking blocks are installed on the rod
end of the steering cylinders to hold the tractor
articulation point in a rigid position. The locking
blocks MUST be installed for safety when doing the
following operations:
1. Before doing service work near the center of the
tractor.
2. Before lifting or transporting the tractor on
another vehicle.
3. Before operating stationary PTO equipment.
MK01G280
Make sure the locking blocks are removed and
LOCKING BLOCKS
installed in the storage position before attempting to
steer the tractor.
MK01G182
LOCKING BLOCKS STORED ON THE LOWER LH FRONT SIDE

MK99M001
OF THE FUEL TANK
LOCKING BLOCK INSTALLED ON ROD END OF
ARTICULATION STEERING CYLINDER
MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING THE TRACTOR
WARNING: Jumping on or off the machine

can cause an injury. Always face the
machine, use the hand rails and steps, and
get on or off slowly. Maintain a three point
! contact to avoid falling, (both hands on rails
and one foot on the step, or one hand on the
hand rail and both feet on the steps).
SM516
To avoid injury and provide more secure mobility,

always face the tractor and use the hand rails and
steps provided when entering or leaving the tractor
cab.
MT07E024
25
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
ROLLOVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
! Attention !
Your machine is equipped with an operator Protective

Structure, such as: a Rollover Protective Structure
(ROPS) or Falling Object Protective Structure
(FOPS) or Cab with ROPS. A ROPS may be a cab
frame or a two-posted or four-posted structure used
for the protection of the operator to minimize the
possibility of serious injury. The mounting structure
and fasteners forming the mounting connection with
the machine are part of the ROPS.
Th e P r o t ec t i ve S t r u c t ur e i s a s p e c i al s a fe ty
component of your machine.
DO NOT atta ch any devic e to the Pr otec tive MT05M072
Structure for pulling purposes. DO NOT drill holes to

the Protective Structure.
The Protective Str ucture and interconnecting ● The mounting or suspension for the Protective
components are a certified system. Any damage, Structure, operator seat and suspension, seat
fire, corrosion or modification will weaken the belts and mounting components and wiring within
structure and reduce your protection. If this occurs, the operator’s protective system MUST be
the Protective Structure MUST be replaced so that carefully inspected for damage.
it will provide the same protect ion as a new
● All damaged parts MUST be replaced.
Protective Str ucture. Contact your dealer for
Protective Structure inspection and replacement.
DO NOT WELD, DRILL HOLES, ATTEMPT TO
After an accident, fire, tip or rollover, the following STRAIGHTEN OR REPAIR THE PROTECTIVE
MUST be performed before returning the machine to STRUCTURE. MODIFICATION IN ANY WAY CAN
field or job site operation: REDUCE THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF THE
STRUCTURE WHICH COULD CAUSE DEATH OR
● The Protective Structure MUST be replaced.
SERIOUS INJURY IN THE EVENT OF FIRE, TIP,
ROLLOVER, COLLISION OR ACCIDENT.
ROPS Label
87564878
STANDARD MODELS
26
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
87564877
SCRAPER MODELS
CLEANING CAB WINDOWS

Keep your cab windows clean for good, all-around
visibility. Use a glass cleaner and water mixture, long
handled soft brush and glass squeegee to clean the
outside of the cab windows and rear view mirrors.
MK99K108
RH SERVICE WINDOW
For situations requiring an alternate exit from the cab
when the LH cab door cannot be used to exit, lift
upward on the RH side service window latch handle.
Push the latch handle sideways (outward) to release
the handle from the striker pin. The service window
will swing open.
IMPORTANT: The service window must be closed

and latched when in operation.
MT05M089
INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR

Keep the rear view mirror clean and adjusted for the
best all-around operator view to the rear when sitting
in the operator’s seat.
MK99K142
27
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
SEAT BELTS
WARNING: A frequent cause of death or WARNING: Securely fasten your seat belt.
serious injury is persons falling off machinery Your machine is equipped with a ROPS cab,
and being run over. Keep cab door closed. ROPS canopy or ROPS frame for your
Instructional seat is used for instructing or protection. The seat belt can help insure your
! service diagnosing only. DO NOT permit safety if it is used and maintained. Never
others to ride, especially children. Seat belt wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the
must be worn at all times.
M488C
! belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted
condition or pinched between the seat
structural members. Inspect seat belt
webbing, buckle and retractors to ensure
th e y a r e n o t d a m a g e d . If d a m a g e i s
apparent, repair before operating the tractor.
M437A
1. Adjust the position of the operator’s seat. Pull the

seat belt completely across your body. Push the
metal eye into the buckle until it locks.
MK00B223
2. Adjust the position of the seat belt as low on your
body as possible.
MK00B225
28
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
3. To release the seat belt, push the button in the

center of the buckle and separate the buckle and
metal eye.
IMPORTANT: An Operator Presence Safety

Switch is designed into the Powershift Control and
PTO electrical circuit, activated by the operator sitting
on the seat.
WARNING: Only operate the machine when

sitting on the seat. Do not try to bypass the
Operator Presence Safety Switch by
! putting heavy objects on the seat. This can
MK00B224
result in serious injury or death.
SM519
29
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
TRACTOR WARNING LAMPS AND SMV SYMBOL
1 1
4 4
3
1 1
2 2
MT07E028
1. AMBER TURN SIGNALS 3. SMV SYMBOL

2. TAIL/STOP LAMPS 4. WIDE MARKER LIGHTS
WARNING: Collision of high speed road traffic and slow moving

machines can cause personal injury or death. On roads, use flasher/lights
! according to local laws. Pull over to let faster traffic pass. Slow down and
signal before turning off. M729
Your trac tor has fl ashing war ni ng lamps and The SMV symbol must be replaced when the bright
directional turn signals (1), tail/stop lamps (2) and a orange, center triangle has noticeably faded to a pale
slow moving vehicle (SMV) symbol (3). Wide orange color. This fading of the orange fluorescent
transport lights (4) are also available and operate the center will occur due to long exposure to sunlight,
same as the flashing warning lamps. Make sure to and reduces daytime identification by approaching
use these items correctly when operating the tractor vehicle drivers.
on a road. The proper use of these items will provide
safety and protection for the tractor operator and IMPORTANT: When towing an implement or wagon
other vehicle operators. with the tractor, the complete rear area warning
system (amber warning lamps, red tail lamps, and
The flashing amber warning lamps must be operating SMV symbol) must be easily seen by any vehicle
when the tractor is operated on a road during the day operator coming near the tractor.
or night. A vehicle operator that comes near the
tractor must see the SMV symbol and tail lamps from
the rear and the flashing amber warning lamps from
Wide Marker Lamp Adjustment
the front and rear. Keep all lamps and reflectors Adjust wide marker transport lamps to within 150 mm
clean. (6 inches) of the outer edge of the outside tire.
NOTE: The tail lamps will flash in sequence with the

warning lamps.
30
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
IMPLEMENT WARNING LAMPS AND SMV SYMBOL

When towing an implement or wagon on roads
during the day or at night, use implement warning
lamps for the safety of the tractor operator and other
vehicle operators.
1. If the flashing marker lamps and red tail lamps on
the tractor cannot be seen because of the 2
implement.
2. If the implement is four feet (1219 mm) or longer
behind the hitch point of the tractor.
3. If the towed implement is four feet (1219 mm) or 1
more to the left of the center of the tractor.
Install the marker lamps to show the very far left side MA07D001
of the implement.
Where required, the Slow Moving Vehicle (SMV)
symbol (1) must be installed on the center, rear part
of the implement or wagon. Install the SMV symbol
on the implement or wagon using a special bracket
(2) which you can get from your dealer.
IMPORTANT: When required, use the implement

marker lamp and the SMV symbol for protection of
vehicle operators.
31
2 - SAFETY/DECALS
SAFETY CHAIN
When towing equipment on a highway, use a safety IMPORTANT: The chain (2) must pass through the
chain as an auxiliary connection between the tractor chain support (5) loop around and attached to the
and the towed equipment. The safety chain must drawbar support (4) as shown. DO NOT fasten the
have a rating greater than the gross load of the towed chain to the chain support.
equipment. Connect the chain to the tractor drawbar
TYPICAL SAFETY CHAIN CONNECTION
support and the towed equipment as shown in the
illustration. Check the adjustment of the safety chain 1. TOWED EQUIPMENT 4. DRAWBAR SUPPORT
by turning the tractor completely to the right and left. 2. SAFETY CHAIN 5. CHAIN SUPPORT
3. DRAWBAR
Adjust the chain as necessary.
STANDARD DRAWBAR 6400 TO 20200 LB CHAIN HEAVY DUTY DRAWBAR 5300 TO 20200 LB
CHAIN
3
2
4
2 5 3
5 1
MT07F092 MT07F019
STANDARD DRAWBAR 30400 TO 60600 LB HEAVY DUTY DRAWBAR 30400 TO 60600 LB

CHAIN CHAIN
2 4
2
3
4 3
5 5 1
MT07F093 MT07E018
32
3 - OPERATING CONTROLS
TRACTOR ACCESS
The following section gives an overview and location of all the cab
controls. For in-depth operating instructions, refer to the appropriate
section in this manual for further details.
Cab Door Lock

Use the key for the key switch to lock or unlock the
cab door from the outside.
When mounting or dismounting the tractor, use the

hand rails and steps provided.
MK99K144
WARNING: Jumping on or off the machine can cause an injury. Always

face the machine, use the hand rails and steps, and get on or off slowly.
! Maintain a three point contact to avoid falling, (both hands on rails and one
foot on the step, or one hand on the hand rail and both feet on the steps).
SM516
MT07E024
33
Cab Door Controls
Control Handle - Outside
Push in on the handle button to open the cab door.

The door is equipped with a dampener for opening.
MK98C002
Control Handle - Inside 2

To open the door from the inside, pull inward on the 1
door latch handle (1).
IMPORTANT: Never operate the tractor with the cab

door open.
MK00E001
Inside Door Lock
To lock the door from the inside, push down on the

lock button (2). Pull up on the button to unlock the
door.
NOTE: When the door is locked from the inside the

door can still be opened by pushing the button on the
outside door handle.
34
OPERATOR’S SEAT WITH AIR SUSPENSION

Your operator’s seat is equipped with controls to adjust the seat for your personal comfort. Identify your seat and
adjust the seat as explained.
Positive Response Seat

1 2
1. SEAT SWIVEL - The seat swivels to
the right and left of center. Lift the
swivel control lever UP until seat can
swivel. Turn the seat to the desired
position. Release the lever to lock
the seat in the desired position.
2. FORE/AFT - The operator’s seat can

5
be adjusted forward or rearward for 4 3
individual operator size. Pull UP on
the lever and slide the seat to the
MT04M048
desired position. Release the lever
1. SEAT SWIVEL 4. LATERAL ISOLATOR
to lock the seat in position. 2. FORE/AFT 5. RIDE FIRMNESS
3. FORE/AFT ISOLATOR CONTROL
3. FORE/AFT ISOLATOR - The seat
can float a short distance forward or
rearward when the isolator lever is
lowered. With the isolator lever in the
UP position, the seat does not float
fo r wa r d o r r e a r wa r d . Th e f l o a t
position absorbs s hocks and
re duc es operat or fa tigue whe n
traveling over rough terrain.
4. LATERAL ISOLATOR - The seat

can float a short distance right or left
when the isolator lever is DOWN.
With the isolator lever in the UP
position, the seat does not float right
or left. The float (DOWN) position
absor bs shocks and reduces
operator fatigue when traveling over
rough terrain.
5. RIDE FIRMNESS CONTROL - The

amount of firmness can be adjusted
for personal comfort. This control is
infinitely adjustable. The lever up is
soft. Push the lever down to increase
the firmness.
35
6. HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT - The seat

can be raised or lowered by
increasing or decreasing the air 8
pressure to the seat.
Press the top of the switch to increase air pressure

and raise the seat. Press the switch bottom to
decrease air pressure and lower the seat.
The key switch must be in the ACCESSORY or ON
position to raise or lower the seat. 6 10
7
7. LH ARMREST KNOB - The left hand armrest
tilts up for easier access to the operator seat.
9
Tur n the knob to adjust ar mrest angle: 23 MT07F091
degrees upward or 12 degrees downward from

horizontal.
8. SEAT HEATER CONTROL - The

seat heater control is a two position
rocker switch. Depress the switch 11 10
once for HI, again for MEDIUM,
again for LO and then OFF.
9. BACKREST ADJUSTER - To adjust

the backrest, lift the control and tilt
the backrest to the needed position.
Release the control to hold the
backrest in the selected position. RH02G064
10. RIDE CONTROL - The ride control

switch is a three position rocker
switch that adjusts the seat ride
damper between LO, MEDIUM or
HIGH.
11. LUMBAR ADJUSTER - Adjust the

lumbar support for personal back
comfort. Turn the knob downward to
increase suppor t. Tur n the knob
upward to decrease support.
36
INSTRUCTIONAL SEAT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: A frequent cause of death or

serious injury is persons falling off machinery
and being run over. Keep cab door closed.
! Instructional seat is used for instructing or
service diagnosing only. DO NOT permit
others to ride, especially children. Seat belt
must be worn at all times. M488C
The instructional seat with seat belts is available for

the purpose of providing seating for an experienced
operator when a new operator is being trained on the
operation of the tractor.
MK99M007
NOTE: This seat is not intended as a passenger

seat or for use by children.
The backrest of the operator training seat may be

folded forward and down when the seat is not used
for training. This will expose the cup holder and the
utility tray.
MK01G080
Additional storage is also provided under the seat
cushion.
MK01G079
37
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS
MK99M130
1. TRANSMISSION 2. DIRECTION TURN 3. TURN SIGNAL
CONTROL LEVER SIGNAL SWITCH INDICATORS
1. TRANSMISSION CONTROL LEVER (Powershift B. When the turn signal switch lever is pushed
Only) - Lift the lever and move the lever from the DOWN, the LH cab amber hazard lamps,
upper PARK position to the left one indent to LH wide transport lamp, LH tail lamp and
select FORWARD. One more indent to the left steering column LH indicator (3) will flash
will select NEUTRAL, and all the way to the left ON and OFF. The RH cab amber hazard
w i l l s e l e c t R E V E R S E . S e e Po w e r s h i f t lamps, RH wide transport lamp, RH tail lamp
Transmission Control System for detailed and steering column turn indicator lamp (3)
information. will be steady ON.
NOTE: The control lever PARK position is NOT a HORN BUTTON - The horn button is part of the
mechanical function of the transmission. The PARK direction turn signal lever. Push IN on the end of
position activates the multiple disk park brake circuit. the lever to operate the horn.
The control lever must be in PARK when starting the
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH - The high/low beam
engine.
switch is part of the direction turn signal lever. The
2. DIRECTION TURN SIGNAL SWITCH - Move centered lever position is LOW beam. Move the
the turn signal lever UP to indicate a RIGHT turn. switch away from the center position for HIGH
Move the turn signal lever DOWN to indicate a beam. The high beam indicator lamp on the
LEFT turn. The center position is OFF. When the instrument cluster will illuminate when in high
Direction Turn Signal Switch (2) is used, the beam. Pull the lever toward you for MOMENTARY
amber hazard lamps will be illuminated as HIGH beam even when the lights are OFF to flash
follows: the lights.
A. When the turn signal lever is pushed UP, the
NOTE: This switch works whenever the front
RH cab amber hazard lamps, RH wide
headlights are ON to turn the HIGH beam and
transport lamp, RH tail lamp and steering
CENTER lamp ON and OFF, even when only the
column RH indicator (3) will flash ON and
work lamps are ON.
OFF. The LH cab amber hazard lamps, LH
wide transpor t lamp, LH tail lamp and 3. TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS - Indicates which
steering column turn indicator lamp (3) will direction turn signal is activated or when front
be steady ON. and rear amber warning lamps are flashing.
38
FOOT PEDALS
1. INCHING PEDAL - The inching pedal is used to
engage and disengage the transmission. Use the
inching pedal for smooth controlled start-ups and
when connecting implements. See Inching Pedal
Operation.
2. BRAKE PEDAL - Push the brake pedal down
and apply pressure as required to bring the 6 6
tractor to a smooth and controlled stop.
IMPORTANT: For increased service life of brake
components, DO NOT ride the brake pedal during
tractor operation.
1 5 2 3
3. ELECTRONIC ENGINE DECELERATOR
S W I T C H - W h e n t h e sw i t c h i s a c t u a t e d MT05M011
(depressed and released) the engine speed will 1. INCHING PEDAL 4. MECHANICAL
be reduced to a percentage (10-90%) of the DECELERATOR (SEE
ILLUSTRATION BELOW)
current throttle position. When the decelerator 2. BRAKE PEDAL 5. STEERING COLUMN
swi tch i s ac tua ted a gai n (d epr es s ed an d TILT/TELESCOPIC PEDAL
released) the engine speed will return to the 3. ELECTRONIC 6. FOOT RESTS
engine speed for the current throttle position. ENGINE
The default deceleration percentage setting from DECELERATOR
SWITCH
the factory is 40%. This results in a decelerated
speed of approximately 1370-1440 engine RPM
depending on tractor model. The deceleration
feature always defaults to OFF when the tractor
is started.
4. MECHANCAL DECELERATOR (IF EQUIPPED)
- If equipped with a foot operated decelerator,
push the pedal down to override the hand throttle
setting to reduce engine speed. When the foot
pedal is released, engine speed will return to the
current hand throttle setting.
5. STEERING COLUMN TILT/TELESCOPIC

PEDAL - The steering column can be tilted to
eleven different positions. To tilt or telescope the
steering wheel, push the tilt/telescopic pedal
down and move the steering column up or down
or pull out or push in to the desired position. 4
Release the tilt/telescopic pedal to keep the
MK00B156
column in the selected position. 4. MECHANICAL DECELERATOR
NOTE: Tilting can be done by partially depressing

the pedal. Full depression of the pedal is required to
telescope the steering column.
6. FOOT RESTS.
WARNING: Extra weight and bad traction conditions such as mud or ice increase your
stopping distance. Remember that the liquid in the tires, weights on the machine or wheels,
! tanks filled with fertilizer, herbicides or insecticides - all these add weight and increase the
distance you need in which to stop. SM0113B
39
Template Name: OML_1_col 6-6230 Alt= to hide template information
Template Date: 1994_04_22 Alt+ to display template information
3-OPERATING CONTROLS
CENTER CONSOLE CONTROLS

ETHER START AID SWITCH (If Equipped) - Two
position rocker switch to activate the ether start aid
for cold temperature starting. Switch positions are
OFF and momentary ON (switch will return to OFF
pos ition when released). Switch can only be
activated when the key switch is in the START or
RUN position. See Engine Starting Procedure for
complete information.
NOTE: Ether start cannot be activated when the

engine speed is above 500 rpm.
MK00B158
LH SIDE
KEYSWITCH - This is a four position switch.
NOTE: The switch positions are as follows:

AC C E S S O RY P O S I T I O N - C o u n t e r -
clockwise from OFF position. Use this
position to operate the radio when the
engine is not running.
OFF POSITION - Turn the key to the OFF

position to stop the engine. The key can
only be removed from the OFF position.
ON POSITION - First position clockwise MK01G302

from OFF.
RH SIDE
START POSITION - Hold the key switch to
the second position clockwise from OFF.
The starter motor will crank the engine.
Release the key switch when the engine
starts to run.
AIR DISCHARGE OUTLETS - Ten multi-directional

and infinitely adjustable air outlet louvers (1) and
three defrost outlets are located in the center console
for directing heated or cooled air for operator comfort.
1
MK00B158
40
24-SPEED TRANSMISSION CONTROLS (If Equipped)
Transmission Shift Levers (24-Speed Only)

The gear shift lever (1) and range shift lever (2) for
the 24 speed manual shift transmission are located 2
on the RH side of the center console. See 24 Speed
Transmission Operation for shifting procedures.
1
HI-LO Range Indicator Lamp
(24-Speed Only) MK01A016
An indicator lamp located on the ROPS instrument

panel will illuminate when transmission HI or LO
range is selected. The upper lamp icon (1) will
indicate HI range operation. The lower lamp icon (2)
will indicate LO range operation.
1
Park Brake Switch

(24-Speed Only) MK01G300
WARNING: To prevent tractor movement,

always apply the park brake before starting
! the engine and when the tractor is parked
with the engine running. SM0
The park brake is spring applied and pressure

released. The park brake is applied automatically 1
when the engine is shut off. Whenever the tractor
is parked with the engine running, the park
brake must be applied t o prevent t ractor
movement.
To apply the park brake when the engine is running, MK01G300
depress the TOP of the rocker switch (1) located on

the RH ROPS panel. The park brake indicator lamp
icon on the switch and instrument cluster will
illuminate whenever the park brake is applied.
Depress the LOWER end of the switch to release
the park brake.
41
RIGHT HAND ARMREST CONSOLE CONTROLS
6 6 6 6
9 11 12
2 5
1 14 4
13
7 9 15
10
19 20
18 16
17
MT07E014
1. HAND THROTTLE LEVER 8. HITCH POSITION CONTROL 15. REMOTE AUTO MODE CONTROL
2. GEAR SELECT BUTTON 9. HITCH LOWER LIMIT POSITION RING 16. PTO CONTROL
3. REMOTE CONTROL LEVER (1-4) 10. ELECTRONIC END OF ROW STEP 17. DISPLAY SELECTION KNOB FOR
SWITCH IF EQUIPPED AFS 200
4. FIFTH REMOTE CONTROL 11. REAR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL 18. HOME SWITCH FOR AFS 200
5. FIFTH REMOTE FLOW CONTROL 12. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL LOCK 19. ESCAPE SWITCH FOR AFS 200
CONTROL OR FRONT STEERING ON
STX 335 ACCUSTEER ONLY
6. REMOTE FUNCTION CONTROL (1-4) 13. SLIP LIMIT CONTROL OR ENGINE 20. ACCUGUIDE ENGAGE SWITCH
BRAKE IF EQUIPPED
7. HITCH UP/DOWN CONTROL 14. AUTO SHIFT CONTROL
Hand Throttle Lever

The hand throttle lever (1) is used to control
engine speed. To increase engine speed,
move the lever forward. To decrease engine 1
speed, move the lever rearward.
MT04K031
42
RH ARMREST CONTROL CONSOLE
Gear Switches (Powershift Only)

Push the top of the switch (1) to upshift the
transmission. Push the bottom of the switch
to downshift the transmission. Use the
SELECT SHIFT (2) when selecting single
gear shifting. See Shifting The Powershift 1
Transmission for more details.
HI-LO Range Shifting

MT04K031
(24 Speed Only)
The switch used to control the HI-LO range
powershift is located on the throttle control
handle. Depress the top of the switch (1) to
upshift to HI range. Depress the bottom of
the switch (2) to downshift to LO range.. 1
NOTE: The HI-LO range shift switch can

be used to increase or decrease any
selected gear ratio at any time on the go
without using the inching (clutch) pedal.
2
MK99M030
43
Electric Remote Control Levers (As Equipped)

Tractors are equipped with electrically
controlled remote valves to control the flow
of hydraulic fluid to the first, second, third
and four th remote. See Remote Valve
Function Control.
NOTE: Electrically operated remote valves

have timer controlled raise/lower detents.
When the tractor is equipped with 1 3
Performance Instrumentation, each remote
2 4
valve’s (1-5) kickout time can be set and
displayed. See Individual Remote Valve
Timer Information for more information.
MT04M006
5th Remote Control (If Equipped)

T h i s t w o - p o s i t i o n ( ex t e n d / r e t r a c t )
momentary rocker switch controls the flow
of hydraulic fluid to the fifth remote coupler
at the tractor rear.
MT07E017
5th Remote Flow Control (If

Equipped)
This knob controls the flow rate for the
fifth remote coupler at the tractor rear.
Turn the control clockwise to increase
flow or counterclockwise to decrease the
flow rate.
MT07E020
44
Electric Remote Valve Function Control

The levers control the function of each remote
hydraulic control lever. The lever has five positions.
1. Hydraulic Motor Position - Sets the remote

circuit for hydraulic motor use.
2. Non-Detent Raise Position - Used when

operating non-detented equipment or
attachments, e.g. a loader.
3. Full Function Position - Allows full function of

the remote lever.
4. Float Lock-Out Position - Prevents the remote MT04M006
lever from going into float position.

1 3
5. Lock Position - Locks the remote lever for 2 4 5
transport.
Hitch Up/Down Switch

MA994N045
The up/down switch raises or lowers the
hitch to operator selected preset positions
without changing any of the hitch
adjustments.
UP - Press the switch bottom to raise the
hitch to the position set by the upper limit
control.
DOWN - Press the switch top to lower the hitch to the
position set by the hitch position control at the speed
set by the drop speed control.
EXPRESS DOWN - Double click and hold the top of
the switch momentarily to bypass the drop speed and
MT07E019
position control settings to lower the hitch at
maximum speed.
45
Hitch Position Control

The Hitch Position Control raises or
lowers a hitch mounted implement
and selects the working depth of the
implement. To lower the implement,
rotate the control counterclockwise.
To raise the implement, rotate the
control clockwise. See Hitch Drop Speed Control in
Right Hand Armrest Controls for transpor t lock
function.
Hitch Lower Limit Stop MT07E017

This adjustable outer ring (1) sets a detent for the
lowest desired position for the hitch position control 1
knob. To bypass the setting, rotate the position
control knob (2) past the detent.
Electronic End of Row Step Switch MT07E017

(If Equipped)
The switch star ts the recording of the
headland turn sequence or the playback of
an already recorded turn sequence. It is
also used to pause the recording process.
This switch is used in conjunction with the
record/play standby control. See the Field
Operation section in this manual for more
details.
MT07E019
46
Rear Differential Lock Switch (If Equipped)

This momentary type switch engages the
rear differential lock. Push the switch once
to engage the difflock. The DIFF LOCK icon
on the ROPS post instrument display will
be illuminated when the front differential
lock is engaged. To disengage the difflock,
momentarily depress the brake pedal a
small amount.
.
MT07E017
Front Differential Lock Switch (If
Equipped)
This switch engages the front differential
lock. The DIFF LOCK icon on the ROPS post
instrument display will be illuminated when
the rear differential lock is engaged. To
disengage, momentarily depress the brake
pedal a small amount.
NOTE: The differential lock(s) will automatically

disengage when ground speed goes above 11.5
MPH (18.5 KPH) and cannot be re-engaged until
ground speed falls below 11 MPH (17.7 KPH).
MT07E017
Slip Limit Control (If Equipped)

This switch engages the slip limit control for
the hitch control. The rear position is OFF,
the center position is ON and the
momentary forward position is SET. The
lamp illuminates when slip limit control is
active, and the hitch is adjusted to improve
wheel traction.
See Slip Limit and Hitch Control in the Field

O p e r a t i o n c h a p t e r o f t h i s m a n u a l fo r m o r e
information.
MT07E017
47
Auto Shift Switch

T h i s sw i t c h e n g a g e s t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n t o
automatically select forward gears to maintain
performance in the field and control speed while
roading. See Autoshift in Operating Instructions in
this manual for details.
Remote Hydraulic Auto Mode MT07E017
Switch (If Equipped)

This switch engages/disengages Auto
Mode for Hydraulic Remote Valves 1 and 3.
T h e fo r w a r d p o s i t i o n e n g a g e s o r
disengages the first remote valve, the rear
position the third remote valve. Both valves
can be simultaneously or independently
engaged or disengaged.
Auto Mode is useful when operating implements that

control the remotes by themselves. Refer to Auxiliary
Auto Mode in the Field Operation section of this
manual for more details.
Steering Control Switch MT07E017
(ACCUSTEER Tractors Only)

The steering control switch engages the
COMBINATION mode or ARTICULATION
1
mode. In COMBINATION mode the front
axle will steer side to side 5° to 10° before
the ar ticulation steer engages. In
ARTICULATION mode the front axle is
locked in place and only the articulation
steer is engaged. See Front Steering Operation.
MT07E042
48
Engine Compression Brake Switch

(If Equipped)
The engine compression brake option is
an aid to help control ground speed in
relation to engine throttle setting and gear
selected.
The engine brake is controlled by a

momentary switch (1) located in the RH
armrest control console. See Engine Compression
Brake Operation.
MT07E020
PTO Control Switch

The PTO switch knob is colored yellow for
easy identification. To engage the power
take off, lift the knob while moving it
forward. The knob remains in a raised
position. To disengage the power takeoff,
move the control knob rearward.
NOTE: The PTO icon on the tractor instrumentation

displays when the PTO is engaged, and PTO RPM is
shown.
MT07E017
49
ARMREST CONSOLE CONTROLS
Hydraulic Flow Controls

These rotary switches control
the flow rate to number 1
through number 4 remote
couplers at the tractor rear. Turn
thes e c ontr ols cl ockwi se to
incr ease flow to the remote
couplers, counterclockwise to decrease flow.
MT07E009
Hydraulic Valve Timer Control

This rotary switch controls the
length of time (1 - 30 seconds) a
remote coupler has hydraulic
flow after the control lever is
moved to the detent position.
Turn the control clockwise to
increase the amount of time,
counterclockwise to decrease
the amount of time. The full clockwise position
provides continuous flow, required for motor
operation.
MT07E009
Record/Play Standby Control (If
Equipped)
This momentary rocker switch places the
Electronic End of Row feature in either
record or play standby mode. For record
standby, press and hold the top of the
switch until the second beep is heard.
For playback standby, press the bottom
of the switch.
NOTE: This switch is used in conjunction with the

Step Switch (11) on the right hand console which
starts record or playback. See the Field Operation
section in this manual for more details.
MT07E009
50
Hitch Upper Limit Control

This control limits the amount of
upward hitch travel when the
hitch Position Control lever or
the Up/Down switch is used to
raise the hitch. Turn the control
cl ock wi se to i nc r eas e hi tc h
upward travel, counterclockwise
to decrease hitch upward travel.
MT07E009
Hitch Drop Speed Control

This control adjusts the lowering
speed of the hitch when the
hitch Position Control lever is
rotated rearward or the hitch Up/
Down switch is activated. Turn
the control clockwise to increase
the lowering speed, tur n
counterclockwise to decrease lowering speed. Turn
the control knob fully counterclockwise to the detent
to put the hitch in transport lock mode.
MT07E009
Armrest Console Control
Adjustment (If Equipped)
The right hand armrest console may be adjusted up
and forward, or down and rearward for operator
comfort. To adjust the armrest console, loosen the
large hand knob (1) on the lower right side of the
armrest. Position the console forward and up, or
rearward and down to the desired location and
tighten the hand knob.
1
MK98C009
51
6th-7th/TWINFLOW ELECTRIC REMOTE VALVES (IF EQUIPPED)

Tractors equipped with the optional 6th and 7th
remote valves will have the control for the 6th and 2 1
7th remote couplers mounted on the RH window
monitor mount bar.
The control provides for independent flow control
(1) and timer detent control (2) for each valve.
Remote levers (3) and function control (4) operation 2
is the same as the standard electrically controlled 5 3
remote valves. A two position switch (5) provides for
4 4
AUTO remote control for the 6th remote valve only
for operating potentiometer or laser controlled
implements.
MK01G328
AUTO GUIDANCE ROADING SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED)
The autoguidance roading switch is a

momentary that disenges the power when it
is necessary to override the autoguidance
system. Refer to the Audoguidance Users
Manual in the storage compartment on the
back of the operators seat.
MT07D008
52
UPPER CONSOLE CONTROLS
Work Lamp Switch

This four-position rotary switch controls road lamps
and field work lamps. The switch positions are as
follows:
All road lamps and field work lamps are

OFF (Unless the hazard switch is ON).
Front head lamps and rear fender work

lamps are ON.
Front head lamps, upper rear work
lamps and rear fender work lamps are
ON.
Front head lamps, upper front and rear MT07E008
work lamps and rear fender work lamps
are ON.
Road Lamp/Flasher Switch

This is a three-position switch to control upper front
and rear amber flashing hazard lamps. This switch is
independent of the work lamp switch. When the
switch is activated, the amber hazard lamps and
other lamps will be illuminated as follows:
CENTER SWITCH POSITION - All

lights OFF.
UPPER SWITCH POSITION - Front

and rear amber hazard lamps
flashing. All work lamps will turn
MT07E008
OFF in this position.
LOWER SWITCH POSITION - Front

and rear amber hazard lamps
flashing, front road lamps, rear tail
lamps and steering console tur n
indicators are ON. All work lamps
will turn OFF in this position. The
road lamps HIGH or LOW beam can
be set with the tur n signal lever
HI/LO position.
53
Rear Wiper/Washer Switch (If Equipped)

This is a three-position switch; OFF, rear wiper ON
and rear wiper WASH. Push and hold the upper
position of the switch to activate the momentary
wash position.
MT07E008
Lower Front Side Wiper/Washer

Switch (If Equipped)
This is a three-position switch to control the lower
front side wipers; OFF, wipers ON and wiper WASH.
Push and hold the upper position of the switch to
activate the momentary wash position.
MT07E008
Front Wiper/Washer Switch

This is a three-position switch to control the lower
front side wipers; OFF, wipers ON and wiper WASH.
Push and hold the upper position of the switch to
activate the momentary wash position.
MT07E008
54
Strobe or Beacon Light Switch

(If Equipped)
This is a two-position ON/OFF switch to control the
strobe or beacon light. Press on the top of the switch
to turn ON the light. Press on the bottom of the
switch to turn OFF the light.
MT07E008
Engine Constant Speed Power

Switch
This is a two-position ON/OFF rocker switch to
control the engine constant speed feature. Press on
the top of the switch to turn ON the Constant Speed
feature. Press the bottom of the switch to turn OFF
the Constant Speed feature. See Constant Engine
Speed Operation for more details.
MT07E008
Engine Constant Speed Adjust

Switch
This is a three-position momentary switch to set the
desired maximum engine speed. Press on the TOP
of the switch to INCREASE the engine speed. Press
on the bottom of the switch to DECREASE engine
speed.
NOTE: Each time the switch is depressed, engine

speed will increase/decrease approximately 10 rpm.
MT07E008
55
Center HID Light Switch (If

Equipped)
This is a two-position ON/OFF rocker switch to turn
on the center HID light independant of the other
lights.
MT07E008
Radio (If Equipped)

Reference the radio operating information supplied
under separate cover located in the Operator’s
Manual storage compartment.
MT06H001
MP3 Player Jack (If Equipped)

The MP3 player jack is located on the overhead
console to the right of the radio. An MP3 player may
be connected to the radio via this jack.
For instructions on using an MP3 player with the
radio, refer to the radio manual located in the
Operator’s Manual storage compartment behind the
seat.
MT07E005
56
HVAC CONTROL SYSTEM
HVAC Control Switch (ATC Switch)

This three-position detented switch
selects the mode of operation:
Auto: Press the bottom of the switch to
activate the automatic temperature
control (ATC) when heating or cooling
is desired.
OFF: Press the center of the switch to
turn the system off.
NOTE: This is a fresh air mode where ambient

outside air is circulated in the cab. The operator
controls blower speed and mode door operation.
MT04K030
Manual: Press the top of the switch to activate the

manual mode of operation. In this position the
operator sets all HVAC functions.
Temperature Control
Manual: Turn the control knob
clockw ise to raise cab
temperature. Tur n the knob
counterclockwise to lower the
cab temperature.
Auto: Moving the temperature control in the ATC

range (1) will control selected temperature in the 15°
to 32 ° C (60 ° to 90 ° F) range automatically. The
selected temperature and Auto will appear on the
ICU display. Moving the control to the maximum
cooling zone (2) will cause the system to leave
automatic operation and provide the systems
m a x i m u m c o o l i n g c a p a c i t y. B l o w e r s p e e d MT04K030
automatically increases to the highest setting.

Moving the control out of the Max zone returns the
system to automatic operation.
Moving the control to the maximum heating zone (3)

causes the system to leave automatic operation and 1
provide the systems maximum heating capacity.
Blower speed automatically increases to the highest
setting. Moving the control out of the MAX zone
returns the system to automatic operation.
2 3
RH02F058
57
Blower Speed Control

To select blower speed (ATC switch
off), turn the control switch clockwise
from LOW to HIGH, the blower has 30
speeds in the fresh air recirculation
mode. Blower speed remains at the
speed set by the operator. The ICU
display indicates manual blower. In the automatic
mode the control system determines and adjusts
blower speed regardless of blower control setting.
Manually adjusting the blower control while in the
automatic mode will override auto blower speed. The
blower runs at the speed required by the ATC to cool
or heat the cab. Changing the cab temperature will
automatically change the blower speed. The operator MT04K030
has no specific control of the cab pressurization

blower. The ICU will turn the pressurization blower
OFF if the key switch is ON and engine speed is less
than 500 RPM.
Mode Door Control

Use this control to direct air flow
through the desired air outlets. The
first position clockwise will direct air to
the face, second position to the floor
and face, third position to the floor,
fourth position to the floor and defrost louvers and
the fifth position all air is directed to the defrost
louvers.
With the ATC switch in the automatic position, or the

defog switch turned ON the mode door will be under
control of the ATC.
MT04K030
Defog/Dehumidify Control
This is a momentary type switch with a
light to indicate when defog is enabled.
To enable the defog mode click on the
bottom of the sw itch. The A/C
compressor runs continuously
regardless of cab temperature to dry
the air. The defog light will be on. to turn the defog
mode OFF, depress the defog switch (defog light
turns OFF).
Defog can be enabled regardless of whether the

temperature control is in the heating or cooling mode.
If defog has been enabled, then defog will stay
enabled in all mode door positions. If the operator MT04K030
depresses the DEFOG switch (when defog light is

not on) the MODE door will move to the window
position and the A/C compressor will come ON
(defog light will light).
58
Automatic Temperature Control

Display Screen
Automatic temperature control system setting
information is displayed on the instrument cluster
programmable display. Adjust the temperature
setting as desired with the temperature control knob.
Blower Display (1): Displays blower speed.
Temperature Display (2): Displays correct desired

cab temperature selected by operator. When a
system fault is present, display toggles between
temperature display and a fault code number.
Displays °C or °F for Celsius or Fahrenheit (3)

depending what the instrument cluster is MT07F089
programmed for.
Mode Icon (4): Indicates when the system is set for

operating in Automatic, Manual or Off Mode.
Defog Icon (5): Only displays when the system is

operating in Defog mode.
Mode Door Icon (6): Displays the five positions of 1

the mode door.
2 3
6
5 4
MT06A019
1 3
Blower Speed Control

To select blower speed, tur n the control knob
clockwise from LOW to HIGH. The blower control has
30 speeds in fresh air circulation mode (ATC switch
OFF).
In automatic and defrost/defog modes the system
determines and adjusts blower speed regardless of
blower control setting. Adjusting the blower control
while in automatic or defrost/defog modes overrides
automatic blower speed.
The blower runs at the speed required by the ATC

controller to cool or heat the cab. Changing the cab
temperature will automatically change the blower
MT04K030
speed.
59
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL OPERATION
Automatic Mode OFF Mode

Automatic mode is selected by placing the three OFF mode is selected by placing the three position
position mode switch in Auto mode (down position). mode switch in OFF mode (center position). In OFF
The AUTO icon will display on the bottom right corner mode the blower fan is disengaged and the HVAC
of the programmable display screen. In this mode the system provides no means of cooling or heating the
system attempts to maintain cab set point cab. The pressurizer blower continues to operate to
temperature selected by the operator with the provide fresh air and to pressurize the cab.
Temperature Control Knob (dis played on the
programmable display screen) by modulating Manual Override of the Blower Fan While in OFF
temperature, fan speed and mode door position. Mode - If the blower fan knob is adjusted while in
OFF mode, the blower speed is changed to the
Manual Override of the Blower Fan While In manually selected setting and remains constant. To
Automatic Mode - If the blower fan knob is adjusted turn blower back OFF, either turn the blower speed
while in the Automatic mode, the blower speed is control knob fully counterclockwise or toggle the
changed to a manually selected setting and remains three position mode switch from OFF to AUTO or
constant. The system will attempt to maintain cab set Manual mode and back to OFF.
point temperature only by modulating air flow
temperature at the blower speed selected by the Manual Mode
operator. To return to automatic control mode, toggle
the three position mode switch from AUTO to OFF Manual mode is selected by placing the three
and back to the AUTO mode. position mode switch in the manual mode (up
position). In manual mode all control variables such
Maximum Cooling in Automatic Mode - Maximum as blower speed, level of cooling or heating are set
cooling is selected by moving the Temperature by the operator. The system does not maintain cab
Control Knob fully counterclockwise. In this mode, temperature but rather maintains blower speed and
the blower fan is automatically set to full speed, A/C cooling or heating level requested by the operator. If
system delivers maximum cooling capacity and tractor cab heating or cooling load changes the
mode door is set to the face position. operator may need to adjust the controls to maintain
adequate comfort level in the cab.
Maximum Heating In Automatic Mode - Maximum
heating is selected by moving the Temperature Defog Mode Operation
Control Knob fully clockwise. In that mode, the
blower fan is automatically set to full speed, the The purpose of Defog mode is removal of moisture
heating system delivers maximum heating capacity from the cab which is fogging or frosting the
and the mode door is set to floor and defrost windows.
positions. Blower speed can be manually changed to
a lower speed. Defog mode is selected by pressing the momentary
DEFOG switch when in either Auto mode or Manual
NOTE: In any heating operation blower speed mode. The switch lamp will illuminate and the defog
remains at 25% until the heater core warms to 12.8 °C icon will display in the lower left corner on the
(55 °F). programmable display screen.
The HVAC system enables the A/C compressor to

run at all times, but otherwise functions according to
the mode selected by the three position ATC
selection switch. Defog function is stopped if the
momentary defog switch is pressed again or the OFF
mode is selected by the three position ATC switch.
Once selected, Defog operation is retained if the
three position mode switch is toggled quickly
between Auto and Manual modes. Defog function is
not retained if the mode switch is toggled slowly or
the ignition key switch is cycled.
60
POWER MIRROR CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

The switch (1) controls the outside remote control
rear view mirrors. Turning the switch clockwise from
the center OFF position will control the RH side
mirror. Turn the switch counterclockwise from the 2 1
OFF position to adjust the LH side mirror. The mirrors
will follow switch movement when the switch is tilted
up, down or side to side.
Interior Light
3
This light (2) is located in the upper LH and RH
headliner. The switch positions are OFF, O N
STEADY or AUTOMATIC with door opening.
MK99M123
Map Light (If Equipped)

The map light (3) is located in the upper right rear
headliner. Turn the light ON and OFF by pressing the switch. Direct the light beam by grasping the light lens
and rotating the light to the desired position.
Front Sun Shade

Pull down on the pull tab (1) to lower the see-through
shade. To raise the shade, push upward.
MT07E010
Rear Sun Shade

Use the pull tab (2) to operate the rear sun shade the
same as the front shade.
MT07E011
61
RH Side Service Window Latch

To open the window, lift upward on the latch handle
(1) and push outward and down to hold the window
stationary.
To open the window to exit the tractor, lift upward on

the latch handle (1), push outward and pull the 2
handle (1) off the guide peg (2).
MT05M089
To close the right side service window install the
latch handle (1) on the guide peg (2), if removed, lift
upward and pull inward on the latch handle (1).
Push the handle down to latch the window.
2
IMPORTANT: The service window must be closed
and latched during tractor operation.
MT04K033
Outside Extendable Mirrors

(If Equipped)
The outside rear view mirrors can be extended or
retracted by loosening the adjustment knob (1) and
moving the outer mirror bracket in or out. Tighten the
adjustment knob (1) when the desired length is
obtained.
The complete mirror assembly arm (2) can be moved 2

forward or rearward on multiple detents in the pivot
bracket.
1
MT07E013
62
Electrical Fuses and Relay

Location
The electrical fuses and relays are located under the
cover located on the lower right side of the seat.
Remove the cover to gain access to the fuses and
relays.
MK99H161
IMPORTANT: To prevent damage, do not operate
the tractor with the fuse/relay cover removed.
MK99H164
For specific fuse and relay location and function,
refer to the decals located on the under side of the
cover.
MK99H174
63
LH Console
The ash tray, (if equipped) cup holder and utility tray
are located in the console on the LH side of the
operator.
IMPORTANT: Do not use this console for a seat.
MK99K123
Additional storage space is provided under the utility
tray.
NOTE: The storage basket is removable for

cleaning.
MK99K121
64
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
The following section gives an overview and

location of all the cab instrumentation.
Refer to the appropriate section in this manual for further details.
ROPS POST INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW

The Instrument Cluster Unit (ICU) is mounted on the
front right hand cab Roll Over Protective Structure
(ROPS) post. The ICU will automatically monitor
various operating systems and functions on your
tractor. The condition of the monitored systems is
indicated by Analog Gauges, Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lamps and Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) text displays.
The instrument cluster displays tractor performance

information and audio alarm conditions which are
impor tant to the operation of the tractor and
implement system.
IMPORTANT: The performance display functions in

the instrument cluster are transferred to the AFS 200
or AFS PRO 600 display if installed on the tractor.
The exception to this is the SLIP% and SLIP Limit.
The SLIP information is displayed momentarily when
the hitch is in the lowered position, ground speed is
above 2 MPH (3.2 Km/h), and the slip limit set
(momentary) switch is depressed.
When the key switch is turned to the ON position, the

tractor instrumentation will do a self check of all
monitored systems. All indicator lamps and display
screens will energize for 3 seconds and an audible
alarm will sound for 1 second. Before starting the
MT04M007
tractor, make sure all systems are operating. If any
system is not operating, contact your dealer.
65
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Panel 1
The instrument cluster monitors the engine oil
pressure, coolant temperature and fuel level. The
four th display on this panel is the warning and
indicator icons.
1
1. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE - When the
tractor is running, the oil pressure should be
within the working area of the display. If the
indicator falls within the red area of the gauge an 2 3
audible alarm will sound. The first warning will
sound for 4 seconds, flash the warning light (A)
to the left of the gauge and display “ENGINE OIL
P R E S S U R E L OW ” i n t h e p r o g r a m m a bl e
d i s p l ay. T h e s e c o n d w a r n i n g w i l l s o u n d
MT04M019
continuously, flash the warning light, flash the
stop engine icon, and display “ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE VERY LOW” in the programmable
display. Shut off the engine immediately and
check for cause. The programmable display also
gives a digital PSI or kPa reading in the lower
section of the programmable display.
2. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE -
When the tractor is running, the temperature
should be within the working area of this gauge.
If the indicator goes within the red area of the A
gauge an alarm will sound. The first warning will
sound for 4 seconds, flash the warning light (B)
to the right of the gauge and display “ENGINE
COOLANT TEMP HIGH” in the programmable B
d i s p l ay. T h e s e c o n d w a r n i n g w i l l s o u n d C
continuously, flash the warning light, flash the
e n g i n e s t o p i c o n a n d d i s p l ay “ E N G I N E
C O O L A N T T E M P V E RY H I G H ” i n t h e
programmable display. Shut off the engine
immediately and check for the cause. The MT04M019
programmable display also gives a digital

temperature reading in degrees Fahrenheit and
Celsius in the lower section of the programmable
display.
3. FUEL LEVEL GAUGE - The fuel level gauge
indicates how much fuel is in the fuel tank. The
left symbol indicates empty and the right symbol
indicates full. When the fuel level is low, a
warning will sound for 4 seconds, the warning
light (C), to the left of the gauge, will flash, and a
text message “LOW FUEL” will be displayed in
the programmable display.
66
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Panel 2
Panel two houses the dedicated displays and gear
display (4) and the programmable display (10).
4. DEDICATED DIGITAL DISPLAYS AND GEAR
DISPLAY - This panel displays basic tractor 4
functions as follows:
5. ENGINE RPM DISPLAY - This readout displays
the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM). When engine RPM goes above 2450, the 10
engine RPM display will flash and the audible
alarm will sound. Slow the engine down.
6. GROUND SPEED DISPLAY - This readout
displays the ground speed of the tractor. The
MT04M020
reading will be identified as MPH or km/h. When
the transmission is overspeeding, the display will
flash along with the audible alarm sounding and
a t ex t m e s s a g e “ S L O W D O W N ” i n t h e
performance display. Slow the tractor down.
7. FORWARD GEAR READOUT DISPLAY
(Powershift only) - This readout displays the 5
cur rent for war d transm issi on gear that is
selected. 7
6
8. REVERSE GEAR READOUT DISPLAY
(Powershift only) - This readout displays the
cur rent r ever se transmis sion gear that is 9
selected. 8
9. TRANSMISSION CONTROL LEVER STATUS
INDICATOR (Powershift only) - This display
indicates the position that the transmission lever
is presently set to. The settings are as follows:
MT04M020
PARK - Shown with solid box around N and a P
in the lower right.
FORWARD - Shown with a solid box around the

upper forward travel tractor display.
NEUTRAL - Shown with a solid box around the

N.
REVERSE - Shown with a solid box around the

lower reverse travel tractor display.
NOTE: A flashing box around the neutral icon on the

gear display monitor indicates that the transmission
has shifted to NEUTRAL. Move the transmission
control lever to NEUTRAL or PARK to reengage the
transmission.
67
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
10. PROGRAMMABLE DISPLAY - This display is

us e d to c o mmun ic a te i nfo r ma ti on o r tex t
messages. Each message is associated with a 10
graphic icon to identify the vehicle system.
Normally, engine hours are displayed at the top
of the display. When the PTO is engaged the
PTO icon and the speed will override the engine
hour display. Auto auxiliary display will also
override the engine hour display, but not the PTO 11
display. Text messages will override entire
display when in programming mode or when
warnings occur.
The Standard Programmable Display provides
MT04M021
p e r fo r m a n c e i n fo r m a t i o n o n t h e e n g i n e , 1 3
transmission, hydraulic or climate control
systems as well as fault warnings when they
occur.
The Performance Programmable Display provides additional performance information on the engine,
transmission, hydraulic, distance or area systems.
11. KEYPAD - The keypad is used to access, modify, clear or set limits to the information within the display or to
clear fault warnings from the display. The Standard (six key) and Performance (twelve key) keypad functions
are as follows:
STANDARD KEYPAD
Key Function
PROG 1 - To enter setup mode and to select

parameters within setup and
diagnostics mode.
2 - To enter display monitor
adjustment menu for ICU data screen
order, backlighting contrast, egress
lighting and decelerator adjustment.
INCR To increase value of displayed number

(Up Arrow) or scroll up through information
MA04K035
screens.
DECR To decrease value of displayed

(Down Arrow) number or scroll down through
information screens.
RESET Used to reset warning faults,

programming modes and diagnostic
modes.
DIAG To enter diagnostics mode and display

OLD ENGINE hours.
AUTO To display ATC information.
68
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
PERFORMANCE KEYPAD
Key Function
“A” To toggle menu screen selection.
“B” To toggle menu screen selection.
TIMER To display remote hydraulic timer screen.
PROG 1 - To enter setup mode and to select

parameters within setup and diagnostics
mode.
2 - To enter display monitor adjustment
menu for ICU data screen order,
backlighting, contrast egress lighting and
decelerator adjustment.
INCR To increase value of displayed number or

(Up Arrow) scroll up through information screens.
RESET Used to reset warning faults, programming

modes and diagnostic modes.
MAO4K032
DIAG To enter diagnostics mode and display
OLD ENGINE hours. IMPORTANT: The performance display functions in
DECR To decrease value of displayed number or or AFS PRO 600 display if installed on the tractor.
(Down Arrow) scroll down through information screens. The exception to this is the SLIP% and SLIP Limit.
AUTO To display ATC information (if equipped)
SLIP To display percent slip screen. above 2 MPH (3.2 Km/h), and the slip limit set
(momentary) switch is depressed.
AREA To display Area Information screen or to
edit implement width and accumulated
area.
% POWER To display % power screen.
69
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
12. WARNING AND INDICATOR ICONS - These

lamps illuminate to tell the operator that tractor
operation should stop or that a selected function 1 2
is operating.
3
5
4
7 6
8
9
11
10
13
12
14
15
16 17
19
18
MT07E012
1. AUTO SHIFT FIELD( Engaged) 11. ENGINE CONSTANT SPEED ON
2. AUTO SHIFT ROAD (Engaged) 12. NOT USED
3. WARNING/FAULT 13. REAR DIFF LOCK ON
4. STOP ENGINE INDICATOR 14. NOT USED
5. NOT USED 15. NOT USED
6. PTO ENGAGED 16. NOT USED
7. PARK BRAKE APPLIED 17. NOT USED
8. NOT USED 18. REMOTE HYDRAULIC FLOW
9. FRONT DIFF LOCK ENGAGED 19. GRID HEATER ON
10. HIGH BEAM ON
70
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAY MONITOR

The display can be programmed to change the
following operating parameters:
● Display Units - U.S. Standard or Metric
● Tire Radius
● Radar Calibration
● Old Hours
● Data Screen Order
● Programmable Display Contrast
● Instrument Panel Backlight Intensity
● Egress Lighting Control MD06F009
● Decelerator Control
IMPORTANT: Be sure the park brake is applied.

Perform the following outlined steps carefully. Other
menus are accessible once you are in the
PROGRAM MODE. DO NOT change any data other
than those described. Serious tractor malfunctions
will occur if data is changed in any other menu. If
data is inadvertently changed, turn the key switch
OFF to exit the PROGRAM MODE before any other
buttons are pressed and the data will remain
unchanged.
To Enter Program Setup Mode:
1. Turn the key switch ON.
2. Press and hold the PROG key.
NOTE: The PROG key must be pressed within 10

seconds of turning the key switch ON. A short beep
will sound to indicate PROGRAM MODE has been
entered.
3. CONFIG MENU will be displayed. ICU will be
highlighted.
4. Press the PROG key.
5. CONFIG screen will be displayed.
6. OPERATOR SETUP will be highlighted.
8. Using the INCR or DECR keys select Units, Tire
Radius, Radar Cal, Old Hours or Exit.
71
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Changing U.S. Standard or Metric Display Units

If the monitor does not display the desired units, do
the following:
1. Enter PROGRAM SET UP MODE.
2. Use the INCR or DECR keys to select Unit.
3. Press the PROG button to display Unit Menu.
The current selection is highlighted.
4. Press the INCR or DECR keys to select English,
Metric or Metric/Text.
When English is selected the monitor will
display English units, icons and English text.
MT07E029
When Metric is selected the monitor will display
metric units and icons.
When Metric/Text is selected the monitor will

display metric units, icons and English text.
To exit without saving the change - Turn the key switch
OFF.
To save this change:
1. Press the PROG key. The display will return to
CONFIG screen.
2. Turn the key switch OFF.
72
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Changing Tire Radius

To display the correct ground speed, the correct tire radius must be programmed. This is done at the factory and
should not have to be changed unless different tires are installed. Tire wear will not require the radius value to be
reprogrammed. To change the tire radius value, do the following:
Enter PROGRAM SETUP MODE.
Using the INCR or DECR keys to select Tire Radius.
Press the PROG key to display AUTO and MANUAL
NOTE: In the AUTO mode the operator will mark out

a drive the tractor over a premeasured distance and
the ICU will automatically calculate the rolling radius
when the final step is completed. In the MANUAL
mode the operator will enter a rolling radius based on
the tire size table on page 73
MANUAL MODE
1. Complete Steps 1, 2 and 3 of Changing Tire
Radius.
2. Use the INCR or DECR keys to select MANUAL. MT05F010
3. Press the PROG key to display the current tire

rolling radius.
4. Press the INCR or DECR keys to adjust to the
correct radius. (Refer to the Tire Radius Chart on
Page 65 for the correct value).
To exit without saving the change - Turn the key
switch OFF.
1. Press the PROG key to display CONFIG screen.
3. MT05F011
Dynamic Rolling Radius

The tire rolling radius numbers shown in the Tire
Average Rolling Radius Chart on page 73, represents the calculated static rolling radius for various tire sizes and
manufacturers. The actual rolling radius can vary a small amount depending on tire pressure, tire wear and the
weight and load on the tractor.
If a higher degree of accuracy is required, dynamic rolling radius can be established as follows:
1. Put a mark on the side of the tractor tire.
2. Operate the fully loaded tractor on a dry flat surface.
3. Count ten (10) revolutions of the wheel.
4. Measure the distance traveled in inches divided by an engineering constant (62.83).
5. Use the following formula to determine the dynamic rolling radius.
Dynamic Rolling Radius = Distance Traveled in inches
62.83
Use the dynamic rolling radius as specified in Step 5 of the tire radius calibration.
73
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
TIRE AVERAGE ROLLING RADIUS CHART

Use the following code numbers for programming the display
Tire Code Number (Rolling Radius)
Tire Size Tire
Tread (Load Index) Type Firestone Goodyear Trelleborg Michelin Titan
Inch (mm) Inch (mm) Inch (mm) Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
14.9R46 Radial 33.3 (846) 34.4 (874)
420/80R46 Radial 35.0 (889) 34.8 (884)
480/80R42 Radial 34.7 (881) 34.9 (887
18.4R42 Radial 34.7 (881) 35.1 (892)
480/80R46 Radial 36.8 (934) 36.6 (930) 36.9 (938)
18.4R46 Radial 36.8 (935) 37.0 (940)
R1
520/85R38 Radial 34.0 (868) 34.8 (884)
20.8R38 Radial 34.0 (864) 34.5 (876)
520/85R42 Radial 36.3 (922) 36.6 (930) 36.8 (934)
20.8R42 Radial 36.3 (922) 36.5 (927)
30.5L32 Bias 34.9 (887)
76 x 50 - 32 Bias 37.1 (942)
380/90R54 Radial 38.6 (981)
20.8R42 Radial 36.2 (920) 36.2 (920)
480/80R46 Radial 36.5 (926)
480/80R50 Radial 38.7 (982)
520/85R42 Radial 36.3 (922) 36.2 (919)
520/85R46 Radial 38.3 (973) 38.5 (979)
620/70R42 (166AB) Radial 36.7 (931)
620/70R46 Radial 38.6 (980) 38.4 (974)
620/70R42
Radial 36.6 (930) 36.7 (931) 36.1 (917) 36.6 (930)
(160AB)
650/85R38 Radial 41.7 (1059) 38.4 (975 38.1 (968)
R1W 710/65R38 Bias 34.8 (883)
710/70R38 (166AB) Radial 36.1 (918) 36.4 (923) 36.1 (916) 36.1 (918)
710/70R38 (171AB) Radial 36.1 (918) 36.2 (920)
710/70R42 (173AB) Radial 38.7 (983) 83.4 (975) 39.0 (990)
710/70R42 (173AB) Radial 36.7 (931)
710/70R42 (168AB) Radial 38.7 (983) 38.7 (983) 38.4 (975) 39.0 (990)
750/65R38 Bias 36.8 (936)
800/70R38 (173AB)
Radial 38.7 (982) 38.5 (978) 38.3 (973) 39.1 (994)
DT820HD
850/55R42 Bias 36.8(936)
800/70R38 (179AB) Radial 38.2 (969)
900/50R42 Radial 36.6 (930) 36.6 (930)
18.4R46 Radial 37.1 (942) 37.2 (945)
R2
20.8R42 Radial 37.0 (940) 37.2 (945)
QUADTRAC Drive Wheel 18.2 (462)
FORESTRY
30.5l X 32 Bias 34.9 (885)
76 x 50 - 32 Bias 37.1 (942)
74
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
AUTO MODE
1. Lay out a level, straight-line course of 60 meters
with a clearly marked start and finish line.
NOTE: The tractor must maintain a steady speed

above 2 mph (3.4 kph) through the 60 meter course.
2. Park the tractor an adequate distance from the
start line to achieve the speed necessary and
allow time to push the correct keys.
3. Start the engine and enter the PROGRAM
MODE.
4. Using the INCR or DECR keys to select Tire MD05F012
Radius.
5. Press the PROG key to display AUTO and
MANUAL.
6. Use the INCR or DECR keys to select AUTO.
7. Press the PROG key to display READY.
8. Drive the tractor forward at a steady speed above
2 mph, press and release the INCR key as the
tractor crosses the start line. The display will
change from READY to *WORKING.
9. Press the DECR key as the tractor crosses the
finish line. The ICU will stop the auto calibration
and display the new rolling tire radius for 2
seconds and return to CONFIG screen. MD05F013
The ICU will save the new rolling tire radius value
or will display *FAILED* if tractor speed varied or
was below 2 mph (3.4 kph).
10. Stop the tractor and turn the key switch OFF.
MD05F015
75
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Radar Sensor Calibration

The radar speed calibration is designed to determine a correction factor for the radar signal to eliminate steady
state slip error. The procedure works on the assumptions that the tractor tire radius (programmed in the
instrumentation controller) is correct and the tractor is not in a slip condition when the calibration procedure is
performed.
A default value is used if the radar calibration is not performed. The calibration is affected by how the tractor is
configured. The calibration procedure should be completed when; there has been a change in tire size, tire
pressure, ballast, instrumentation controller, or true ground speed radar or if the displayed speed does not match a
GPS indicated peed.
Radar Calibration Procedure

The radar calibration procedure is performed through
t h e R a d a r C a l o p t i o n i n t h e Pe r fo r m a n c e
Instrumentation Cluster (PIC) Program Setup Menu.
Th e cal ibration c an be adjus ted manually or
automatically. To perform the calibration do the
ollowing:
MANUAL MODE
1. Follow Steps 1 through 9 of the Program Setup
Mode and use the INCR or DECR keys to select
Radar Cal.
MD05F016
2. Press the PROG key to display AUTO and

MANUAL.
3. Use the INCR or DECR keys to select MANUAL.
4. Press the PROG key to display the correct
calibration number. The default number is 27.47.
5. Use the INCR or DECR keys to increase or
decrease the current number. If the number is
increased the ICU displayed speed will be
decreased and if the number is decreased the
ICU display speed will be increased.
To ex it without s av ing the c hange - Tur n th e
keyswitch OFF. MD05F017

CONFIG ICU.
3. Start the tractor and test the displayed speed
against the GPS and repeat the procedure if
necessary.
MD05F018
76
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
AUTOMATIC MODE
1. Lay out a level, straight-line course of 60 meters
(196.85 ft) with a clearly marked start and finish
line.
NOTE: The tractor must maintain a steady speed of
4 mph (6.4 km/h) or faster through the 60 meter
course.
2. Park the tractor an adequate distance from the
start line to achieve the speed necessary and
allow time to push the correct keys. Turn the key
switch OFF.
3. Start the engine, press and hold the PROG key MD05F019
within 10 seconds of star ting the engine.

CONFIG MENU will be displayed.
4. Follow Steps 4 through 9 of Enter Program Setup
Mode.
5. Use the INCR or DECR keys to select Radar
Cal.
6. Press the PROG key to display MANUAL and
AUTO.
7. Use the INCR or DECR key to select AUTO.
8. Press the PROG key to display READY.
9. Drive the tractor forward at a steady speed of 4
mph (6.4 km/h) or faster, press and release the
INCR key as the tractor crosses the start line.
MD05F020
T h e d i s p l ay w i l l c h a n g e f r o m R E A DY t o
*WORKING.
10. Press the DECR key as the tractor crosses the
finish line. The ICU will stop the auto calibration
a n d m o m e n t a r i l y d i s p l ay C O M P L E T E o r
*FAILED*.
*FAILED* will appear if the engine speed varied more
than 50 RPM, tractor speed was less than 3.4 mph
(5.5 km/h), or tractor speed varied by more than 0.3
mph (0.5 km/h). If the display shows COMPLETE, he
automatic calibration was successful.
To exit without saving the change - Turn the key

switch OFF.
MD05F021
77
4 - INSTRUMENTATION

1. Press the PROG key to display CONFIG screen.
NOTE: If the radar calibration fails or is exited prior

to saving the calibration value to memory, the
calibration will default to the previously saved value
or a factory default if the calibration has never been
completed.
MD05F022
OLD HOURS
The Old Hours function is used when an ICU is
replaced and the existing hours on the tractor are lost.
When the new ICU is installed the normal display will
start at 0 hours. The hours lost on the old ICU can be
entered in the Old Hours mode. The old hours will
never be combined with the functioning hours of the
new ICU but can be called up at any time the ICU
display is in its normal operating mode by pressing
and holding the RESET key. The old hours will be
displayed for 5 seconds. This function can also be
used to record a predetermined or just finished service
hour.
To enter hours:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 9 of the Program Setup
Mode and use the INCR or DECR keys to select
Old Hours.
2. Press the PROG key to display the hourglass
symbol and the previously stored number or zero.
3. Press the INCR or DECR keys to set the desired
hours.
To exit without saving the change - Turn the key switch
OFF.
To save the change:

CONFIG ICU.
78
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
PROGRAM ADJUST MENU

This mode allows the operator to adjust the SIC/PIC display screen order, contrast, back lighting, egress lighting or
decelerator.
To Enter Program Adjust Menu

1. Press and hold the PROG key after the key switch has been on for 10 seconds or any time during operation.
2. ADJUST MENU will be displayed.
3. Use the INCR or DECR keys to select Data Selection, Contrast Adjust, Back Light Adjust, Egress
Lighting Control, Decelerator Adjustment or Exit.
Data Selection Menu

This menu allows the operator to select the order the
data will appear on the display screen. To change the
order:
1. Enter the ADJUST MENU.
2. Use the INCR or DECR keys to select Data
Selection.
4. The display will show a complete list of ICU data
in default order.
5. Use the INCR or DECR key to highlight the item
to be changed.
6. Press the PROG key to highlight the text.
MT04M040
7. Use the INCR or DECR keys to move the text up
or down in the list.
8. When the text is moved to its desired location
press the PROG key to highlight the numbers.
The text will remain where it was placed and all
the other text will be adjusted to the new order.
9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 to move any other text
or use the INCR or DECR keys to highlight Exit.
10. Press the PROG key to exit the Data Selection
Menu and save the changes.
79
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Contrast Adjust Menu

2. Use the INCR or DECR keys to select Contrast
Adjust.
4. The display will show the contrast icon (a circle
half filled in black) at the top and the previous
level number at the bottom.
5. Use the INCR or DECR keys to adjust the
contrast level. There are 10 levels of contrast
with the default level at 6 or 60% contrast level. MT04M010
6. To save the new contrast level press the PROG

key and the display will return to ADJUST
MENU.
Back Light Adjustment Menu

1. With lights on, enter the ADJUST MENU.
2. Use the INCR or DECR keys to select Back
Light Adjust.
4. The display will show back light adjust icon (a
clock type dial with a single sweep arm) at the
top and the previous level number at the
bottom.
5. Use the INCR or DECR keys to adjust the back
light level. There are 10 levels of back lighting MT04M011
with the default at level 7 or 70% brightness
level.
80
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Egress Lighting Adjust Menu

These screens allow the operator to choose when
and how long to have the front wor k lamps,
headlight high beam, front cab roof work lamps,
rear work lamps, interior map lamp and opera lamp
stay on after the key switch is turned off.
2. Use the INCR or DECR keys to select Egress
Lighting Adjust.
4. There are three choices. OFF - egress lighting RI05G023
is off all the time. ON - egress lighting is on for
120 seconds (default) after the key switch is
turned off. TIMER - Allows operator to set
egress light on time from 5 to 120 seconds after
key switch is turned off.
5. Use the INCR or DECR key to highlight
selection and press the PROG key.
If either ON or TIMER is selected, the egress
activation menu is displayed. This allows the
operator to choose if the egress lighting will be
activated all the time or only at night. The display will
show ALWAYS and NIGHT.
If ALWAYS is selected, the egress lighting will

activate anytime the key switch is turned OFF.
If NIGHT is selected, the egress lighting will activate

anytime the light switch has been ON before the key
switch is turned OFF.
Use the INCR or DECR key to highlight selection and RD05J049
press the PROG key.
NOTE: If TIMER was selected, the activation menu

will be shown first, then the timer menu.
Egress Lighting Timer Menu

When TIMER is selected from the activation menu
the timer menu is displayed. The previous time value
will be shown at the bottom.
1. Press the INCR or DECR key to increase or
decrease the time value from 5 to 120 seconds.
2. Press the PROG key to save your selected time.
RD05J050
81
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Decelerator Percent Adjust Menu

Wait for more than 10 seconds after key ON then
press the PROG key. The operator ADJUST MENU
will be displayed. Select the DECELERATOR option
and press the PROG key.
MT06A010
Adjust the deceleration percent by using the INCR
and DECR keys. 90% will provide the minimum
amount of deceleration. 10% will provide the
maximum amount of deceleration. The set point will
change 1% each time the INCR or DECR key is
depressed or scroll if the key is depressed and held.
Once the value is changed it is automatically saved.
Press the PROG or RESET key to exit the display.
The deceleration percent value can be changed
regardless if the decelerator is on or off.
NOTE: To adjust the decelerator to a certain

engine RPM, do the following:
MT06A011
● Position the throttle to the normal operating
position.
● Turn the decelerator ON by depressing and
releasing the decelerator switch or depressing
and holding the decelerator pedal.
● Enter the ADJUST MENU then DECLERATOR
screen.
● Using the INCR and DECR keys increase or decrease the engine speed to the desired speed by watching the
engine speed display.
● Press the PROG or RESET key to exit the display.
Adjusting engine speed with the deceleration feature activated:

● To decrease the engine speed with the deceleration feature activated, pull the throttle backward.
● To increase the engine speed with the deceleration feature activated, push the throttle forward.
Turning the deceleration feature off:

To turn the deceleration feature OFF depress and release the deceleration switch or releasing the decerator pedal.
The engine will increase to a speed based on the current throttle position.
82
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
WARNING FAULT DISPLAYS

The programmable display will notify the operator when there is a problem with the engine, transmission, hydraulics
or other operational systems that require corrective action. The warnings include an audible alarm, an indicator
light and text in the programmable display. The warnings are divided into 4 levels of importance and descending
order of priority within each level. In the case of multiple faults or warnings the higher level or higher priority within
a level will be the warning displayed. The following tables are listings of the icons, warning text, problems and
corrective action required in order of importance and priority.
Critical Warning Displays - Level 1 - Standard and Performance

Level 1 critical warnings require immediate attention or there will be serious damage to the tractor. When a critical
fault occurs, the red stop light, the amber warning light and the audible alarm will flash continuously and a text
message will appear in the lower display. For very high engine coolant temp and very low engine oil pressure, the
light near the gauge will also flash. Shut down the engine immediately.
NOTE: For tractors equipped with the Performance Instrumentation Cluster, the engine will be shut down in 30
seconds after the fault is detected. The lower display will show the 30 second countdown timer.
IMPORTANT: Level 1 warnings can not be turned off by pressing the “RESET” button. If the tractor must be
moved, cycle the key switch to get an additional 30 seconds of running time to move the tractor. This can be done
as many times as necessary to reach a desired location. However, damage to the tractor can occur.
Display Problem Corrective Action
ENGINE High air to air temperature. Shut the tractor engine OFF immediately and
INTAKE AIR check the heat exchanger for blockage.
TEMP VERY
HIGH
ENGINE OIL Low engine oil pressure. Shut the tractor engine OFF immediately and
PRESSURE check oil level or other cause.
VERY LOW
ENGINE High engine coolant Shut the tractor engine OFF immediately and
COOLANT TEMP temperature. check coolant level or radiator for blockage
VERY HIGH
or other cause.
TRANSMISSION High transmission oil Shut the tractor engine OFF immediately and
OIL TEMP temperature. check for blocked cooler or other cause.
VERY HIGH
HYDRAULIC High hydraulic oil temperature. Shut the tractor engine OFF immediately.
OIL TEMP Check oil level. Check for blocked cooler or
VERY HIGH
other cause.
TRANSMISSION Low transmission oil pressure.* Shut the tractor engine OFF. Check
OIL PRESSURE (Powershift only) transmission oil level or other cause.
VERY LOW
83
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Non-Critical Displays - Level 2 - Standard and Performance

Faults or warnings are for conditions that will not immediately damage the tractor but left uncorrected could develop
into Level 1 - Critical Faults. A Level 2 fault could also cause other systems to be inoperative. When Level 2 fault
warnings occur, the amber light will flash for 4 seconds then be on continuously. The audible alarm will sound
continuously for 4 seconds and the programmable display will show the fault text continuously. When the RESET
key is pressed the warning text will clear for 10 minutes but the amber light will remain on if the engine is running.
When the fault is corrected the amber lamp will go off.
ENGINE High air to air temperature Check for blocked air cooler. If condition
AIR TEMP HIGH approaching critical. persists contact your dealer.
TRANSMISSION The transmission electronic Check and replace fuse #39 if necessary. If
CONTROLLER controller is not communicating condition persists contact your dealer.
OFF LINE
over the data cable.
ARMREST The arm rest control console Check and replace fuse #38 if necessary. If
CONTROLLER electronic controller is not condition persists contact your dealer.
OFF LINE
communicating over the data cable.
HITCH The hitch electronic controller is not Check and replace fuse #41 if necessary. If
CONTROLLER communicating over the data cable. condition persists contact your dealer.
OFF LINE
AUX The remote hydraulic electronic Check and replace fuse #40 if necessary. If
CONTROLLER controller is not communicating condition persists contact your dealer.
OFF LINE
over the data cable.
STEERING The steering electronic controller is Check and replace fuses #43 if necessary.
CONTROLLER not communicating over the data If condition persists contact your dealer.
OFF LINE
cable.
INSTRUMENT The tractor monitor is not Check and replace fuses #9 and #37 if
OFF LINE communicating over the data cable. necessary.
If condition persists contact your dealer.
ENGINE The engine electronic controller is Check and replace fuse #11 and #22 if
CONTROLLER not communicating over the data necessary. If condition persists contact your
OFF LINE
cable. dealer.
TRANSMISSION The transmission electronic If condition persists contact your dealer.

FAULT controller has detected an
electronic or electrical failure.
ARMREST The transmission electronic If condition persists contact your dealer.

HITCH The hitch electronic controller has If condition persists contact your dealer.
FAULT detected an electronic or electrical
failure.
84
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
STEERING Steering controller has detected an If condition persists contact your dealer.
FAULT electronic or electrical failure.
AUX The remote hydraulics electronic If condition persists contact your dealer.
INSTRUMENT The tractor monitor has detected an If condition persists contact your dealer.
FAULT electronic or electrical failure.
ENGINE The engine electronic controller has If condition persists contact your dealer.
failure.
TRANSMISSION Calibration setup programming is Contact your dealer.

SETUP required on the transmission
electronic controller.
ARMREST Calibration setup programming is Contact your dealer.

SETUP required on the arm rest control
console electronic controller
HITCH Calibration setup programming is Contact your dealer.

SETUP required on the hitch electronic
controller.
AUX Calibration setup programming is Contact your dealer.

SETUP required on the remote hydraulic
electronic controller.
STEERING Calibration setup program is Contact your dealer.

SETUP required on the steering electronic
controller.
INSTRUMENT Calibration setup programming is Contact your dealer.

SETUP required on the tractor monitor.
ENGINE Calibration setup programming is Contact your dealer.

SETUP required on the engine electronic
controller.
AUX The remote hydraulic control Move lever(s) back to neutral.

NEUTRAL lever(s) were not in neutral on
startup.
TURN PTO The power take off switch was not in Move power take off switch to the OFF
OFF the off position on startup. position.
HITCH The hitch position control did not Move the hitch position control to match the
CAPTURE match the actual hitch position on actual hitch position.
startup.
85
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
SIT DOWN The transmission was shifted from Shift the transmission to PARK, sit down and
PARK or NEUTRAL without the then proceed. If condition persists, contact
operator seated. your dealer.
MINIMUM The electronic engine controller has Move the throttle lever to the minimum
THROTTLE taken the engine to low idle and the position (lever full back).
throttle lever is not at the minimum
position.
CHECK The tractor has detected the With the key switch ON, the operator needs to
SEAT SWITCH presence of an operator for 25 stand up then sit down in the seat.
hours continuously.
WATER IN Water has been detected in engine Drain the fuel tank until fuel is clear. Drain the
FUEL fuel filter. water from the filter.
TRANSMISSION High transmission oil temperature Check for blocked air cooler. If condition
OIL TEMP HIGH approaching critical. persists contact your dealer.
HYDRAULIC OIL High hydraulic oil temperature Checked for blocked air cooler. If condition
TEMP HIGH approaching critical. persists contact your dealer.
AUX 67 The performance monitor is not If condition persists contact your dealer.
OFF LINE communicating over the data cable.
AUX 67 The performance monitor has If condition persists contact your dealer.
failure.
AUX 67 Calibration setup is required on the Contact your dealer.

SETUP hydraulic controller.
AUX 67 The remote hydraulic control Move lever(s) back to neutral.

NEUTRAL lever(s) were not in neutral on
startup.
TRACTOR ECU The tractor ECU controller is not Check and replace fuses #9 and #37 if
CONTROLLER communicating over the data cable. necessary. If condition persists contact your
OFFLINE
dealer.
TRACTOR ECU The tractor ECU controller has If condition persists contact your dealer.
CONTROLLER detected an electronic or electrical
FAULT
failure.
86
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
TRACTOR ECU Calibration set up programming is Contact your dealer.

CONTROLLER required on the tractor ECU
SET UP
controller.
TRACTOR ECU The tractor ECU controller has Contact your dealer.
CONTROLLER turned itself OFF.
TURNED OFF
ENGINE High engine coolant temperature. Check coolant level or blocked air cooler. If
COOLANT TEMP condition persists contact your dealer.
HIGH
ENGINE OIL Low engine oil pressure. Check engine oil level or other causes. If
PRESSURE condition persists contact your dealer.
LOW
TRANSMISSION Low transmission oil pressure. Check transmission oil level or other causes. If
OIL PRESSURE condition persists contact your dealer.
LOW
STEERING The instrumentation controller has If condition persists contact your dealer.
PRESSURE detected an electrical failure with
SENSOR FAULT
the steering pressure sensor.
DECELERATION The instrumentation controller has If condition persists contact your dealer.
SENSOR FAULT detected an electrical failure with
the deceleration sensor.
VOLTAGE VERY Battery voltage is very low. Vehicle Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and turn
LOW controllers may temporarily stop engine off. check alternator belt. Check
working, causing system failures. battery water level. Test battery.
Level 3 - Standard and Performance

Faults for conditions that will not immediately damage the tractor but will require servicing soon. When Level 3
warnings occur, the amber light will flash for 4 seconds then be on continuously. The audible alarm will sound
continuously for 4 seconds and the programmable display will flash the fault text continuously. When the RESET
key is pressed the warning text will clear for 10 minutes but the amber light will remain on if engine is running until
the fault is corrected.
ALTERNATOR Alternator no output. High electric Check for cause at earliest convenience.
OUTPUT load or bad battery.
VOLTAGE LOW
87
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
ALTERNATOR Alternator high voltage Check for cause at earliest convenience.

OUTPUT
VOLTAGE HIGH
LOW Low fuel level. Refuel.

FUEL
BATTERY Battery voltage is below 11 volts. Check alternator belt. Check battery
VOLTAGE LOW water level. Test battery.
Level 4 - Standard and Performance

Faults are for conditions that will not immediately damage the tractor but will require service. When Level 4
warnings occur, the amber light will flash for 4 seconds then be on continuously. The audible alarm will sound for 4
seconds continuously and the programmable display will flash the text continuously. When the RESET key is
pressed the warning text will clear for one hour, but the amber lamp will remain on if the engine is running until the
fault is corrected.
ENGINE AIR Engine air filter restriction. Clean engine primary air filter at earliest
FILTER convenience.
BLOCKED
TRANSMISSION Transmission oil filter restriction. Replace transmission filter at earliest

OIL FILTER convenience.
BLOCKED
HYDRAULIC OIL Hydraulic oil filter restriction. Replace hydraulic filter at earliest
FILTER convenience.
BLOCKED
AXLE LUBE OIL Axle lube filter restriction. Replace axle filter at earliest convenience.
FILTER
BLOCKED
FUEL FILTER Fuel filter restriction. Change the fuel filter at the earliest
BLOCKED convenience.
ATC OFF LINE The automatic temperature Check and replace fuse. If condition persists
control controller is not contact your dealer.
communicating over the data
cable.
FUEL SENSOR The instrument controller has If condition persists contact your dealer.
FAULT detected an electrical failure with
the fuel sensor circuit.
TRANSMISSION The instrument controller has If condition persists contact your dealer.
OIL TEMP detected an electrical failure with
SENSOR FAULT
the transmission oil temp sensor.
COLOR DISPLAY The color display is not Check and replace fuses #9 and #37 if
OFF LINE comminicating over the data necessary. If condition persists contact your
cable. dealer.
88
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
HYDRAULIC OIL The instrument controller has If condition persists contact your dealer.
TEMP SENSOR detected an electrical failure with
FAULT
the hydraulic oil temp sensor.
CLEAN The transmission oil filter switch is If condition persists contact your dealer to
TRANSMISSION shorted to ground. clean or replace the transmission oil filter
OIL FILTER
SWITCH
switch.
CLEAN The hydraulic oil filter switch is If condition persists contact your dealer to
HYDRAULIC OIL shorted to ground. clean or replace the hydraulic oil filter switch.
FILTER SWITCH
CLEAN AXLE The axle lube oil filter switch is If condition persists contact your dealer.
LUBE OIL shorted to ground. Clean or replace the axle lube oil filter switch.
FILTER SWITCH
INVALID Incorrect tractor P.I.N. number in Contact your dealer.

VEHICLE PIN the instrument controller.
FAN CONTROL The instrument controller has If condition persists contact your dealer.
SYSTEM FAULT deteced an electrical failure with
the fan control system.
89
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
INSTRUMENTATION CLUSTER OPERATION

The Instrumentation Cluster is a two part system
which includes the display (1) and the keypad (2).
The display communicates performance information
and system fault warnings. The key pad is used to
access or edit information on the display. there are
two monitor systems, the Standard Instrumentation
C l u s t e r a n d t h e o p t i o n a l Pe r fo r m a n c e
Instrumentation Cluster.
MT04M021
The Standard Instrumentation Cluster displays
information on the engine, transmission, hydraulic or
automatic temperature control (if equipped) systems
and through the (six key) keypad to scroll through the
information screens and edit those screens.
RI05D001
The Pe rformance Inst rument at ion Clust er
displays the same information as the Standard
Instrumentation Cluster with additional information
on the engine, hydraulics, fuel, area, distance, wheel
slip, end of row (if equipped) and tractor service
systems. The enhanced (twelve key) keypad allows
the operator to scroll through or directly access these
systems and edit the contents.
A n i m p o r t a n t fe a t u r e o f t h e Pe r fo r m a n c e
Instrumentation Cluster is that it includes automatic
engine shutdown if a critical fault warning is active.
IMPORTANT: The performance display functions in

or AFS PRO 600 display if installed on the tractor.
The exception to this is the SLIP% and SLIP Limit.
above 2 MPH (3.2 Km/h), and the slip limit set
(momentary) switch is depressed. RI05D004
90
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Standard Instrumentation Cluster Display

The following is a listing of the functions of the Standard Instrumentation Cluster. Pressing the INCR or DECR key
will toggle between the displays.
STANDARD INSTRUMENTATION CLUSTER FUNCTIONS

Display Information Description
ENGINE HOURS Engine hours Engine hours. Default display at start up.
PTO RPM 540 or 1000 PTO speed display when
PTO is turned ON. Overrides all other
displays.
AUTO AUX (if equipped) Displays AUX AUTO status when turned
ON and PTO is OFF.
OLD ENGINE HOURS Displays engine hours entered for a
previous monitor. (Press and hold
RESET key for 2 seconds.)
BATTERY VOLTAGE NN.N Volts Tractor system voltage.
REAR HITCH POSITION NNN% Actual % position of rear hitch.
TRANS SYSTEM *Pressure in PSI or kPa Transmission oil pressure.
PRESSURE (Powershift only)
ENGINE OIL *Pressure in PSI or kPa Engine oil pressure.
PRESSURE
ENGINE INTAKE TEMP *Temperature in ° F or ° C Engine intake air temperature.
TRANS OIL TEMP *Temperature in ° F or ° C Transmission oil temperature.
ENGINE COOL TEMP *Temperature in ° F or ° C Engine coolant temperature.
HYD OIL TEMP *Temperature in ° F or ° C Hydraulic oil temperature.
CONSTANT ENGINE Set RPM (Screen displayed only Set Value
RPM when switch is ON.)
AUTO (ATC) Current state of ATC system. Fan mode and speed, set temperature,
defog and auto control status.
*When English is selected, PSI and Fahrenheit will be displayed. When Metric is selected, kPa and Celsius will be
displayed.
91
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Performance Instrumentation Cluster Display

The following is a listing of the functions of the Performance Instrumentation Cluster. Pressing the INC or DECR
key will toggle between the displays. Pressing the SLIP, % POWER, TIMER, ATC or AREA key will move directly to
the display.
PERFORMANCE INSTRUMENTATION CLUSTER FUNCTIONS

ENGINE HOURS Engine hours Engine hours. Default display at start up.
PTO RPM Displays 540 or 1000 PTO speed when
PTO is turned ON. Overrides all other
displays.
AUTO AUX (if equipped) Displays AUX AUTO status when turned
ON and PTO is OFF.
OLD ENGINE HOURS Displays engine hours entered for a
previous monitor. (Press and hold
RESET key for 2 seconds.)
POWER Power % % Engine power level.
Slip % Displays actual wheel slip when
equipped with radar.
Gallons/Acre or Liters/Hectare Fuel consumption per acre/hectare when
AREA function is activated.
REMOTE TIMERS Lists remotes 1 through 5 and time in Controlled time for hydraulic flow after
seconds. remote lever is moved to neutral.
REMOTE HYDRAULICS Flow % for each remote valve and % of maximum available flow to each
valve flow indication. remote valve section ON/OFF.
DISTANCE** Feet Distance traveled and rate of travel. Feet
Miles or Kilometers changes to miles after 5280 feet.
Feet/minute or Meters/minute
FUEL Gallons or Liters remaining and Amount of fuel remaining and the rate of
Gallons/Hour or Liters/Hour with fuel use.
Electronic fuel injection.
AREA** Acres or Hectares Accumulated area and rate of area
Acres/Hour or Hectares/Hour covered by implement.
ELECTRONIC END OF Functions programmed for headland See FIELD OPERATION in this manual
ROW turning. for more information.
SLIP** Slip % % of wheel slip and slip limit control set
Slip Limit % value.
TIMER Minutes/Hours Elapsed time
BATTERY VOLTAGE NN.N VOLTS Tractor system voltage.
REAR HITCH POSITION NNN% Actual % position of rear hitch.
TRANS SYSTEM * Pressure in PSI or kPa Transmission oil pressure.
PRESSURE
CONSTANT ENGINE SET RPM Set Value
RPM
92
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
PERFORMANCE INSTRUMENTATION CLUSTER FUNCTIONS

AUTO (ATC) Current state of ATC system. Fan mode and speed, set temperature,
defog and auto control status.
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE *Pressure in PSI or kPa Engine oil pressure.
ENGINE INTAKE TEMP *Temperature in ° F or ° C Engine intake air temperature.
TRANS OIL TEMP *Temperature in ° F or ° C Transmission oil temperature.
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMP *Temperature in ° F or ° C Hydraulic oil temperature.
ENGINE COOL TEMP *Temperature in ° F or ° C Engine coolant temperature.
SERVICE FUNCTIONS*** BATTERY Hours left before service required.
CAB AIR FILTER Hours left before filter change.
COOLANT FILTER Hours left before filter change.
COOLANT FLUSH Hours left before filter change.
ENGINE AIR FILTER Hours left before filter change.
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER Hours left before filter change.
FUEL FILTER Hours left before filter change.
TRANSMISSION OIL AND FILTER Hours left before filter change.
HYDRAULIC OIL AND FILTER Hours left before filter change.
AXLE LUBE OIL AND FILTER Hours left before filter change.
*When English is selected, PSI and Fahrenheit will be displayed. When Metric is selected, kPa and Celsius will be
displayed.
**Radar is required.
***Shows LIMIT, USED and LEFT engine hours before change or service.
93
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Instrumentation Cluster Display Functions
Percent of Slip
This screen displays the actual percentage of slip
that the tractor is currently encountering. Data is only
available with a radar sensor installed.
Press the INCR or DECR button until SLIP screen is
displayed or press % SLIP button to go directly to this
screen. Percent of slip is the measurement of wheel
rotation versus ground speed. Slip data indicates
when wheel speed is faster than ground speed.
A description of the various components of the
screen are as follows: 1
1. Numerical value of calculated wheel slip.
2. Shows the slip limit set value.
3. Hitch Up Symbol - Slip Limit function is active
and compensating.
3 2
RI06G025
Area Information
T h is s c r e en di s pl ay s a c c umu la te d a r e a a nd
instantaneous area rate.
Press the INCR or DECR button until the AREA
screen is displayed or press AREA button to go
directly to this screen.
When the area function is ON, it records total acres
(hectares) and acres per hour (hectares per hour).
TURNING AREA COUNT ON AND OFF: When the

area screen is displayed, pressing the “B” button will
toggle the area count OFF, ON or AUTO. Current
status will be highlighted in the lower right hand side
of the screen. In ON mode, the area will accumulate
when the tractor is moving. In AUTO mode, the area
will accumulate when the tractor is moving and when
the hitch is down or when the trailed implement
switc h (if equipped) indic ates down ( refer to
Implement Area Counter Switch). In this mode when
MT07E035
the implement is up, the highlighted area behind
AUTO will flash. The highlighted area behind AUTO
will be on steady when the implement is down and
area is counting.
RESETTING AREA COUNT TO ZERO: When the CHANGING AREA WIDTH SETUP OR
area screen is displayed, press the “A” button. The ACCUMULATED AREA: When the area screen is
accumulated area will be highlighted. Now press and displayed, pressing the AREA button for two seconds
hold the “A” key for two seconds to reset the total will cause the implement Width Setup screen to be
accumulated area count to zero. displayed. The Area Edit screen is entered from the
implement Width Setup screen.
94
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Implement Width Setup Information

This screen displays the implement width currently
programmed into the monitor in feet or meters.
When the Area screen is displayed, pressing the
ARE A butto n for two se co nds wi ll c au se th e
implement Width Setup screen to be displayed.
A DJ U S T I NG I M P L E M E NT W I D TH : W i t h t h e
IMPLEMENT WIDTH SETUP screen displayed,
pressing the INCR or DECR button will change the
feet (meters) currently programmed into the monitor.
Pressing and releasing the INCR or DECR button will
increase or decrease the measurement one digit at a
time. Pressing and holding the INCR or DECR button
will change the digit at a rate of 3.2 feet (meters) per
second.
AREA EDIT: When the desired implement width is
obtained, pressing the “A” button will enter the
change and cause the Area Edit screen to be
displayed.
MT07E041
RETURNING TO AREA SCREEN: When the desired
implement width is obtained, pressing the “B” button
will enter the change and return to the Area screen.
Area Edit
This screen displays the Area Edit screen which
allows the total accumulated acres (hectares) to be
increased or decreased, permitting an initial offset or
correction to be entered.
W h e n th e I m p l e m e n t W i dt h S e t u p s c r e e n i s
displayed, pressing the “A” button will cause the Area
Edit screen to be displayed.
RESETTING ACCUMULATED AREA: With the Area
Edit screen displayed, pressing the INCR or DECR
button will change the acres (hectares) currently
accumulated into the monitor. Pressing and releasing
the INCR or DECR button will increase or decrease
the measurement one digit at a time. Pressing and
holding the INCR or DECR button will change the
digit at a rate of 3.2 acres (hectares) per second.
RETURNING TO IMPLEMENT WIDTH SETUP:
When the desired accumulated area is obtained,
pressing the “A” button will enter the change and
MT07E040
return to the implement Width Setup screen.
RETURNING TO AREA SCREEN: When the desired
accumulated area is obtained, pressing the “B”
button will enter the change and return to the Area
screen.
95
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Implement Area Counter Switch

An optional switch assembly (P/N 221545A1) is
available from your dealer which will automatically
stop and start the total area accumulation when the
implement is raised (or lowered). See your dealer for
further information.
The implement status switch connector (1) is located
in the RH side electrical compartment in front of the
controllers.
MT07F127
Fuel Information
T h i s s c r e e n d i s p l ay s f u e l r e m a i n i n g a n d
instantaneous fuel rate usage.
Press the INCR or DECR button until the Fuel
Remaining screen is displayed. This screen shows
the amount of remaining fuel in gallons or liters, and
the rate of consumption per hour.
The fuel information function is active at all times.
The fuel remaining is based on current fuel tank
levels. The fuel consumption per hour is based on
electronic governor data and is only displayed when
that data is available.
MT07E036
Percent Power
The screen displays the instantaneous percent of
rated power the engine is producing, percent slip and
fuel rate/area.
The power information function is active at all times.
Press the INCR or DECR button until the Percent
Power screen is displayed or the % Power key to
access the screen directly. The Percent Power is 1
based on electronic gover nor data and is only
displayed when that data is available. When this data
is not available and the % Power key is pressed, the
display reads “Function Not Available”.
Slip information (1) is only shown where the tractor is
equipped with Ground Speed Radar. If the tractor is
not equipped with Ground Speed Radar the screen
displays fuel remaining in place of slip.
MT07E037
96
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Remote Hydraulic Information
This screen displays the remote hydraulic coupler

flow as a percentage of total available flow at each
remote coupler. The hydraulic flow information is
active at all times.
Press the INCR or DECR button until the Remote

Hydraulic screen is displayed. The Flow screen will
also appear for 2 seconds when any one of the five
flow potentiometers on the armrest is adjusted. After
2 seconds, the original data display screen will
return.
NOTE: If equipped with a performance monitor this

screen will automatically display the number of
remotes installed on the tractor.
MT07F145
NOTE: The cylinder icon indicates that the valve is

currently ON. The icon is not shown when OFF.
Distance Information
This screen displays accumulated distance and
instantaneous rate.
Press the INCR or DECR button until the Distance
screen is displayed. This screen shows the total
distance accumulated and the rate in English or
Metric measurement.
When the distance function is ON by pressing the “B”
key, it calculates and displays distance traveled.
When in English measurement, it records total feet
covered until 5280 feet are accumulated, then
automatically changes to miles. It also records
instantaneous feet covered per minute. When in
Metric measurement, it records total distance in
kilometers and rate in meters per minute.
MT07E038
97
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
MT07E039
98
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Steering Information
If equipped with ACCUSTEER this screen displays
on bar graphs the position of the front axle and
articulation.
The bar graphs will show the position to the left or
right of center or if the axle is centered. The display
will show Combination under the Steering Mode
heading when the ACCUSTEER is activated,
Articulation when the ACCUSTEER is off and when
there is a steering fault.
MT04M041
Service Functions
This screen displays and edits service function data
based on engine hours.
Press the INCR or DECR button until the Service
Fu n c t i o n s s c r e e n i s d i s p l aye d . Th e S e r v i c e
Functions screens alert the operator when service
needs to be performed based on the suggested
service intervals.
When a service function limit has been reached, a
three second alarm will sound and the display screen
will flash and go directly to the service function in
question. Pushing the “A”, “B” key or the “RESET”
key will suppress the alarm for four hours. The alarm
is re-enabled each time the key switch is turned ON.
When the Service Function screen is displayed,
press the “A” button to scroll through each service
function screen. MT07F148
The top line of each display describes the service

function name. The second line (Limit) indicates the
recommended service intervals in engine hours. The
third line (Used) shows the number of hours used.
The fourth line (Left) shows the engine hours left
before service should be performed.
SETTING USED VALUE TO ZERO: When the

particular service screen is displayed, pressing the
“B” key. The USED value will be highlighted. Now
press and hold the “B” key for two seconds. The
USED value will reset to zero.
EDITING THE LIMIT VALUE: Press INCR or DECR

button to adjust the limit value for a par ticular
application. The value cannot be increased beyond
factory default. If the limit value is set to zero that
MT04M028
function is disabled.
99
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Service Reminder Screen

This screen is a service reminder indicating that the
hours since last service exceed the limit.
ACKNOWLEDGE: Press the “A”, “B” or RESET key
to acknowledge the reminder. This screen will
re-display in four hours if service is not performed
and service function screen is not reset.
MT04M030
Individual Remote Valve Timer

Information
This function allows the operator to view and control
the length of time (1 to 30 seconds or continuous)
each individual remote valve (1 through 5) has
hydraulic flow after the control lever is moved to the
detent position.
Press the INCR or DECR button until the Remote
Timers screen is displayed, or press the AUX TIMER
key to access this screen directly. This screen shows
the current time setting for each remote valve.
The Remote Timer screen can also be displayed by
rotating the timer potentiometer. The Remote Timer
screen will then be displayed until another screen is
selected.
NOTE: On tractors equipped with a performance
instrumentation cluster, the timer potentiometer does
not control the remote valve times but only serves as
a method to display the remote timer screen on the
monitor. MT07F147
When any of the remote valve function control

switches is moved to or from the hydraulic motor
position the Remote Timer screen will be displayed
for 2 s econ ds to no tify the operato r t hat th e
corresponding timer setting has changed. After 2
seconds, the display will change to the previously
displayed screen.
When a remote valve function control switch is

moved to the hydraulic motor position the timer value
for that remote valve is changed from its current
value to Continuous operation. When a remote valve
function control switch is moved from the hydraulic
motor position the timer value for that remote valve is
changed from Continuous operation to its previous
value.
100
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Remote Timer Screen Editing
Each timer readout will display from 1 to 30 seconds

or Continuous operation.
When the "A" key (EDIT) is depressed, the TIMER 1

will be displayed in reverse image. When the value is
in reverse image, the value can be changed by using
the INCR and DECR keys.
NOTE: When the remote valve function switch for a

remote valve is in the hydraulic motor position the
timer value displayed for that valve will be displayed
as Continuous operation and can not be edited.
Pressing the DECR key will decrease the value by 1

second each time the key is pressed until the value
reaches 1 second. Pressing the INCR key will
increase the value by 1 second each time the key is
pressed until the value reaches 30 seconds. When
the display shows 30 seconds and the INCR key is
pressed the display will change to Continuous MT07F146
operation. Pressing and holding the DECR or INCR

keys will scroll through the numbers at a faster rate.
Pressing the "B" key (SELECT), when the value

beside TIMER 1 is in reverse image will cause that
value to return to normal image and the value beside
TIMER 2 to be displayed in reverse image. While in
r eve r se i ma ge t he val ue c an b e c han ge d as
described above. When the "B" key (SELECT) is
pressed again the reverse image will transition to the
next TIMER value until the last TIMER value is in
reverse image. When the last TIMER value (TIMER 4
or TIMER 5 if equipped) is in reverse image and the
"B" key (select) is pressed, all values will be in
normal display and the INCR and DECR keys will
cause transitions between screens.
The edit mode may be exited at any time by pressing

the "A" key (EDIT). This will save the edited values
and return all values to normal display. The INCR
and DECR keys will then cause transitions between
screens.
While in edit mode if the EDIT, SEL, INCR, or DECR

keys are not pressed for 1 minute, the edit mode will
be exited and all values will return to normal display.
The INCR and DECR keys will then cause transitions
between screens.
101
4 - INSTRUMENTATION
Timer Information
This screen displays elapsed time anytime the key
switch is ON.
Press the INCR or DECR key until the timer screen is

displayed. In hours and minutes, the screen shows
elapsed time from when the Timer is star ted.
maximum elapsed time is 999 hours and 59 minutes
before the timer automatically resets to zero.
Turning the Timer ON or OFF.

With the timer screen displayed, press the “B” key to
toggle the Timer ON and OFF. Current status is
highlighted at the bottom of the screen.
Resetting The Timer to Zero

With the timer screen displayed, press the “A” key
and the time will highlight. Press and hold the “A” key RH05D029
for two seconds and the time will reset to zero.
Constant Engine RPM Screen

This screen shows the maximum constant engine
speed set by the operator. The screen will appear for
five seconds when constant engine speed is turned
O N or wh en co nst ant engi ne sp eed is b ein g
adjusted. If the screen is selected using the INCR /
DECR key, it will remain on until another screen is
selected. If this function is not turned ON, it cannot
be selected using the INCR / DECR keys.
See Constant Engine Speed Operation in this
manual for more information.
RD05J052
Electronic End Of Row Information

(If Equipped)
This screen displays operator recorded function
sequence to be cycled at the headlands. See
Electronic End Of Row System Operation in Field
Operation for more information.
RD05D021
102
5 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
This section covers the proper starting

and transmission operation of the tractor.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting your tractor for the first time, make the NOTE: Clean around the fuel tank cap before you
following checks. Also see Maintenance/Adjustments remove the cap.
sections in this manual.
4. Check the fuel system, cooling system and
1. Make sure the tractor is properly lubricated and engine for leaks.
greased as described in the
5. Remove any water or sediment from the water
Lubrication/Maintenance section of this manual.
trap of the fuel tank and primary filter.
2. Check the engine oil level, engine coolant level,
6. Check the air pressure in the tires and check the
and transmission oil. See the
wheel bolt torque.
Lubrication/Maintenance section of this manual.
7. Make sure the power takeoff guard is in the
3. Check that the tractor fuel tank is filled with clean
proper position.
fuel that meets the specifications given in this
manual.
WARNING: *Before starting the engine, be sure all operating controls are in neutral or park
! position. This will eliminate accidental movement of the machine or start up of power driven
equipment. SM306A
WARNING: Never operate the engine in a closed building. Proper ventilation is required under all
! circumstances. M142A
WARNING: ALWAYS sound horn before starting the machine. Make sure working area is clear of
! other persons, pets, tools, etc. before you start operating this machine. NEVER allow anybody in
work area during machine operation. M804
Daily Inspection
Do a daily walk around visual inspection of the Engine Overspeed
tractor. Check for such items as hoses or wires
rubbing against other components, oil leaks, crop Engine overspeed will cause engine damage. To
residue buildup, loose bolts or anything that would avoid overspeeding the engine when transporting
affect the normal operation of the tractor. heavy implements and/or descending steep grades
at transport speeds, throttle back and reduce engine
speed BEFORE down shifting. Shift down to a gear
that will allow the engine to control the speed
BEFORE descending steep grades. DAMAGE
C AU S E D B Y E N G I N E OV E R S P E E D I S N OT
COVERED B Y WARRANTY. Also see Engine
Compression Brake Operation.
103
SEAT BELTS
Always securely fasten your seat belt before operating the tractor. From time to time, carefully inspect the seat belts
for worn areas and replace belts when needed.
WARNING: A frequent cause of death or serious injury is persons falling off machinery and being run
! over. Keep cab door closed. Instructional seat is used only for instructing or service diagnosing only. DO
NOT permit others to ride, especially children. Seat belt must be worn at all times. M488C
WARNING: Securely fasten your seat belt. Your machine is equipped with a ROPS cab, ROPS canopy
or ROPS frame for your protection. The seat belt can help insure your safety if it is used and maintained.
! Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted condition
or pinched between the seat structural members. Inspect seat belt webbing, buckle and retractors to
ensure they are not damaged. If damage is apparent, repair before operating the tractor. M437A
Adjust the position of the operator’s seat. Pull the

seat belt completely across your body. Push the
metal eye into the buckle until it locks.
MK00B223
Adjust the position of the seat belt as low across your
body as possible.
If your tractor is equipped with an instructional seat

and you are training an operator, be sure the
instructional seat belt is also securely fastened.
IMPORTANT: An Operator Presence Safety

Switch is linked to the Powershift Control and PTO
electrical circuit and is activated by the operator
sitting on the seat.
MK00B225
104
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT

WARNING: Never adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering
! column while driving can cause loss of control resulting in injury or death.
SM517
MT05M011
1. STEERING COLUMN RELEASE PEDAL - To tilt or telescope the steering column, push the pedal (1) down,
release the pedal to lock the column in the desired position.
MK98C105 MK98C104
COLUMN TILT ADJUSTMENT COLUMN TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT

The steering column can be adjusted up or down into The steering column can be moved in or out in any
eleven different positions. one of the tilt positions.
TO ADJUST: Push the pedal (1) down. Move column
TO ADJUST: Push the pedal (1) COMPLETELY
up (shown) or down to the required position. Release
down. Pull or push the column in or out to the
the pedal to lock the column in position.
required position. Release the pedal to lock the
column in position.
105
STARTING THE ENGINE
WARNING: Only operate the machine when sitting on the seat. Do not try to bypass the Operator
! Presence Safety Switch by putting heavy objects on the seat. This can result in serious injury or death.
SM519
NOTE: After the engine starts, operate the engine at

slow speed for a few minutes to be sure that enough
lubricant reaches the turbo charger bearings and
engine parts before operating the engine at rated
speed.
1. Powershift (If Equipped)
Be sure the transmission control lever (1) is in
the PARK position.
MK99M130
2. 24 Speed Manual Shift (If Equipped)
Place the gear shift lever (1) in the NEUTRAL
position.
MK01A016
3. 24 Speed Only
Depr es s the par k brake switch to the O N
position.
NOTE: The PTO switch (if equipped) must be in the

OFF position.
MK01G300
106
4. The inching (clutch) pedal must be fully

depressed on manual transmission equipped
tractors.
NOTE: The inching pedal must be cycled once after

starting the tractor before engaging the Powershiift
transmission.
WARNING: Operate controls only when

! seated in the operator’s seat. SM137A
MK99M027
5. The Move the throttle control to the low idle
position.
IMPORTANT: The electronic fuel system may not

provide fuel delivery if the throttle is not in the low idle
(all the way back) position.
MK99M030
6. Sound horn before starting the engine. Turn key
switch to the ON position for 30 to 45 seconds.
On models 335, 385, 435 and 485 wait until the
grid heater icon on the ROPS post instrument
cluster goes out before proceeding to Step 7.
The 535 tractor does not have a grid heater.
Proceed to the next step after 30 to 45 seconds.
7. Turn the key to the START position until the
engine starts, but for no more than 30 seconds,
then release the key. Leave the throttle at idle
until RPM increases to 850 - 900 RPM.
MK01G302
NOTE: Electronic controlled engines will crank one
to two revolutions before firing, even when warm.
IMPORTANT: Do not use the starting motor for more
than 30 seconds without stopping. Wait 2 to 3
minutes between star ting attempts to allow the
starting motor to cool.
NOTE: If the engine starts and then stops, wait for

the starting motor to stop turning before you turn the
key switch to START again.
NOTE: If the engine will not start, check the fuel

shutoff solenoid fuse.
107
8. After the engine starts, check that the oil

pressure gauge (1) is operating in the normal
area on the instrumentation cluster. If not, shut
down the engine immediately and locate the
cause.
MT04M019
9. After the engine is warm, check that coolant 1 3

temperature indicator (2) is in the normal area
and that all service monitors are indicating
normal operation.
NOTE: If the instrument cluster does not give normal

indications, stop the engine and check for the cause.
2
MT04M019
COLD WEATHER STARTING

Engine Grid Heater
(335, 385, 435 and 485)
When starting the tractor in cold weather, the grid
heater icon (3) will appear in the lower left hand
corner of the warning and indicator icon display.
Follow the instructions in Step 5, 6 & 7, but leave the
key switch in the ON position until the grid heater
icon tur ns off. Then continue with the star ting
procedure.
WARNING: DO NOT use ether or starting

fluid to start tractors equipped with a grid
! heater in the engine air intake system. Use of
ether or starting fluid can result in an
3
explosion or fire.
MT07E012
108
Ether Start Aid (535 only, If Equipped)

The ether start aid will provide improved engine
starting in cold ambient temperature. Use the ether
start as specified.
Using Ether Starting Fluid

To start the engine at temperatures of 20o F (-6.7o
C) or lower, use ether starting fluid according to the
following instructions.
STEP 1
Perform Steps 1 through 6 of STARTING THE
ENGINE. Turn and hold the key switch (1) full
clockwise to the START position.
1
MK01G302
STEP 2
If the engine fails to start within the first 15 seconds
of cranking, depress the ether start switch (2) for
two seconds while the engine is cranking and
release to inject starting fluid. If the engine does not
start after 15 more seconds, release the key switch.
Allow the star ter motor to cool down for two 2
minutes, and repeat the procedure. Use only one
starting fluid charge per 30 second crank cycle. If
the engine does not fire, check for an empty ether
container.
NOTE: After the engine starts, and it runs roughly
at low idle, it is permissible to press the ether start MK00B158
switch and inject an additional metered shot of
starting fluid. Once engine speed exceeds 500 rpm
ether cannot be injected.
STEP 3
After the engine starts, be sure that the oil pressure
gauge (3) is operating in the normal area. If it is not,
shut the engine down immediately and check for the
cause.
MT04M019
109
Starting Fluid Container

Replacement (535 only, If Equipped)
The ether start metering head assembly is located
on the LH side of the engine.
Install the starting fluid container as follows:
1. Loosen and remove the threaded protective cap
1
(1) from the metering head.
I M P O R TA N T: A l w ay s r e a d a n d fo l l o w t h e
cautionary information and instructions printed on
the ether container.
mt07e033
2. Install the ether container (1) through the clamp

(2). Turn the threaded container (1) clockwise 1
into the metering head (3) hand tight. Do not
overtighten the container.
3. Tighten the clamp (2). 2
NOTE: If the tractor is operated without a fluid
container, the protective cap must be installed into 3
the metering head. The metering head must be
sealed to prevent dust from entering.
MT07E034
110
STOPPING THE ENGINE

IMPORTANT: Before stopping the engine after operating under heavy load, run the engine at idle speed for a short
period of time (3 to 5 minutes). This will allow the engine and turbocharger temperature to decrease gradually. If the
engine stops when operating under a load, START THE ENGINE IMMEDIATELY to prevent too much heat build up
caused by stopping the flow of oil for cooling and lubrication.
1. Slow the engine and bring the tractor to a
complete stop by depressing the inching pedal
and brake pedal (if necessar y). Put the
Powershift transmission (if equipped) control
l eve r i n t h e PA R K p o s i t i o n . I f 2 4 s p e e d
transmission equipped, put the gear shift lever in
NEUTRAL and APPLY the park brake. Release
the inching pedal and brake pedal.
MK99M130
2. Move the throttle lever to the idle position for 3 to 1 3

5 minutes to decrease the temperature of the
engine and turbocharger.
NOTE: Lower the implement to the ground, if

attached.
MK99M030
3. Turn the key switch to the OFF position to stop 1 3

the engine. Remove the key from the switch.
MK99M023
111
COLD TEMPERATURE OPERATION

To start and operate your tractor during cold ambient ● COOLING SYSTEM - Must have a minimum of 50
t e m p e r a t u r e s ( 2 0 ° F a n d b e l ow ) , u s e t h e s e percent ethylene glycol solution for protection.
procedures:
● TIRES - If there is liquid in the tires (not
● BATTERIES - Must have a full charge. recommended), the tires must have protection
against temperatures below 32° F (0° C). See
● FUEL - Must be clean and free of water. See your
your dealer.
fuel dealer for cold weather fuel requirements in
your area. ● STOPPING THE ENGINE -Permit the engine
temperature to decrease before stopping.
● ENGINE OIL - Must have the correct viscosity for
the ambient temperature range. ● CONDENSATION IN FUEL TANK - To prevent
condensation in the fuel tank and water entering
● TRANSMISSION/HYDRAULIC FLUID - Use the
the fuel system, fill the fuel tank after each
specified transmission fluid.
operating day.
IMPORTANT: To prevent possible damage to the ● FUEL TANK DRAIN VALVE - Remove water from
transmission, DO NOT operate the tractor with cold the fuel tank periodically as required, and at each
transmission fluid. A transmission oil heat maintainer oil change to keep a water free fuel supply.
must be used when temperatures are -7° C (20° F)
● Steiger 385, 435 and 485 tractors will start and
and below. See Transmission Oil Heat Maintainer in
operate on four cylinders until coolant reaches a
this manual.
preset temperature value.
112
Maintaining Operating Temperatures

IMPORTANT: During cold ambient temperatures To heat the transmission and hydraulic fluid to
never run the engine at low idle speed for long operating temperature, run the engine at 1500
periods of time. Never run the engine for long periods RPM for approximately five minutes before
of time when the coolant temperature is below operating.
normal.
● KEEP ENGINE AT CORRECT OPERATING
During cold ambient temperatures, the engine will TEMPERATURE
not heat to or keep the rated operating temperature
A. When the engine is operating in cold
at slow engine speeds. Slow engine speeds in cold
ambient temperatures without a load, keep
temperatures can cause damage to the engine. Use
the engine warm as described below.
the following procedures to warm the engine and
transmission fluids and to keep the correct operating B. Run the engine at approximately 1500 RPM.
temperatures.
C. Put a cover in front of the grille to control the
● WARMING THE ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION amount of air going through the radiator.
Start the engine using the procedure shown in
this manual at Engine Starting Procedure.
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)

A coolant heater can be installed in your tractor. The
heat er wil l ke ep the engi ne coo lant at wa r m
temperature for improved cold temperature starting.
The heater is installed in the engine block on the RH
side. The heater rating is 1500 watts at 120 volt.
Connect the heater to a 120 volt AC grounded outlet.
Use a heavy duty 3-wire extension cord.
NOTE: Use of an engine coolant heater is

recommended at ambient temperatures of 20o F
(-6.7o C) and lower.
MK00D349
113
Transmission Oil Heat Maintainer (If Equipped)

A transmission oil heat maintainer (1) is available for
y o u r t r a c t o r. T h e h e a t e r w i l l h e l p k e e p t h e
transmission oil a warm temperature for improved
cold weather starting and operation. The heater 1
rating is 300 watts at 120 volts. Connect the heater to
a 120 volt AC grounded outlet with a heavy duty
3-wire extension cord.
NOTE: Plug the heat maintainer in when the oil is

still warm from operation.
MK99K002
114
TOWING THE TRACTOR

The park brake MUST be released before towing to
WARNING: Do not pull with elastic tow prevent damage. If the tractor requires service that
ropes. Elastic tow rope stores energy.
! Sudden release may cause injury or death.
cannot be done in the field, the tractor must be
transported on another vehicle.
M425
If the tractor must be towed a short distance to a safe
Towing the tractor is not recommended and must be a r e a , o r fo r t r a n s p o r t i n g , u s e t h e fo l l o w i n g
avoided whenever possible. The tractor is equipped procedures.
with a spring applied park brake that is applied
automatically whenever the engine is shut off or the
hydraulic system fails.
Engine Running - Tow Procedure

If the engine is not running the park brake must be
manually released.
1. Use a rigid tow bar and safety chain connected
to the drawbar.
2. If equipped, disengage the differential locks. 1
3. Put the transmission control lever (1) in the
NEUTRAL position.
4. Turn the key switch to the ON position.
MK99N205
Engine Not Running - Tow Procedure

If the engine is not running the park brake must be
manually released.
1. Use a rigid tow bar and safety chain connected
to the drawbar.
2. If equipped, disengage the differential locks.
3. Put the transmission control lever (1) in the
NEUTRAL position.
4. Turn the key switch to the ON position.
MK99M023
5. Tow Cable (Optional 385, 435, 485 and 535) If
equipped with the tow cable (1) option, remove
the retainer pin (2) to release the cable from the
storage bracket.
2
1
MT07F128
115
6. The emergency park brake release cable is

located in the fuse/relay compartment. While
sitting in the seat, pull the cable 40 to 50 full
strokes to pressurize and release the park
brake and the park brake indicator light goes
off.
NOTE: When the hydraulic oil is cold, the pump

must be stroked more slowly (3-5 second pause)
between strokes to allow the pump plunger to fill.
IMPORTANT: Steering response will be very slow

when the engine is not running. The towing vehicle
must be large enough to pull, control and stop the MK99H163
towed vehicle. DO NOT EXCEED 4 mph (6 kph)

when towing.
7. The Powershift transmission control lever
MUST be left in the NEUTRAL position with the
key sw i t c h O N d u r i n g th e e nt i r e t owi n g
procedure.
NOTE: Repeat Step 6 as needed during the towing

procedure. Depressing the brake pedal fully or
moving the transmission control lever to the PARK
position or, turning the key switch OFF will reapply
the park brake.
116
TRANSPORTING THE TRACTOR

When transporting the tractor on another vehicle,
use the following procedure.
1
1. The articulation cylinder locking blocks (1)
MUST be installed on both articulation cylinders
before lifting or transpor ting the tractor on
another vehicle.
2. Remove the outer duals or triples before
hauling, unless special per mits allow for
over-width hauling. Check with your local
authorities on over-width hauling regulations.
3. The tractor must be transported with all four
wheels on a flatbed trailer. MK99M001
4. Shut down the engine. The park brake will

apply automatically. Remove the key from the
switch.
5. Secure the tractor with tie-downs front and rear
and block each wheel front and rear.
6. Measure the highest point on the tractor after it
is secured on the flatbed. Check with local
authorities regarding over-height hauling based
on the measurement taken.
117
FRONT STEERING OPERATION (If Equipped)

ACCUSTEER tractors equipped with front steering
can be turned using ARTICULATION steering only
o r a C O M B I N AT I O N o f f r o n t s t e e r i n g a n d
articulation (full time) steering. The operator can
select either mode using the two position (0 = OFF,
1 = Combination ON) steering control switch (1) 1
located on the armrest control console. Also see
Steering Controller Calibration.
Combination Steering Operation

To select COMBINATION steering, steer the tractor
in a straight forward position as indicated on the
display. Depress the top end of the control switch MT07E042
(1) to select the combination steering mode of 1. STEERING CONTROL SWITCH
operation. This will permit the front wheels to be
turned from 5° to 10° to the left or right of center
before articulation steering begins.
When the steering wheel is turned beyond the front
steering limit, articulation steering will begin. This
will provide an additional 40° of steering capability
or a maximum of 50° total left or right steering
ability.
NOTE: Combination steering is disabled above 12
MPH (19 KPH).
Articulation Only Steering

Operation
To return to articulation only steering, steer the front
wheels to the straight forward position as indicated
on the display. Depress the bottom end of the
control switch (1) to the OFF position to activate the
ar ticulation only steering mode. Use MT04M041
ARTICULATION ONLY steering when operating on 2. ICU DISPLAY

public roads or at high speeds.
The front wheels must be in a straight forward
position when selecting articulation only steering. It
may be necessary to switch to combination steering
if front steering should drift off center in severe
applications.
Steering Display Monitor

ACCUSTEER tractors equipped with Performance
Monitor (2) will display the mode of steering
operation (i.e. articulation or combination) and the
relative steering angle left or right of center. The
display will show an icon moving to the left or right
of the center position of the display scale. Be sure
the icon is in the center position of the scale before
selecting the articulation only steering mode.
118
POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION OPERATION (If Equipped)

The transmission is a 16 speed full power shift The transmission control system includes an
transmission. The full power shift design permits electronic controller which actuates the hydraulic
shifting the transmission any time without using the shifting mechanism. The controller also monitors
inching pedal. This includes changing gears when other transmission functions and will identify control
the tractor is moving, stationary or changing the system faults with diagnostic codes. These codes will
direction of travel. The master clutch can be be displayed on the instrument cluster.
m o d u l a t e d fo r c o n t r o l l e d s t a r t u p i n a
preprogrammed start-up gear to provide a smooth
application of power to start the tractor in motion.
Inching (Clutch) Pedal Operation

The inching (clutch) pedal (1) is used to engage and
disengage the transmission. Use the inching pedal to
move the tractor a small amount when connecting
implements, in confined areas, or to stop the tractor.
Push the inching pedal (1) and brake pedal (2) down
completely to disengage the transmission. Release
the inching pedal and brake pedal slowly for smooth
and controlled tractor start up. When the inching
pedal is released the transmission will be engaged
and the tractor will start to move if the transmission 1 2
control lever is in the forward or reverse position.
IMPORTANT: Never RIDE the inching pedal by MK00B156
resting your foot on the pedal during operation.
WARNING: Only operate the machine when

sitting on the seat. DO NOT try to bypass the
OPERATOR PRESENCE SAFETY SWITCH
! by putting heavy objects on the seat. This
can result in serious injury or death.
M519
Transmission Kick-Out to Neutral

If the engine is lugged below 600 RPM (1000 RPM
for 535 only) for a preprogrammed amount of time,
the transmission will default to neutral by design and
no error codes will be displayed. This is a normal
function designed to protect the transmission and
engine from possible damage due to the lack of
lubrication. Move the transmission control lever to
Neutral or Park to re-engage the transmission.
119
Transmission Speeds
The Powershift transmission provides the following speed selections:
Forward....................................................................................................................................................... 16 speeds
Start-Up Gears ......................................................................................................F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8, R1
Reverse ........................................................................................................................................................ 2 speeds
See the Travel Speed Chart for approximate travel speeds for each speed selection and tire size.
WARNING: Travel speed should be such that complete control and

machine stability is maintained at all times. Where possible avoid
! operating near ditches, embankments and holes. Reduce speed when
turning, crossing slopes and on rough, slick or muddy surfaces.
M0109B
Transmission Control System Actuation
The transmission control lever is used to select the

F O RWA R D d i r e c t i o n , R E V E R S E d i r e c t i o n ,
NEUTRAL or PARK position. The transmission
control lever must be in the PARK position to start
the engine.
MK01G198
Always push the inching (clutch) pedal all the way
DOWN during engine start-up.
NOTE: If the CP is shown in the display on the

powershift transmission, cycle the inching pedal.
MK99M027
WARNING: To prevent tractor movement, whenever the tractor is parked

with the engine running, the transmission control lever MUST be in the
! PARK position to activate the park brake. The park brake is applied
automatically when the engine is shut down.
M627
120
Shifting the Powershift Transmission
WARNING: Make sure the area is clear of

! people and obstacles before starting and 1
moving the tractor. M628
Each time the tractor is started, the transmission will

be in a preprogrammed start-up gear, F4 (F2 for
scrapper version tractors) or R1. The start-up gear
selection will be indicated on the gear display (1) on
the instrument panel. The AUTOSKIP transmission
control system provides the operator two options for
shifting, Automatic Skip Shifting two gears at a time
or Single Gear Shifting. The transmission will
automatically skip shift two gears at a time between MT04M020
F4 and F13. Single shifting occurs in all other gears
and when the Select Shift Button is depressed at the
same time as the Gear Shift Switch.
The Gear Shift Switch (2) located on the throttle

handle is used to select the desired transmission
gear. Clicking on the top of the Gear Shift Switch
upshifts the transmission. Clicking on the bottom of
the Gear Shift Switch downshifts the
transmission.The Select Shift Button (3) located on
the front side of the throttle handle is used to allow
single shifts between F4 and F13. To upshift or
downshift ONE gear at a time, the operator must
DEPRESS and HOLD the Select Shift Button (3) with
a finger while using the thumb to operate the Gear
Shift Switch (2). When the Select Shift Button (3) is 3
depressed and held, the operator can upshift or
2
downshift the transmission ONE gear at a time MT07F090
through the full range.
If the Select Shift Button (3) is not used between F4

and F13, clicking the Gear Shift Switch (2) will upshift
or downshift the transmission TWO gears at a time.
The transmission will default to single shifting below
F4 or Above F13 and any time the Select Shift Button
and the Gear Shift Switch are both held continuously.
I f a fo r w a r d s t a r t - u p g e a r o t h e r t h a n t h e
preprogrammed gear is desired, depress the inching
pedal, use the Gear Shift Switch and the Select Shift
Button to select the desired start-up gear (F1, F2, F3,
F4, F5, F6, F7 or F8) which will be displayed on the
instrument panel.
I M P O R TA N T: A f l a s h i n g b ox a r o u n d t h e
MT04M020
transmission control lever status indicators on the
gear display in the instrument panel indicates a
transmission fault. Move the transmission control
lever to NEUTRAL or PARK to reset and reengage
the transmission.
NOTE: Clicking up from F16-LO to F16-HI causes high idle setting resulting in higher transport speed.
the engine speed to increase 200 RPM above the
121
Selecting Direction of Travel With Tractor Stationary

The tractor’s direction of travel can be started from a WITHOUT INCHING PEDAL - Move the transmission
stationary position with or without the inching pedal. control lever from PARK or NEUTRAL position to the
WITH INCHING PEDAL - Push the inching pedal d e s i r e d d i r e c t i o n o f t r ave l . T h e t r a c t o r w i l l
down, apply the brake and move the transmission immediately start moving in the selected direction.
control lever to the desired direction of travel. The
tractor will start moving in the selected direction
when the inc hing pedal and bra ke pedal ar e
released. This will give the operator additional control
over the tractor star t-up under varying load and
operating conditions.
Selecting Transmission Gear With Tractor Stationary

With the transmission control lever in PARK or IMPORTANT: Always start in 4th gear or lower
NEUTRAL, pressing the gear selection switch will under heavy field load applications. In heavy duty
upshift or downshift the FORWARD gear selection. applications such as scrapers or mud, always start in
REVERSE gear selection can only be changed when 2nd gear or lower.
the transmission control lever is in the REVERSE
position. For this reason, reverse gear selection can
only be changed using the inching pedal while the
tractor is stationary.
Shuttle Shifting - (Forward/Reverse-Reverse/Forward)

When shuttle shifting, the operator does not need to
hesitate when selecting the forward or the reverse
direction of travel on the transmission control lever.
Shuttling can be done with or without using the
inching pedal.
Shuttle shifts to R1 from forward gears F1, F2, F3,
F4, F5, F6, F7 and F8 is allowed. Attempting to
shuttle shift to R1 from forward gears above F8 is not
allowed, the transmission will go to NEUTRAL.
Shuttle shifts to forward gears allowed from R1 and
R2 are - F1, F2, F3 or F4. If the previous forward
gear is F1, F2, F3 or F4 the transmission will return
to the same gear. If the previous forward gear is F5 MK99M022
or above the transmission will return to F4.

NOTE: When shuttle shifting, engine speed will
automatically decrease and then increase to throttle
setting for smoother shuttle shifting.
122
With the Inching Pedal
P u s h t h e i n c h i n g p e da l d ow n a n d m ove t h e
transmission control lever from forward to reverse, or
reverse to forward. The tractor will start moving in the
selec ted di rection when the inc hing pedal is
released. This will give the operator additional control
over the tractor direction change under varying load
and operating conditions. This can be done while the
tractor is moving or stationary.
Without Using the Inching Pedal
When the tractor is moving in one direction, move the

transmission control lever to the opposite travel
MK99M027
direction without using the inching pedal. After a
slight delay the tractor will star t moving in the
selected direction.
123
AUTOSHIFT OPERATION
The Autoshift feature permits the tractor to automatically downshift as required to maintain engine speed/torque in
Auto Field Operation (AFO) or select transmission gears based largely on throttle input in Auto Road Operation
(ARO).
NOTE: Autoshift does not function in creeper or reverse gears.
The two modes of operation for Autoshift are:
● Auto Field Operation (AFO) which may be operated in gears 1 through 12.
● Auto Road Operation (ARO) which may be operated in gears 9 through 16.
There is no automatic transition between Auto Field Operation and Auto Road Operation. You must exit the current
mode of operation to enter the alternate mode.
Auto Field Operation (AFO)

Auto Field Operation is intended primarily for tillage applications or where maintaining engine speed/torque under
changing load conditions is accomplished by changing transmission speed.
When the bottom of the Autoshift switch is depressed, the Autoshift Icon and the Auto Field
Operation icon displays on the instrumentation cluster.Auto Field Operation is suspended (no
automatic shifting occurs, but the mode is not exited) under the following conditions:
● The inching pedal is depressed.
● The hitch UP/DOWN switch is in the UP position
● The transmission control lever is in the NEUTRAL

or REVERSE position.
● The UP switch is pressed.
● The Programmable UP/DOWN Shift switch is

pressed.
● The E lectronic End O f Row Step switch is
pressed.
● When the operator leaves the tractor seat.
MT07E020
When Auto Field Operation is suspended, the
Autoshift icon flashes on the instrumentation cluster.
When the condition is removed, automatic shifting
resumes and the icon displays steadily.
Auto Field Operation is exited when:
● The bottom of the Autoshift switch is pressed.
● When the operator leaves the tractor seat and the

transmission control lever is in the Reverse or
Park position.
● Using the upshift selector to select 13th gear.
When Auto Field Operation is exited, the Autoshift
a n d A F O i c o n n o l o n g e r d i s p l ay s o n t h e
instrumentation cluster.
124
Turning Auto Field Operation ON:
Auto Field Operation is intended primarily for tillage applications or where maintaining engine speed/torque under
changing load conditions is accomplished by changing transmission speed.
Automatic gear selection depends on transmission output shaft speed, current gear engaged, and the engine
torque (electronically controlled engines only) required to maintain tractor performance under varying load
conditions. These shift characteristics called “Droop” are preset at the factory. If required, these shift characteristics
can be reset by referring to Resetting Droop in this section.
1. Move the throttle lever to the FULL throttle

position.
NOTE: Leave the throttle in the FULL throttle
position when operating in AFO.
RH02G094
2. Use the gear selection switch and find the
desired maximum gear for the field work being
performed.
RH02G077
3. Press the bottom of the Autoshift switch to turn

Auto Field Operation ON.
Automatic shift range is now from the active gear
when the switch is turned ON to any lower gear
available.
NOTE: If current gear selected is higher than 12th

when Auto Field Operation is turned ON, automatic
shift range will default to 12th gear as the maximum
gear to any lower gear available.
As load increases due to changing field conditions,
the tractor downshifts the transmission automatically
to maintain engine RPM. As load decreases, the MT07E020
tractor upshifts as required within the range, but to no

gear higher than the active gear when Auto Field
Operation was turned ON (12th gear if Auto Field
Operation was turned on in 13th gear or above).
125
Changing the “Maximum” Gear

With Auto Field Operation turned ON, the maximum
gear can be reduced at any time by using the
DOWNSHIFT switch (2). The maximum gear can be
increased only when operating in the current
maximum Auto Field shift range.
For example, if the Auto Field shift was engaged in
gear 8 and the tractor is operating in gear 8 the 1
operator may raise the top gear by pressing the
UPSHIFT switch (1). 2
NOTE: The transmission cannot shift higher than 12th
gear when in Auto Field Operation. Depressing the
UPSHIFT switch when in 12th gear causes Auto Field
RH02G077
Operation to turn OFF.
The Auto Field Operation range is now from the new

“maximum” gear to any lower gear in the available
range.
Turning Auto Field Operation OFF

To turn Auto Field Operation OFF, press the bottom
of the autoshift switch. The Autoshift and AFO icon
no longer displays on the instrumentation.
MT07E020
126
Resetting Droop
The droop value determines the downshift point in Auto Field Operation. Based on engine load, the default droop
setting is 50%.
The higher the droop percentage, the more engine load is required before the downshift occurs. A higher droop
percentage reduces the frequency of downshifts.
The lower the droop percentage, the less engine load is required before downshift occurs. A lower droop
percentage increases downshift frequency.
1. Press and hold the PROG key on the display for

3 seconds within the first 10 seconds of turning
the key switch to the ON position.
1 2
MD05F003
1. PROGRAM KEY 3. DECREASE KEY
2. INCREASE KEY
2. Press the INCR or DECR keys until Transmission

is highlighted then press the PROG key.
RD06A057
3. Press the INCR or DECR keys until “TRANS
SETUP” is displayed and then press the PROG
key.
RD05F125
127
4. Press the INCR or DECR keys until “Set AUTO

DRP” is displayed and then press the PROG key.
RH06G019
5. The * symbol means that the percentage value

shown is the saved value in memory. Press the
INCR or DECR keys to change the shown value
in 5% increments until the desired value is
shown, then press the PROG key.
NOTE: The higher the droop percentage, the more

engine load is required before the downshift occurs.
A higher droop percentage reduces the frequency of
downshifts. The lower the droop percentage, the less
engine load is required before downshift occurs. A
lower droop percentage increases downshift
frequency.
RH06G020
6. Press the INCR or DECR keys until “Exit Setup”

is displayed then press PROG key. The resetting
of Droop is now complete.
RH06G023
128
Auto Road Operation (ARO)

When the top of the Autoshift switch is depressed, the Autoshift icon and the ARO icon
displays on the instrumentation cluster.
Autoshift in Auto Road Operation is suspended (no Autoshift in Auto Road Operation is exited when:
automatic shifting occurs, but the mode is not exited)
● The Autoshift switch is turned OFF.
under the following conditions:
● The UPSHIFT or DOWNSHIFT buttons are
● The inching pedal is depressed.
depressed on the gear selection switch.
● The transmission control lever is moved to the
● The transmission control lever is moved to the
NEUTRAL/PARK position.
REVERSE position.
● When the operator leaves the tractor seat.
● When using creeper gears (if equipped).
When Auto Road Operation is suspended, the
When Auto Road Operation is exited, the Autoshift
Autoshift icon flashes on the instrumentation cluster.
and ARO icon no longer displays on the
When the condition is removed, automatic shifting
instrumentation cluster.
resumes and the icon displays steadily.
Turning Auto Road Operation ON:
1. Depress the top of the Autoshift switch to turn

Auto Road Operation ON.
Automatic shift range is now active from 9 through
16. Automatic gear selection depends on throttle
position and road speed.
MT07E020
NOTE: Tractor comes equipped with minimum gear

default set at 8th in Auto Road Operation. Minimum
gear can be reset in the range of 4th through 8th
gear as operation requires. Refer to Changing the
Minimum Default Gear to reset the lowest gear range
that will occur everytime Auto Road Operation is
engaged.
129
Changing the “Minimum” Default Gear
1. Press and hold the PROG key on the display for

3 seconds within the first 10 seconds of turning
the key switch to the ON position.
1 2
MD05F003
1. PROGRAM KEY 3. DECREASE KEY
2. INCREASE KEY
2. Press the INCR or DECR keys until Transmission

is highlighted then press the PROG key.
RD06A057
3. Press the INCR or DECR keys until “TRANS
SETUP” is displayed and then press the PROG
key.
RD05F125
130
4. Press the INCR or DECR keys until “Set AUTO

LMT” is displayed and then press the PROG key.
RH06G022
5. The * symbol means that the gear # shown is the
saved value in memory. Press the INCR or
DECR keys to change the gear shown until the
desired gear is displayed (between 4 through 8),
then press the PROG key.
MT07E043
Press the INCR or DECR keys until “Exit Setup” is
displayed then press PROG key. The resetting of the
minimum gear is now complete.
RH06G023
131
Turning Auto Road Operation OFF

To turn Auto Road Operation OFF, press the TOP of
the autoshift switch. The Autoshift and ARO icon no
longer illuminates on the instrumentation cluster.
MT07E020
132
24-SPEED TRANSMISSION OPERATION (If Equipped)
The transmission has three (3) selectable forward

WARNING: Make sure the area is clear of gears and one (1) reverse gear. In addition, there are
! people and obstacles before starting and
moving the tractor. M628
four (4) selectable speed ranges (A, B, C and D) in
each of the three forward gears and three speed
ranges in reverse gear.
The 24-speed manual shift transmission is a constant
mesh transmission with synchronized shifting and an The transmission also has an integrated HI-LO
inter nal master wet clutch. The clutch can be powershift which will increase or decrease each
modulated with the inching (clutch) pedal in the selected forward or reverse gear approximately 7.5
forward or reverse gears to provide a smooth percent. These shift combinations will provide 24
application of power to start the tractor in motion. speeds forward and 6 speeds in reverse.
Range Shift Lever Operation

The range shift lever (1) is used to select speed
range A, B, C or D. The shift pattern is an “H” 1
configuration with a center NEUTRAL crossover
position. ALWAYS COMPLETE THE RANGE
SELECTION FIRST BEFORE MAKING THE GEAR
SELECTION. The inching (clutch) pedal must be
used to shift from one range to another.
The RANGE shift can be slower to synchronize than

the GEAR lever shifts. This is because of the higher
speed differential of the rotating parts involved.
When the tractor is stopped, REDUCED engine
speed will make the range shift faster with less
effort. Depress the inching (clutch) pedal, select the MK01A016
desired speed range (A, B, C and D) and apply

steady pressure to the shift lever until the shift is
completed.
Ranges A, B, C and D can be shifted on-the-go.

When operating under light load or no load
conditions, the tractor speed will decrease slowly A C
during the shift operation. Under heavy field load
conditions the tractor will come to a stop quickly
when the inching pedal (clutch) is depressed.
N
NOTE: Steady pressure on the shift lever activates
the synchronizer and slows the rotating parts to
similar speeds so a shift can occur. To reduce shift
time and effort, whenever possible use the foot
operated decelerator switch to reduce engine speed B D
at the same time the inching (clutch) pedal is
depressed when shifting up or down between speed 844L0
ranges.
133
Gear Shift Lever Operation

The gear shift lever (2) is used to select forward
gears first, second or third and reverse gear. The
shift pattern is an “H” configuration with a center
NEUTRAL crossover position. Before making the
gear selection, put the range shift lever in the desired
working speed range. The inching (clutch) pedal
must be used to shift from one gear to another and to
change direction of travel.
With the inching (clutch) pedal depressed, you may

shift between gears 1, 2 and 3 on-the-go. Always 2
stop the tractor before shifting into or out of reverse.
MK01A016
NOTE: When shifting both the range shift and the
gear shift levers, always shift the range lever before
shifting the gear shift lever. To shorten shifting time, R 2
use the foot operated decelerator switch to reduce
the engine speed at the same time the inching pedal
is depressed.
N
1 3
844L0
HI-LO Range Shifting

Th e sw i tc h us e d t o c o nt r ol t he HI - LO ra n ge
powershift is located on the throttle control handle.
Depress the top of the switch (1) to upshift to HI
range. Depress the bottom of the switch (2) to
downshift to LO range.
The HI-LO range shift switch can be used to increase

or decrease any selected gear ratio at any time on 1
the go without using the inching (clutch) pedal.
MK99M030
134
An indicator lamp located on the ROPS instrument

panel will illuminate when HI or LO range is selected.
The upper lamp icon (3) will indicate HI range
operation. The lower lamp icon (4) will indicate LO
range operation.
MK01G300
135
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not drive on roads, or at high speed anywhere, with the differential lock engaged. Do not
! engage the differential lock while turning the tractor. Difficult steering will occur which can result in an
accident. Use the differential lock for traction improvement in field operation. M299A
The differential lock will make both wheels on the

front and/or rear axle turn at the same speed. This
prevents loss of power when one wheel has traction 2 1
and the other wheel does not.
To engage the differential lock on the front or rear
axle (or both), depress switch 1 (front) and/or 2
(rear).
MT06A014
When the differential is engaged an indicator icon (3)
for the front and/or rear axle will be illuminated on the
instrument panel display.
NOTE: The differential locks will automatically

disengage when ground speed exceeds 18 KPH
(11.5 MPH) and cannot be re-engaged until ground 3
speed is less than 17.6 KPH (11 MPH). The diff locks
will also disengage if steering pressure becomes
excessive.
To dis en gag e t he fr ont an d/o r r ear d if f l ock ,
momentar ily push on the brake pedal a small
amount. When the differential lock is disengaged, the
MA04K031A
icon on the instrument panel display will not be
illuminated.
IMPORTANT: To prevent damage, DO NOT engage

the diff locks when the wheels are spinning.
136
CONSTANT ENGINE SPEED OPERATION (If Equipped)

The constant engine speed feature will allow the
operator to set the engine speed at a maximum 1
desired RPM for field applications such as planting,
spraying and PTO operations. Moving the throttle to
the full throttle position will only provide the maximum
engine RPM set by the operator. Reducing the
throttle setting will lower the RPM, as the throttle is
increased the desired set engine RPM will be
re-established.
2
MT07E008
To set the desired maximum engine speed, with the
engine running turn the ON/OFF switch (1) to the ON
position, and move the throttle to the maximum
forward position and adjust the engine speed with the
momentary increase/decrease switch (2) to the
desired operating speed. The engine controller will
save this speed setting when the engine is shut off so
the same speed can be used until the operator
changes it.
NOTE: When the Constant Engine Speed is ON, the

engine speed will be more consistent as long as the
engine is operating at less than full power. This will
result in more constant ground speed under low slip RD05J052
conditions.
Engine Compression Brake

(If Equipped)
The engine brake is controlled by a
2-position momentary switch (1) located
in the RH armrest control console. The
engine compression brake will only
activate if the engine is under no load
and the engine speed is above 1000 RPM. Switch
functions are as follows:
MANUAL MODE: Only functions when the operator
depresses and holds the top of the switch down. In
this position it will only allow the engine to brake up to
65 percent of the throttle setting. 1
AUTOMATIC MODE: Clicking on the bottom of the
MT07E020
switch the system will function automatically as the
engine speed tries to increase from the manual
throttle setting and gear selected. Braking action will
occur trying to maintain the engine at the throttle set
position.
137
6 - FIELD OPERATION
The following section covers attaching implements to the tractor and the
controls to operate these implements.
POWER TAKEOFF (If Equipped)
See the Specifications Section in this manual for When using the PTO operated equipment on a
general specifications for the power takeoff on your tractor with three point hitch, both lift links must be as
tractor. specified in the equipment operator’s manual. The
sway blocks must be in the RIGID position to limit
lateral movement of the equipment. The upper link
WARNING: PTO driven machinery can must be connected in the upper position of the upper
cause serious injury. Before working on or link bracket.
near the PTO shaft, or servicing or clearing Always stop the engine before connecting an
! the driven machine, put the PTO switch or implement PTO shaft. This releases the tractor PTO
lever in the DISENGAGE position and STOP brake and allows the PTO shaft to be turned by hand
the engine. M154A so that the splines of the tractor and implement PTO
shafts can be aligned for connecting.
WARNING: This tractor is equipped with a

1000 RPM PTO. Be sure the implements are
! matched to the tractor SPEED. Lock the
drawbar in the center position when using
the PTO. M267B
PTO Safety Guard

All tractors equipped with power takeoff will have a
large safety guard at the tractor PTO shaft. Make
sure the guard is in good condition and is in the
correct position to prevent possible injury to the
operator or other persons.
MK01H005
138
6 - FIELD OPERATION
PTO And Drawbar Operation

Keep the safety guard in the level position when
using PTO dr iven equipment and for drawbar
operation. The guard can be tilted up for access to
attach the implement drive shaft to the PTO shaft.
Lower the guard to the level position after attaching
the implement PTO shaft.
IMPORTANT: Correct drawbar position for 1000

RPM PTO operation is 16 inches (406 mm) from the
end of the PTO stub shaft to the center line of the
drawpin hole. The drawbar must be in the fully
retracted position when operating PTO equipment.
MK99K039
PTO And Three Point Hitch Operation

When the PTO is not in use, the PTO guard can be
tilted down for three point hitch operation. This
provides additional clearance between the guard
and the hitch upper link.
WA R N I N G : W h e n e v e r a P T O d r i v e n
machine is in operation, the PTO guard must
be in place for most operations to prevent
injury to the operator or bystanders. Where
attachments, such as pumps, are installed
on the PTO shaft (especially if the tractor
! PTO guard is moved upward or removed),
extended shielding equivalent to the PTO
guard must be installed with the attachment. RR00G093
Install the PTO guard to its original position

i m m e d i a t e l y w h e n t h e a tt a c h m e n t i s
removed. M273A
139
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Connecting PTO Driven Equipment

Some three point hitch mounted equipment such as
mowers and snow blowers are driven with a direct 2 2
drive shaft from the implement to the tractor PTO.
Refer to the Implement Operator’s Manual for
necessary adjustment of the hitch lift links, top link
and hitch side sway.
In all PTO applications the drawbar must be 1

fastened in the center position on the drawbar
support (1) with the stop pins (2).
NOTE: See Drawbar Section for load

specifications.
MT07F100
Connect the implement to the tractor in the following
sequence.
1. Connect the implement to the tractor first. Shut
down the engine and remove the switch key.
NOTE: The park brake will apply automatically

when the engine is shut off.
2. Raise the PTO safety guard (1) for access to
the PTO stub shaft (2). Remove the stub shaft
shield.
3. Connect the implement drive shaft to the tractor
PTO stub shaft (2). Make sure the drive shaft 1
yoke is locked securely to the PTO stub shaft.
Lower the PTO safety guard.
NOTE: When the engine is stopped, the PTO 2

clutch unit brake is released and the PTO shaft can
be turned by hand to align the splines of the PTO MK99K039
stub shaft with the implement drive shaft.

4. Check the implement drive shaft for the correct 6. Make sure all shields are in position and in good
length and for free telescopic movement. The condition. NEVER operate the PTO unless the
correct length is important to prevent the PTO P TO s a fe t y g u a r d i s d ow n a n d c o r r e c t l y
drive shaft from hitting bottom or separating in positioned.
any tractor or implement operating position.
5. Check the drive shaft integral shields for free WARNING: When doing stationary PTO
rotation without any interference. If the PTO work, install the front and rear frame
shield is damaged or will not rotate, repair or articulation lock, to prevent accidental
replace the shield before operating the PTO. ! articulation of the tractor. Place the controls
into the park lock position.
IMPORTANT: Whenever the PTO driveshaft is M298B
disconnected from the PTO stub shaft, the PTO stub
shaft shield must be installed over the stub shaft.
140
6 - FIELD OPERATION
OPERATING THE POWER TAKEOFF (PTO)
WARNING: When doing stationary PTO work and dismounting from the tractor with the PTO
! running, keep clear of all moving parts as they are a potential safety hazard. M127A
The PTO is controlled by a switch (1) located on the

RH armrest control console. The PTO is independent
of the transmission and can be operated any time the
engine is running. Also the power takeoff shaft can
1
be started or stopped without affecting the speed of
the tractor. To increase the service life of the PTO
clutch and brake, dr ive lines and PTO dr iven
machines, use the following procedure to operate the
PTO.
MK01G278
Engaging the PTO

When the differential is engaged an indicator icon (3)
for the front and/or rear axle will be illuminated on the
instrument panel display.
Use the following procedure to engage the PTO
system:
1. Reduce the engine speed.
2. Lift the yellow PTO switch knob and push forward
to turn on the PTO system. The PTO indicator
icon lamp will be illuminated on the instrument
cluster when the PTO system is on.
MK01G277
141
6 - FIELD OPERATION
3. When the PTO is engaged, the first line of the

programmable display LCD will indicate 1000
RPM (as equipped) and the right side of the top
line will indicate the actual PTO speed.
NOTE: PTO will be displayed in place of engine

hours.
MT04N001
4. Push the throttle lever forward slowly to 1 3

increase the engine RPM until the correct PTO
speed is indicated on the display LCD.
MT04N002
Disengaging the PTO
WARNING: PTO driven machinery can

cause serious injury. Before working on or
near the PTO shaft, or servicing or clearing
! the driven machine, put the PTO switch in
the DISENGAGE position and STOP the
engine.
M0154A
To disengage the PTO use the following procedure:

1. Pull the throttle lever rearward to reduce the
engine speed.
MT04K031
142
6 - FIELD OPERATION
2. Pull the PTO switch rearward to the OFF

position. The PTO brake will automatically
engage when the PTO is shut off.
MK01G278
STANDARD DRAWBAR
Your tractor is equipped with a sliding type drawbar and drop-pin type hammerstrap assembly. The drawbar is
extendable for improved line of sight when connecting to the implement.
Standard Drawbar With Three Point Hitch

Tractors equipped with three point hitch have a
limited swing drawbar support. 1 1
The drawbar is held in the center position with a stop
pin (1) on each side of the drawbar. The stop pins
can be removed to move the drawbar laterally a small
amount for ease in connecting implements. Always
lock the drawbar in the center position for PTO or
three point hitch applications.
See Drawbar Preparation for more information.
MT07F129
Without Three Point Hitch

Tractors without three point hitch are equipped with a
wide swing drawbar support. Stop pins (1) are used 1
to hold the drawbar in position. The drawbar can be 1
locked in three positions or can be permitted to swing
freely. Lock the drawbar in the center position for
PTO applications.
NOTE: Consult your implement operator manual for

drawbar position. The extendable drawbar MUST be
retracted and locked in position for drawbar
operation.
MT07F100
143
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Drawbar Drop Pin Hammerstrap

Raise the drawpin (1). Pull the trigger (3) rearward
and position the drawpin handle (2) in the cradle of 2
the hammerstrap. Move the tractor into position to
connect the tractor to the implement.
1
3
MT07F101
The impact from the implement hitch on the
hammerstrap trigger (3) will force the draw pin
handle out of the hammerstrap cradle.
MT07F102
The draw pin (4) will drop down through the
implement hitch into the tractor drawbar, followed by
the draw pin handle locking the draw-pin in place.
Install the quick release pin (5) to secure the
drawpin in the locked position. 5
MT07F103
144
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Connecting Implement To Drawbar

To limit stress on the tractor and the implement, the
implement must be connected correctly to the tractor
drawbar. If the implement is not connected correctly,
the tractor will be difficult to operate and the
implement will not perform properly. 2
3
● Connect towed implements (1) to the drawbar (2)
only, never to the three point hitch.
● Use the tractor hitch pin (3) to connect the
implement to the drawbar. Make sure the pin is
4
held securely in place with a lock pin.
● When working with the drawbar, raise the three 1
point hitch as high as possible, to prevent
MT07F093
interference between the lower links and the
implement.
● When working with PTO, do the following:
A. Lock the drawbar in the center position of
the drawbar suppor t with the drawbar
retainer bolts and nuts.
B. Install the safety chain (4), if equipped, as
described in the Safety Section of this
manual.
Drawbar Load Limitations

Heavy equipment can place excessive loads on the
drawbar. Load is greatly increased by speed and
uneven terrain. The maximum vertical load on the
standard drawbar, must not exceed 5300 lb. (2404
Kg) for 335 models or 6000 lb. (2722 Kg) for 385,
435, 485 and 535 tractors when operating in the
retracted position.
NOTE: An optional 11,000 lb. (4983 Kg) Heavy Duty

Drawbar is recommended for heavier drawbar loads
or implements with upward (negative) drawbar loads.
See Heavy Duty Drawbar for additional information.
I M P O RTA N T: W h e n t ow i n g e q u i p m e n t o n a MT07F100
highway, always use a safety chain as an auxiliary

connection between the tractor and towed
implement. See Safety Chain.
145
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Heavy Duty Drawbar (If Equipped)

The optional 11,000 lb. (4983 Kg) Heavy Duty
extendable drawbar MUST be used when drawbar
vertical loads exceed the standard drawbar rating or
upward (negative) drawbar load. The heavy duty
drawbar is not allowed to move laterally from the
center position.
NOTE: QUADTRAC model tractors are equipped

with a two-position drawbar. The drawbar is in the
outer most extended position for use in extremely
short turning applications to prevent the implement
hitch from interfering with the tracks. If the drawbar
position must be changed (shortened) contact your
dealer. MT07F018
146
6 - FIELD OPERATION
THREE POINT HITCH PREPARATION

Tractors equipped with three point hitch will have a Category IV-N hitch. The hitch is controlled with an electronic
hitch system which provides position control of soil engaging implements. The hitch will accept all mounted
implements conforming to SAE, ASAE standard dimensions for Category IV-N.
A hitch coupler can be used with the three point hitch to quickly connect and disconnect implements. The hitch
coupler is a Category IV-N which can be converted to accept Category III implements. See Hitch Coupler.
Category III and IV-N Implement Dimensions

The following SAE-ASAE standard dimensions are related to Category III and Category IV-N implements.
DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS
Category III Category IV-N
Diameter of Hitch Pins 1-7/16 inch (36.5 mm) 2 inch (51 mm)
Lower Hitch Pin Spread 38 inch (965 mm) 36-1/4 inch (921 mm)
Gap in Top of Implement Mast 2-1/6 inch (52.4 mm) 2-9/16 inch (65 mm)
Diameter of Holes in Top of 1-1/4 inch (31.8 mm) 1-3/4 inch (44.5 mm)
Implement Mast
Hitch System Adjustments

The upper and lower links must be adjusted correctly so that the implement can work at the needed depth and to
permit the lower links to move UP and DOWN with the shape of the ground.
NOTE: Make sure the tire pressure, wheel equipment and ballasting is correct before making hitch adjustments.
See Tires/Wheels/Spacing/ and Ballast Section for more information.
WARNING: Extreme care must be exercised when adjusting and

checking hitch and control linkage when the engine is running and when
! linkage is under hydraulic or mechanical load. Study the linkage and hitch
travel. Keep the hands, arms, legs and feet out of the travel arc of the hitch
and linkage. M148B
147
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Lower Link Adjustment
4
2
1
8
6
8
5 3
3
4
4
MS98N009
1. UPPER LINK 5. TURNBUCKLE LOCKED POSITION
2. LIFT ARMS 6. LOCK USED AS ADJUSTING WRENCH
3. DRAFT ARMS 7. FLOAT LOCKOUT PIN
4. PIN RETAINER 8. FLOAT LOCKOUT PIN STORAGE
Adjust the draft arms as follows:

1. Park the tractor on a hard level surface and
lower the hitch to the lowest position.
2. Measure the distance from the center of the
implement pinholes of the lower draft arms to
the ground. This distance must be 8 inches
8 INCH
*(203 mm) regardless of tire size to connect (203 mm)
most implements.
LOWER LINK
3. To adjust the height of the draft arms, remove
the clik pin r etainer (4) fr om the lift link
turnbuckle lock pin. Lift the lock (6) upwards to
use as a wrench to turn the turnbuckle as
519L9
needed to adjust the draft arms to the 8 inch
(203 mm) height.
4. After adjusting each draft arm, lower the
turnbuckle lock so the handle will engage the
lower clevis pin and install the clik pin retainer.
NOTE: The lift link turnbuckle lock functions not

only as an anti-rotation device, but also as an
adjustment wrench, and as the storage location for
the float lockout pin.
148
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Upper Link Adjustment

The upper link is the center hitch point of the three
point hitch. Make sure that the length of the upper
link is adjusted correctly. See the implement
operator’s manual for correct link adjustment.
1
2
MK99H199
Adjust the upper link as follows:
1. Lift outward on the end of the spring strap (2) to
r e l e as e t h e tu r nbu ck l e h an d l e. P u s h t h e
turnbuckle handle (1) forward to the mid-position
of the turnbuckle.
2. Turn the turnbuckle handles clockwise to shorten
the link or counterclockwise to lengthen the link. 1
NOTE: To obtain maximum length adjustment, the
thread length on the ends of the turnbuckle must be
2
equal.
3. After adjusting the upper link, pull the turnbuckle
MK99H198
handle (1) rearward to engage the spring strap
(2) to keep the turnbuckle from turning.
4. The upper link must be installed in the upper
position of the link mount bracket when using
PTO operated equipment or as required for tool
bar equipment.
5. If additional ground clearance for NON-PTO
implements is required, use the lower position by
removing the six mount bracket bolts (1), reverse
the two brackets (2) 180° and reinstall the
mounting bolts.
NOTE: Always install the upper link with the pin flags
facing up.
2
IMPORTANT: After making final adjustments use 1 1
the remote switch to carefully raise the implement to
make sure that there is correct clearance between 2
the implement and tractor components. See Remote
Hitch Switch Operation. MK99K038
149
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Leveling An Implement
Operate the tractor and implement in the field to check and adjust the hitch. Adjust the length of the upper link to
obtain an even implement depth from front to rear. Adjust the length of the lift links to obtain an even implement
depth from side to side. The lift links can also be adjusted to obtain desired lift height in the fully raised position for
some implements.
Sway Blocks
The tractor is equipped with two sets of sway blocks
which can be used to control the amount of side sway
of the three point hitch. When the hitch is in the
lowered position, the hitch can be permitted to sway
from side to side or held in a rigid minimum sway
position.
1
Refer to the implement operator’s manual for
instructions on whether or not to permit side sway. 2
Install or remove the appropriate set of sway blocks
for rigid position or sway position as required.
MK99H194
1. RIGID POSITION, SWAY 2. RETAINING BOLTS
BLOCK INSTALLED
MK99H192
1. SWAY POSITION, SWAY BLOCK REMOVED
150
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Draft Arm Mechanical Float

The lift link rod end clevis is designed to permit the
RH and LH draft a r ms to move up and down
individually. This will permit the implement to follow
the contour of the ground in variable field surface
conditions. The lift links can be locked out of
mechanical float by installing a locking pin in each lift
link upper clevis.
To allow mechanical float, remove the clik pin retainer

and remove the float lockout pin (1) from the upper
clevis of each lift link. 1
MK99H184
Install the lockout pin (1) in the storage position (2)
provided in the turnbuckle lock and adjustment
wrench.
1
MK99H185
151
6 - FIELD OPERATION
HITCH COUPLER - CATEGORY III OR IV-N

Tractors with three point hitch will be equipped with a See Three Point Hitch Preparation for Category IV-N
Category IV-N hitch coupler. The hitch coupler will implement dimensions. The hitch coupler provides a
accept implements confor ming to SAE-ASAE quick easy method of connecting and disconnecting
Category III or IV-N. rear mount implements.
M99H204
CATGORY IV-N HITCH COUPLER
WARNING: Be certain both latches are fully engaged across the

! implement lift pins before transporting or pulling the implement.
M118A
To disconnect an implement from the hitch coupler,

the latches must be disengaged by pulling the latch 1
handles (1) outward and down.
MK99M138
152
6 - FIELD OPERATION
To fasten the implement to the hitch coupler, the

latches must be engaged by pulling the latch handles
(1) UP.
Level and adjust the position of the hitch coupler with

the hitch upper and lower links. See Hitch System
Adjustments.
1
RP96E018
Category IV-N to Category III

Conversion
3
MK99H186
To conver t the Categor y IV-N Hitch Coupler to 4. Two (2) conversion spacer sleeves are furnished
Category III, do the following: with the Category III components. The spacers
are required to convert the implement mounting
1. Remove the Category IV upper hook (1) from the
pins to Category IV diameter to fit the lower
hitch coupler frame.
hooks on the coupler.
2. Install the Category III upper hook and cross
5. Install a conversion spacer sleeve on each lower
member (2) assembly to the coupler frame.
mounting pin on the Category III implement.
3. Remove the Category IV spacer blocks (3) from
the lower hooks of the coupler.
153
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Rear Remote Hitch Switch

(If Equipped)
WARNING: Stand clear of the hitch linkage

and implement when using the remote
! switch. Watch for possible pinch points
between the implement and tractor when the
hitch is moved. M785
The rear remote hitch switch is stored in the cab of

the tractor. The remote switch can be used to RAISE
or LOWER the hitch from the rear of the tractor. This
can be useful to make adjustments when connecting
implements to the three point hitch.
MK01G079
Always operate the rear remote switch according to
the following procedure:
1. Shut down the engine, remove the key from the
switch. Connect the remote switch to the outlet
(1) provided at the rear of the tractor.
2. Start the tractor and apply the park brake.
3. Disengage the PTO.
1
MK01G053
4. Stand clear of the hitch and linkage, push the
TOP switch button (2) to RAISE the hitch. 2 1
MK99H196
154
6 - FIELD OPERATION
5. Push the BOTTOM switch button (3) to LOWER

the hitch.
6. When the switch buttons are released, the hitch
will stop and stay at the height selected until the
hitch controls inside the cab are used to
operate the hitch.
7. If both switch buttons are pushed at the same
time the hitch will stop. When the buttons are 3
released, the system will reset in approximately
one second and the switch can be used in the
normal manner.
8. After all connections and adjustments have
MK99H196
been made, shut off the engine, disconnect the
remote switch from the rear outlet. Store the
switch in the cab.
9. The hitch system must be enabled with the
HITCH POSITION CONTROL after each use of
the remote switch. Refer to Enabling the Hitch
System in this section.
155
6 - FIELD OPERATION
HITCH OPERATION
Electronic Hitch System (If Equipped)

The electronic hitch system operates in POSITION
CONTROL only. In POSITION CONTROL the hitch
moves with the movement of the hand control.
1
2
MT07E019
1. UP/DOWN SWITCH 2. HITCH POSITION CONTROL
3. LOWER LIMIT STOP RING
MT07E009
4. HITCH UPPER 5. HITCH DROP SPEED AND TRANSPORT
LIMIT CONTROL LOCKOUT CONTROL
156
6 - FIELD OPERATION
RAISING AND LOWERING THE HITCH
Enabling the Hitch System

The programmable display indicates when the hitch
system requires enabling. If the displays read HITCH
CAPTURE, the hitch system is not enabled, and the
hitch does not move with the position control.
MT06A021
To enable the hitch system:
1. Press and release the top of the UP/Down
control switch (1) to the DOWN position.
2. Slowly rotate the Hitch Position control (2) to
the full raised position (clockwise) and then
back to the fully lowered position
(counterclockwise). When the programmable
display changes to engine hours, the hitch
system is enabled and the hitch will move with
the Hitch Position control. 1
2
MT07E019
Hitch Position Control

The HITCH POSITION CONTROL (2) can be used
to raise and lower an implement and to select the
working depth of an implement.
NOTE: The UP/DOWN SWITCH (1) must be in the

DOWN position for the hitch to move with the
control.
1
3
To lift an implement, rotate the HITCH POSITION
CONTROL (2) (clockwise).
To l o w e r a n i m p l e m e n t , r o t a t e t h e H I T C H
POSITION CONTROL (2) (counterclockwise). 2
MT05M005
157
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Lower Limit Stop
The Lower Limit Stop inner ring (3), provides a

detent as a reference point for returning the Hitch 3
Position control to the same depth setting. Use the
stop to return an implement to the same operating
depth whenever the hitch position control is moved.
The stop can be bypassed by rotating the position
control knob past the detent.
MT07E019
Transport Lockout
WARNING: Always use the Hitch Position

Control to raise the hitch for road transport.
! Put the Hitch Control in the Lockout Position
and the UP/DOWN switch in the UP position.
SM0
The Transport Lockout is one of the functions of the

hitch drop rate control (5). Use the lockout to lock the
Hitch Position Control in the raised position during
transport of raised implements. Rotate the control 5
fully counterclockwise until the knob is in the detent
position.
MT07E009
Up/Down Switch
The hitch Up/Down control (1) raises or lowers the
hitch without changing other hitch adjustments. The
switch has three functions: UP (rearward), DOWN
(forward) and EXPRESS DOWN (double click and
hold forward).
● UP - Depress the switch rear to raise the hitch at
maximum speed to full transport height or the
height selected with the Hitch Upper Limit
Control.
1
● DOWN - Depress the switch front to lower the
hitch from transport height to working height at
the speed selected with the Drop Speed Control.
MT07E019
● EXPRESS DOWN - Double click and hold the
switch front to activate. The hitch lowers from
transport height at maximum speed, bypassing
both the Drop Speed Control and Hitch Position
Control settings, to below normal working depth.
When the switch is released, the hitch returns to
the selected settings of the Position Control and
Drop Speed Control.
158
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Upper Limit Control

The UPPER LIMIT CONTROL (4) limits the amount
of upward hitch travel when the hitch is raised. This
control knob is mounted under the cover on the arm
r e s t c o n t r o l c o n s o l e . Tu r n i n g t h e k n o b 4
counterclockwise limits upward hitch travel more and
turning the knob clockwise will allow the hitch to raise
further. A setting of “11” will allow the hitch to raise to
the FULL UP position. A setting of “1” will allow the
hitch to raise approximately half way. The UPPER
LIMIT CONTROL allows the operator to tailor the
upward hitch travel to specific implements; i.e... hitch
mounted PTO driven implements.
MT07E009
Drop Speed Control
The Drop Speed Control (5) limits the hitch lowering
speed and serves as the hitch transport lock. Turn
the control clockwise for faster hitch lowering,
counterclockwise for slower hitch lowering. Drop
speed varies with the implement attached; planters 5
need slower speeds to prevent seed tube plugging,
while plows and rippers need faster speeds for
better ground engagement. Turn the control fully
counterclockwise to the detent position to put the
hitch in transport lock mode.
MT07E009
159
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Slip Limit Control (If Equipped)

The SLIP LIMIT CONTROL SWITCH (6) is used to
prevent the tractor wheel slip from exceeding a set
slip limit. When the actual slip is more than the set
slip limit, the hitch will be controlled by the Slip Limit
Control. The hitch will raise to allow greater weight
transfer for improved traction and reduced hitch
load. When slip decreases below the set limit, hitch
control returns to position control.
MT07E019
The slip control rocker switch has three positions -
OFF, ON and SET (momentary) used as follows:
1. OFF - No slip function is available and used to
decrease (-) the set slip limit.
MK99N012
2. ON - The slip function is selected. If no limit was
set before, the slip limit default is set to 30%.
MK99N013
3. SET - Momentary switch position used to 1 3

increase (+) the set slip limit.
MK99N014
1 3
160
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Slip Limit Control System Operation (If Equipped)

1. The tractor must be properly ballasted for the
load being pulled.
2. The tractor must be moving over 2 mph (3.2 kph)
and the three point hitch must be lowered with
the implement in the ground.
3. Set the hitch for the desired implement position
(depth).
4. Move the slip switch (6) to the ON (middle)
position, then press SET (momentar y) and
release. The performance monitor percent of slip 6
screen will be displayed. The indicator (7) under
the bar graph will indicate the slip limit value,
MT07E019
which will be the current slip +5%. The system
will not set below 5%, or above 40%. The hitch
will begin to raise if the wheel slip exceeds the
set limit value.
5. If field conditions change, the slip limit must be
changed to match the new conditions. This can
be done three ways:
A. To reset the system - Depress the switch to
OFF for at least two seconds then reset (see
Step 4).
B. To manually increase the set point - Press
SET (+) and release. Each time the switch is 7
pushed the set point will raise 1% and the
display indicator (7) will increase to show
the new set point value. The set point
cannot be set above 40%.
C. To manually decrease the set point -
Depress the switch OFF (-) then back ON
MT05M005
quickly. The set point will decrease by 1%
and the display indicator (7) will decrease to
show the new set value. Repeat turning
OFF and ON until the desired decreased set
value is achieved. The set point cannot be
set below 5%.
161
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Hitch Position Control Operation

The tractor and implement must be operated in the field to set the correct position. Do the following steps.
STEP 1
Set the POSITION CONTROL (2) to the fully up
Position (clockwise). Set the Drop Speed Control
which should be set to “6” and the Upper Limit
Control, which should be set to “1”. Set the
UP/DOWN SWITCH (1) in the DOWN position. If
the capture hitch message is shown on the display,
move the HITCH POSITION CONTROL to match
the actual hitch position.
NOTE: The capture hitch message can also mean 1

2
that the hitch is above the upper limit setting.
MT07E009
STEP 2
Adjust the UPPER LIMIT (4) to set the desired hitch
raised position. A setting of “11” corresponds to the
hitch being fully up. 4
MT07E009
STEP 3
1
Operate the tractor and the implement in the field.
Set the implement depth with the HITCH POSITION
C O N T RO L ( 2 ) . T h e ra t e o f h i t c h m o t i o n i s
determined by the rate at which the control is
moved. If the control is moved slowly, a precision
control mode is provided to move the hitch slowly to
match the control motion. If the control is moved
quickly the hitch will lower at the set DROP RATE
SPEED. Move the lower limit stop inner ring (3) to
the desired depth. This will provide a reference 2
point for retur ning the control to the original
implement depth position each time the control is MT07E019
moved and to maintain the same depth.
162
6 - FIELD OPERATION
STEP 4
1
Use the UP/DOWN switch (1) UP position to
temporarily raise the implement without changing
any of the hitch position adjustments. Use the
DOWN position to return the implement to its
original position.
MT07E019
STEP 5
Adjust the DROP SPEED (5) until the implement
drops at a desirable rate.
IMPORTANT: Always use the Hitch Position Control

to raise the hitch for road transport. Put the Hitch
Drop Rate Control in the LOCKOUT position (fully
CCW) and the Up/Down switch in the UP position.
MT07E009
163
6 - FIELD OPERATION
End Of Row System Operation (If Equipped)

The electronic end of row system will improve ● Set the remote hydraulics to any position.
productivity and reduce operator fatigue by reducing
● Position the hitch up or down.
the amount of functions cycled at the headlands. A
simple push of a button will perform up to four
NOTE: If there is an active fault code in any tractor
different functions available only with Performance
controller, the error icon will appear on the screen
Monitor and Powershift Transmission. Controlled
when trying to use the Electronic End of Row system.
functions are:
The Electronic End of Row will not function until the
● Shift the Powershift transmission up or down. fault is corrected. Press the play switch to clear the
error icon and contact your Case IH dealer to clear
● Change the engine throttle position up or down.
the controller fault.
Recording a Sequence
1. Start the tractor and drive towards the headland
wi th th e im pl em en t. P r es s a nd h ol d th e
RECORD switch (1) in the armrest control
panel until the second beep is heard. This will
1
put the system in record standby mode. The
Electronic End of Row screen will appear on the
Performance Monitor.
MT07E009
2. Press the top of the STEP switch (2) when the
headland is reached. This will start recording.
Cycle through the functions required to make 2
the first half of the headland turn. For example
for a hitch mounted implement, shift down, raise
the hitch and decrease the throttle setting.
Press the STEP switch (2) again to pause the
recording. Make the turn with the implement
and press the Step switch (2) again to resume
recording.
Cycle through the functions required to make

the second half of the headland turn. For
MT07E019
example, increase the throttle setting, lower the
hitch and shift up.
NOTE: Pressing and hold the Step switch (2) for 3

seconds will switch recording from program one to
program two. The first program must be recorded
before the second program can be recorded. (See
recording tips.)
164
6 - FIELD OPERATION
3. Press the record switch (1) to save the

recording.
1
MT07E009
4. Selected function icons appear in the square
(1). When the next function is selected, the prior
selected function icon is moved under the
square. Shown is the transmission up shift in
the square with cylinder retract and engine rpm
up below. See display icon char t for icon
descriptions.
1
RH04C027
Display Icons
Icon Icon
Graphic
Graphic Icon Description Icon Description
Electronic End of Row Symbol. Displays in Hitch lower.

screen top center when system is active.
Record - On steady in recording mode, blinks Transmission up - shift.

when in pause mode.
Play - On steady in playback mode, blinks Transmission down - shift.

when in pause mode.
Program selection one. Remote cylinder extend.
165
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Display Icons
Program selection two. Remote cylinder retract.
Sequence pause mode - blinks when on. Remote cylinder float.
Engine RPM up. Remote cylinder neutral.
Engine RPM down. Error
Hitch raise.
166
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Recording Tips ● Stay in a gear close to the one recorded. For

example, a downshift sequence of 7th to 4th gear
● Record the sequence while actually performing is recorded in 10 seconds. Now the gear is
the functions in the field. Recording can be done changed to 12th. When the sequence is played,
while in Park, Forward or Neutral. However, the the system may not have time to shift all the way
most accurate results are achieved when the down to 4th gear. It will shift for 10 seconds (until
sequence is recorded while operating the tractor the recorded time has elapsed) and then stay in
in the application. what ever gear it was able to achieve.
● Record the functions in the order and in the time ● Give the program time to make the required
desired. The functions are recorded in “real time”. number of shifts. If the shift up or down sequence
For example, if shifting from 1st to 5th gear takes is recorded too quickly, the controller may not be
30 seconds while recording, the system will take able to make all of the shifts desired when the
30 seconds to shift from 1st to 5th gear when the sequence is played back.
program is played back.
● A maximum of 30 steps can be recorded into a
● Keep the engine throttle lever at the same position sequence.
it was at when the sequence was recorded. The
engine RPM will return to the position set by the ● A total of two separate programs can be recorded.
lever after a sequence is played. For example, a However, when one program is recorded again,
sequence is recorded to increase the throttle the other program will be erased and must be
position from 900 to 1500 RPM. After saving the recorded again. It is recommended to only record
recording, the throttle is moved to 1000 RPM. one program at a time.
When the sequence is played back, the engine ● The sequence can be paused between functions if
RPM will increase to 1500 RPM, then drop back required by pushing the STEP switch. Push the
to 1000 RPM. If this happens, move the throttle to switch again to resume recording.
the target value of the program (in this example,
1500 RPM) or re-record the sequence.
167
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Playing A Sequence
1. Start the tractor and drive toward the headland
with the implement. Press the play switch (3) in
the ar mrest control panel. This will put the
system in playback standby.
NOTE: Pressing and holding the play switch will

cause the system to toggle between program 1 and 2
for playback. Release the switch when your desired
program appears. Recording two programs is not 3
recommended.
MT07E009
2. Press the STEP switch (2) when the sequence is
to be played. The system will cycle through the 2
functions that were recorded to make the first
half of the headland turn. Make the turn with the
implement.
Press the STEP switch again to playback the
next set of recorded functions. The system will
cycle through the functions that were recorded to
make the second half of the headland turn.
MT07E019
Playback Tips
● In order to play a recorded sequence, the tractor ● Manual activation of a system controlled function
has to be moving in a forward gear and the will pause the sequence playback. Press the
operator has to be seated. STEP switch to resume playback.
● The recorded sequence will start playback ● While in playback mode, if the tractor is stopped
immediately after the STEP switch is pressed. for more than 10 seconds, the Electronic End Of
Row function will exit. Press the play switch to
● Shifting out of forward gear will pause the playback
enter playback mode again.
of the sequence. To resume playback, shift to
forward and press the STEP switch. ● If the operator leaves the seat for more than 2
seconds, the error mode will be displayed on the
screen and playback will stop. Press the play
switch (3) to exit the error screen.
168
6 - FIELD OPERATION
REMOTE HYDRAULICS
There are four electric remote hydraulic control levers
(and a switch for remote 5 if equipped) on the arm
rest control console depending on the number of
remote circuits on your tractor. The No. 1 remote
hydraulic control lever will operate the outer left rear
hydraulic coupler.
1 2 3 4
5
MT07E014
ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL
The remote control levers (1 through 4) have several

positions as shown in the illustration. FLOAT
NOTE: If an electric remote valve lever is not in LOWERING DETENT

neutral at engine start-up, AUX ENABLE will be (TIMER CONTROLLED)
displayed and the lever must be returned to
NEUTRAL before flow will start. MOMENTARY
NEUTRAL
MOMENTARY
RAISING DETENT
(TIMER CONTROLLED)
MA99N021
169
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Remote Valves And Couplers
3A
1A
2A 3B
1B
2B
MK01G047
The couplers are an integral part of each remote Pushing the Number 1 remote lever forward (lower)
valve. Beginning on the LH side, the couplers are will direct fluid pressure to the hydraulic couplers
identified in pairs as Number 1, Number 2, Number (1A). Pulling the remote lever rearward (raise) will
3, Number 4 and Number 5 (if equipped) direct fluid pressure to hydraulic coupler(1B). The
corresponding to the remote control levers on the lower coupler of each pair is the RAISE (B) port.
arm rest control console.
NOTE: All remote valves are equipped with a single
line lock in the B (raise) port.
Hose Couplers
The tractor is equipped with ISO 5675 Standard
Female Couplings. These couplings will fit standard
1/2-14 inch male hose couplers made to ASAE S366,
SAE J1036 or ISO Standard 5675.
Your dealer can also supply hose fittings or adapters
to connect different combinations of implements to
the standard male coupler.
NOTE: In scraper or other severe operations use

high-flow, frequent cycle tips.
1/2 inch coupling - P/N 86025322 520L9
3/4 inch coupling - P/N 347755A1
WARNING: Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have enough

force to penetrate the skin. Hydraulic fluid may also infect a minor cut or
opening in the skin. If injured by escaping fluid, see a doctor at once.
Serious infection or reaction can result if medical treatment is not given
! immediately. Make sure all connections are tight and that hoses and lines
are in good condition before applying pressure to the system. Relieve all
pressure before disconnecting the lines or performing other work on the
hydraulic system. To find a leak under pressure use a small piece of
cardboard or wood. Never use hands. M252A
170
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Connecting Remote Hoses
2
1
MK99K038
WARNING: The implement should be lowered to the ground before

! uncoupling of the remote hydraulic hoses.
M134A
The hydraulic male hose coupler can be connected 3. To connect the hose to the remote coupler, rotate
to or disconnected from the tractor coupler when the coupler cover to expose the female coupler,
either the tractor or implement hydraulic system is put the male coupler into the female coupler and
under pressure. Connect the implement hoses to the push forward.
remote couplers so that the implement lowers when
4. To disconnect the hose from the female coupler,
the remote hydraulic control lever is pushed forward
hold the male coupler and pull out.
and raises when the control lever is pulled to the rear.
5. Rotate the coupler cover closed to protect the
1. If the engine is running, apply the park brake and
female coupler from contamination.
put the remote control levers in the NEUTRAL
position. DO NOT connect remote hoses when
IMPORTANT: When connecting the implement hose
the remote levers are in the float position when
to the tractor, make sure there is enough hydraulic
the engine is running.
hose to permit the tractor to turn in both directions.
2. Each remote coupler is equipped with a rotating
dust cover (1) and spillage drain hose. Clean the IMPORTANT: Implements and other attachments
cover, the female tractor coupler (2), and the many times have several large remote cylinders that
male hose coupler before connecting the male need as much as four gallons (15 litres) of fluid to fill.
coupler. Always check the hydraulic fluid level after charging
cylinders of implements and attachments. Never
operate the tractor under load if the hydraulic fluid
level is below the LOW mark.
171
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Remote Hydraulic Valve Timer Control

The timer control, (1) located under the arm rest
cover, determines the amount of time an electrical
remote circuit has hydraulic flow after the control
lever is moved to the detent position. Turning the
knob clockwise increases the amount of time and
turning the knob counterclockwise decreases the
amo unt of ti me. If the c on tro l is t ur ned fu ll
clockwise, hydraulic flow is continuous. The general
range is from 0 to 30 seconds.
NOTE: The knob only changes timer setting if a

performance monitor is not available. See Individual 1
Remote Timer Display if equipped with a
Performance Monitor. RD05J093
172
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Variable Flow Control

Each circuit of the four electric remote hydraulic
circuits has a variable flow control (2) located under
the arm rest cover. Use the variable flow control to
increase or decrease the rate of flow of hydraulic
fluid to the remote hydraulic couplers. The flow can
be adjusted from 30 GPM (114 L/min) maximum to
2 GPM (8 L/min) minimum per valve. To increase
the rate of flow, turn the flow control clockwise or 3
turn the flow control counterclockwise to decrease
the rate of flow.
RD05J006
If your tractor is equipped with a Performance
Monitor (3), this screen will display the remote
coupler flow as a percentage of the total available 4
flow at each coupler. The hydraulic flow information
is available at all times. The remote hydraulic
couplers data screen will be displayed when any of
the remote flow controls (4) are changed more than
5% of the set value for each coupler. This is a useful
reference tool when setting the speed of hydraulic
motors.
MT07E009
MT06A014
5TH REMOTE FLOW CONTROL

(IF EQUIPPED)
173
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Remote Valve Line Lock

The remote hydraulic valve is equipped with a single The line lock is used in applications where a remote
line lock on all five remote valve sections on the “B” hydraulic cylinder must be hydraulically locked in
(raise) port. position with no leakdown.
Remote Valve Function Control Operation
WA R N I N G : T o p r e v e n t a c c i d e n t a l
lowering of the implement, always put the
! remote lev er function c ontr ol in the
NEUTRAL LOCK position when
transporting.SM0
This rotary lever controls the function mode of the

auxiliary remote circuits. The lever has five
positions for electric remote systems.
MT07E014
ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL
Full Function (Neutral) Position

Allows full function of the remote levers including
float.
To operate the remote hydraulics in a float condition,

make sure the remote function control is in the full
function position and push the remote control lever
fully forward.
MA99N041
174
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Neutral Lock Position

The remote hydraulic control levers can be locked in
the neutral position to prevent moving the remote
lever during transport. This can be done by moving
the remote control levers to the neutral position and
rotating the remote function control to the right locked
position. This must be done for each hydraulic control
lever that you intend to be locked out.
MA99N042
No Float Position
To operate in a “no float” position, rotate the remote
function control to float lockout position. Now, the
control lever cannot be moved into the “float”
position.
MA99N043
Non-Detented Position
(If Equipped)
When operating implements or attachments which
require a non-detented raise hydraulic function, the
remote function control MUST be rotated to the
non-detent position. This prevents the remote lever
from moving to the rearward (raise) detent position.
MA99N044
WARNING: Certain implements and attachments require a non-detented

remote function control for proper or improved operation. Be sure to move the
remote function control to the non-detent symbol position for these situations.
! This will prevent the remote control lever from going into a timed raise detent. A
timed raise detent will continue hydraulic operation for a period of time after
remote lever movement, which may cause unwanted motion for some
implements or attachments which may result in injury or death. M0629
175
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Hydraulic Motors
Move the flow control (3) to minimum flow setting.
Move the remote control lever that the motor circuit is
connected to forward to the float position. Rotate the
remote function control lever (2) all the way to the
hydraulic motor symbol. This will provide two
operating positions for the control lever for hydraulic
motor application only.
MA99N045
To engage the hydraulic motor, move the control

lever rearward from the float position to the lower
position. The hydraulic motor will now operate. 2
MT07E014
Use the variable control (3) to regulate the motor
speed.
To disengage the hydraulic motor, move the control

lever forward to the float position. This will allow the
hydraulic motor to slowly come to a stop. Do not
rotate the auxiliary function control lever from the
hydraulic motor position during motor application as
it will cause the motor to stop immediately. This will
cause damage to the hydraulic motor, hoses and
equipment.
3
NOTE: Reverse the hoses in the remote coupler to
change the direction of motor rotation. MT07E009
176
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Low Pressure Return Circuit (If Equipped)

The remote auxiliar y valve RH side manifold
provides porting for MAIN RETURN (1).
The MAIN RETURN (1) circuit can be used to
reduce back pressure in the remote hydraulic return
line. This will result in more efficient hydraulic motor
operation and can also be used in applications
where low retur n oil pressure is desired for
improved implement operation.
Consult your dealer for more information on a Low
Pressure Return Coupler Kit. 1
MK99K143
Hydraulic Power Beyond

(If Equipped)
The Hydraulic Power Beyond function provides a
continuous, maximum flow of oil for implement
hydraulics operations.
5
The remote auxiliary valve LH manifold provides 4
additional porting for the following power beyond
functions - PUMP SUPPLY (3), LOAD SENSING (4) 3
and REGULATED PRESSURE (5).
Consult your dealer for more information about the
Power Beyond Coupler Kit. 1
MK99K143
Motor Case Drain Return

(If Equipped)
If hydraulic motor case drain is required, connect the
case drain port from the hydraulic motor to the CASE
DRAIN return coupler (2).
See your dealer for information about the Case Drain
Coupler Kit.
2
MD01H058
177
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Auxiliary Auto Mode Switch Operation (If Equipped)

This is a two-position momentary type rocker switch
that al lows you to s elec t the AUTO MATIC or
MANUAL mode of operation on remote auxiliary
valves No. 1 and/or No. 3 for use when laser
operated or similar equipment is used.
MT07E014
Depressing the No. 1 end of the rocker switch will
turn the Auto function ON for remote valve section
No. 1. Depressing 1 again will turn the Auto function
OFF. Depressing the No. 3 end of the switch will turn
the Auto function ON for remote valve section No. 3.
Depress the switch again to turn the Auto function
OFF for remote No. 3.
Contact your dealer to activate this function.
MT07E014
Implement Potentiometer
Connector Plug (If Equipped)
The auxiliary implement connector (1) for use with
AUTO mode operation is located under the RH rear
corner of the cab.
1
MK99K051
178
6 - FIELD OPERATION
The diagram shows the tractor side connector plug

pin numbers, location and usage for implement
position potentiometers.
Remote Valve No. 1 Remote Valve No 3

Pin 1 - Signal Pin 4 - Signal
Pin 2 - Power Pin 5 - Power
Pin 3 - Ground Pin 6 - Ground
Connection for laser operated scrapers.
Scraper No. 1 Scraper No 2

Pin 5- Power Pin 5- Power
Pin 6- Ground Pin 6 - Ground MA01D063
Pin 1 - Signal Pin 4 - Signal
Contact your dealer for additional information.
179
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Auxiliary Auto Mode Display
MT04M020
Remote1, 3 and 6 in Auto Mode
MT07F105
AUXILIARY AUTO MODE DISPLAY

When operating in the Auto mode it will be displayed The No. 1 and/or No. 3 digit is only visible if the No. 1
on the programmable display screen in place of the or No. 3 remote valve is in the AUTO mode of
PTO display. The hour meter in the bottom half of the operation.
display is visible at all times.
NOTE: If equipped with the optional 6th and 7th
The display screen will show which valves are active
remote valve, No. 6 will also be displayed if operating
in auto mode. If the valves are in manual mode the
in the AUTO mode.
screen will default to normal PTO display.
180
6 - FIELD OPERATION
6th and 7th/TwinFlow Remote Control Operation (If Equipped)

The control for the 6th and 7th remote valves is
located on the RH window monitor bar. Remote lever
operation, function control, timer control and flow
control will be the same as described for the RH
armrest console electrical remote controls.
NOTE: The 6th remote AUTO mode of operation will

be displayed on the programmable display screen.
MK01G328
TwinFlow Remote Couplers

(If Equipped)
The couplers for the TwinFlow 6th and 7th remote
valves are located at the rear of the tractor. These 7A
couplers will fit 3/4 inch male hose couplers made to 1
ISO Standard 7241-1 Series “A” only. Hydraulic oil
from the 6th and 7th remote valve must be returned
into the valve. Use either a valve section return port
or the low pressure motor return port (1) on the valve. 6A
7B
6B
MK01G170
181
6 - FIELD OPERATION
AUXILIARY IMPLEMENT POWER CONNECTIONS
Seven Terminal Outlet

A seven terminal electrical outlet is located on the
rear of the tractor. The outlet conforms to SAE J560
for interchangeability. The outlet provides power for
brake light, left turn signal, right turn signal, tail lamp,
implement switch power and field lights.
MK01G052
Connector Plug
Use a mating seven terminal connector plug kit (P/N
A139672) for connecting the implement wiring. A
connector plug is available from your dealer.
364L9
Use a mating seven terminal connector plug kit (P/N
A139672) for connecting the implement wiring. A 1
connector plug is available from your dealer. 6
NOTE: If the connector plug on the implement wiring
is not a seven point SAE connector plug, the plug 5
must be changed.
Pin 1 (White) - Ground 2
Pin 2 (Black) - Field Lights (20 amps)
Pin 3 (Yellow) - Left Turn Signal (2 amps) 3
4 7
Pin 4 (Red) - Brake Light (15 amps)
367L9
Pin 5 (Green) - Right Turn Signal (2 amps)
Pin 6 (Brown) - Tail Lamps (5 amps)
Pin 7 (Blue) - Key Switched Power (30 amps)
182
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Auxiliary Cab Power Supply Connections

An auxiliary power outlet (1) and 3-pin auxiliary
power outlet (2) are also provided inside the
operator’s cab. The outlets are located below the
ROPS post instrument cluster (3), on the LH (4) and
RH (5) side of the seat console cover. The outlets
can be used for connecting monitors, implement
controllers and other 12 volt equipment. 3
1
NOTE: Additional power supply outlets may be
located at the rear of the cab behind the seat.
2
MT05N015
The 3-pin socket (2) has a ground terminal and two
12 volt power terminals. Terminal A (30 amp) is
through the key switch. Terminal B (30 amp) is direct A - KEYSWITCH
battery power. Terminal C is ground.
NOTE: The correct 3-pin female connector to fit the

socket can be obtained from your dealer.
C - GROUND
B - BATTERY
MT07F107
MT07F108
183
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Implement Cable Cab Access

A foam sealed access hole (1) is provided on the
r i g h t s i d e o f t h e c a b i n s i d e t h e f u s e / r e l ay
compartment. Another cable access (2) is located at
the lower rear of the RH service door under the cab
skirt. Use these access holes to route wire harness
for other equipment from the cab to the rear of the
tractor or implement. 1
NOTE: See Implement Area Counter Switch for

location of implement Raise/Lower connector (starts
and stops acre counter).
MK98N025
MD01H067
184
6 - FIELD OPERATION
True Ground Speed Sensor

Connector
One radar sensor connector is located inside the
electronics compartment for monitors requiring the
ground speed input from the True Ground Speed
Sensor (if equipped). An adapter harness (P/N
324847A) is available from your dealer to convert an
existing monitor ground speed connector to this new
connector.
MS00A015
Monitor Mounting
Monitor mounting brackets are available for the
installation of various monitors. In addition to the AFS
monitor (if equipped), monitor mounts are available
for three different mounting locations as follows:
1. LH side of RH A-Post
2. RH side of RH A-Post
3. Service Window
See your dealer for more information.
MK99M008
ISO 11783 Implement Connector

System (If Equipped)
When a tractor is shipped from the factor y as
ISO-READY, the following components will be
installed: wiring harness, ISO receptacle (1) and
mounting brackets for ISO display. The additional
required components can be ordered from your
dealer.
MT07E025
185
7 - IN-FIELD PERFORMANCE
The following section covers the equipment on your tractor that can
enhance the in-field performance of your tractor.
TRACTOR BALLAST
WARNING: Extra weight and bad traction conditions such as mud or ice increase your stopping distance.
Remember that the liquid in the tires, weights on the machine or wheels, tanks filled with fertilizer,
! herbicides or insecticides - all these add weight and increase the distance you need in which to stop.
SM0113B
Loads Matched To Tractor The most important item in field operations is the
amount of horsepower available at the hitch or
1. The best traction occurs when wheel slip for drawbar. Power needed to move a tractor that has
tractors equipped with radial tires is between 5 to too much weight will decrease the power that is
8 percent. Operating within this range will available to pull the implement.
provide the best fuel economy, performance and
tire life. Proper ballasting procedures will provide IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all
the most efficient use of the tractors available equipment and ballast weight must never be more
horsepower. It will not make up for implements than the maximum recommended operating weight
that are too large for the tractor. If engine speed or tire load rating. See Maximum Recommended
falls below the rated RPM range and wheel slip is Operating Weight.
not above the recommended operating range,
adding weight WILL NOT i mprove tractor NOTE: Also refer to the Ballasting Guide supplied
performance. under separate cover for additional information on
2. Before adding ballast, the tractor static weight ballasting your tractor.
distribution must be determined. Correct static
weight ratio for the work application must be
obtained and maintained so that equal (50-50)
front and rear axle tractive effort is obtained
when the tractor is under load. See Tractor
Weight Distribution.
3. Remove the weight when not needed for lighter
loads.
4. Pull lighter loads at a little faster speed to do
more work and increase efficiency. DO NOT over
weight the tractor to pull very heavy loads.
Operating a tractor with too much weight can cause:
A. A decrease in horsepower available at the
implement and then, a decrease in amount
of field worked.
B. An increase in amount of fuel used.
C. A decrease in tire life.
D. The soil to be compacted.
E. Too much force on the power train will
decrease the life of the power train and
cause high operating cost.
186
Static Weight Distribution
Front 55% Rear 45%

MA98D048
DRAWBAR TOWED HIGH DRAFT IMPLEMENTS
Front 60% Rear 40%

MA98D049
HITCH MOUNTED IMPLEMENTS
Front 65% Rear 35%
MA98D050
IMPLEMENTS WITH HEAVY VERTICAL DRAWBAR LOADS
187
Tractor Weight Distribution

There may be times when it is desirable to weight the The desirable static weight distribution is
tractor to decrease slippage and increase balance approximately 55 percent of the weight on the front
and stability. There are many factors that affect axle and 45 percent of the weight on the rear axle for
traction and balance that must be considered before t r a c t o r s u s e d w i t h s t a n d a r d d r aw b a r t ow e d
adding weight such as: implements. The desirable tractor static weight
distribution is approximately 60 percent of the weight
1. Type of operation (tillage, planting etc.)
on the front axle and 40 percent of the weight on the
2. Soil conditions rear axle for tractors used with hitch mounted
implements.
3. Terrain (hillside operation)
4. Type of implement The desirable weight distribution ratio for tractors
used with drawbar towed implements with a heavy
5. Draft load of implement
vertical drawbar load is approximately 65 percent of
6. Tires (size, type, pressure, single or dual) the weight on the front axle and 35 percent of the
weight on the rear axle.
7. Tractor static weight distribution ratio
NOTE: Tractors used in high vertical drawbar load
To adjust the tractor to obtain optimum performance
applications and equipped with hitch and PTO may
fo r e a c h t y p e o f f i e l d o p e r a t i o n , t h e m a j o r
not be able to achieve the desired weights split ratio
considerations are:
and stay within the maximum recommended
A. Total tractor weight and weight split (% of operating weight requirement. In this situation, the
static weight on the front and on the rear maximum amount of ballast should be placed on the
axles) front to come as close to the desired ratio as possible
and not go over the maximum operating weight limit.
B. Type of ballast used (cast weight and/or
liquid)
The static weight distribution ratios are based upon
C. Tire inflation pressures the total weight of a fully equipped tractor (including
ballast or other attached equipment). Weight split
Three different levels of operating applications and ratios are calculated without the implements or
weighting categories are recommended as follows: attachments connected to the tractor. Utility blades,
chemical tanks or other attached equipment must be
A. Drawbar Towed, High Draft Implements
considered as ballast.
(Disks, Chisel Plows, Field Cultivators,
Towed Rippers etc.)
IMPORTANT: The front and rear weight split ratio
B. High Mounted Implements (Rollover Plows, must be maintained whenever adding or removing
PTO Rototillers, Mounted Rippers, Row ballast.
Crop Cultivators etc.)
The best method of determining static weight is by
C. Towed Implements with Heavy Vertical
s ca le we igh in g t he ful ly equ ipp ed trac to r as
Drawbar Loads (Scrapers, Potato and Beet
described in this manual.
Harvesters, Planters, Grain Carts etc.)
188
Using Weights To Ballast
3 3
1
MA00A013
1. FRONT WEIGHTS 2. REAR WEIGHTS 3. WHEEL WEIGHTS
Front end weights, rear end weights or wheel

weights can be used to ballast your tractor. Local
operating conditions will determine the amount of
ballast needed for maximum operating efficiency
and tractor field performance. Inadequate traction
and excessive wheel slip can waste up to thirty
percent of the tractors horsepower. A good ballast
weight for your tractor is the weight needed to
maintain 5 to 8 percent wheel slip for radial tires and
2 to 5 percent for tractors equipped with tracks in
average field conditions. Ballast to maintain the
desired weight split ratio for the work application.
For example, if the desired split ratio is 60/40 MK99J254
percent (hitch work) and 4400 lb. (1814 kg) of GROUND SPEED SENSOR
weight is to be added, the 60/40 percent static ratio
must be maintained. DO NOT exceed the maximum
tractor operating weight.
Determine the amount of wheel slip as follows:
1. With True Ground Speed Sensor - see Wheel
Slip Indicator for more information.
2. Without True Ground Speed - see Measuring
Wheel Slip for more information.
IMPORTANT: Do not add more weight than is

necessar y to achieve the correct static weight
distribution and the correct amount of wheel slip.
189
Measuring Wheel Slip Without True Ground Speed Sensor

If the tractor is not equipped with a true ground speed sensor, measure the amount of wheel slip as follows:
1. Put a reference mark on the side of the tractor rear tire.
2. Operate the tractor with the implement in the ground.
3. While the tractor is moving put a marker on the ground, outside the implement width, where the reference mark
on the tire comes down to the ground.
4. Continue to move along with the tractor and count ten wheel revolutions. Put a second marker on the ground
outside the implement width, where the reference mark on the tire comes down to the ground for the tenth time.
5. Lift the implement out of the ground. Put the tractor in position and put a new reference mark on the rear tire
aligned with the first ground marker.
6. Operate the tractor, with the implement raised, from the first ground marker to the second ground marker.
Count the number of wheel revolutions between the two ground markers.
7. Find the percent of slip as follows:
Revolutions of wheel with implement out of the ground slip (%)

9-1/2........................................................................................................................... 5
9 ............................................................................................................................... 10
8-1/2......................................................................................................................... 15
8 ............................................................................................................................... 20
7-1/2......................................................................................................................... 25
7 ............................................................................................................................... 30
NOTE: When too much ballast is installed on the tractor, you will see the clear shape of the tire tread in the ground
which is an indication of no slippage. With too little ballast, the tire tread marks will not show because of the tire
slippage.
TOO MUCH BALLAST CORRECT BALLAST TOO LITTLE BALLAST

382L9
The ideal wheel slip percentage range is 5 to 8 If wheel slip is excessive add weight in the proper
percent for radial tires. If average wheel slip is distribution ratio. Add no more weight than is required
measured within this range at the desired travel to pull the load at the desired working speed within
speed, no weight is required. If average wheel slip the recommended wheel slip range.
measures less than the minimum recommended
percentage of slip, remove weight.
190
Front Ballast
When fully or semi-mounted rear hitch attachments The combined static weight of the front attachment
or implements with heavy vertical drawbar loads are and the rear ballast must not exceed the maximum
used, it may be desirable to add ballast to the front to gross warranted weight.
maintain stability and balance. DO NOT add ballast
to the rear axle when using fully or semi-mounted
rear attachments.
Liquid Ballast
The combined static weight of the tractor and the Radial tires do not have tubes installed. DO NOT use
front ballast must not exceed the maximum gross fluid in tires as ballast. Fluid in tir es causes
operating weight. accelerated rust and corrosion on wheels. Any
damage caused from the use of liquid ballast will not
Rear Ballast be covered by warranty.
Cast iron weights are the only approved method of
When using front mounted attachments it may be ballasting your tractor.
necessary to add ballast to the rear only to provide
stability and balance. Add only the weight to the rear
required to achieve approximately 50 percent of the
total static weight on each axle.
191
FRONT AND REAR SUITCASE WEIGHTS
Front Frame Weights

Front suitcase weights can be mounted on the front
of the tractor with a weight hanger. A maximum of 18
cast suitcase weights at 45 kg (100 lb.) each can be
installed, depending on the application, tractor static
weight ratio and soil conditions.
MA00H050
The suitcase weight hanger (1) is supplied with a

9-weight inser t (2). The entire weight hanger
assembly is designed to be removed from the
tractor as one complete assembly using a forklift in
the slots (3) and removing 3 bolts from each side of
the belly pan.
Reference the front suitcase weight illustrations on

the following page for the various installation
arrangements of the front suitcase weights, tie bolt
installation and the location of the weight clamps. 1
Tighten the tie bolts evenly to a final torque of 2
170-237 Nm (125-175 lb. ft.).
NOTE: When front suitcase weights are installed, a

minimum of four weights per side must be used.
MA01D061
1. SUITCASE WEIGHT HANGER 3. SLOTS
2. 9-WEIGHT INSERT
192
Front Suitcase Weight, Tie Bolt and Clamp Installation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 SUITCASE WEIGHTS PER SIDE 8 SUITCASE WEIGHTS PER SIDE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
MS00H060
193
When using front suitcase weights, install the

required weights on the inser t star ting from the
outboard end of the insert. If it becomes necessary to
remove some suitcase weights, remove weights from
the inboard end of the insert. Each suitcase weight
interlocks with each other. The maximum number of
front suitcase weights that can be installed is 18.
Assembly weight:
Front Hanger = 294 kg (648 lb.) WITH 18 SUITCASE WEIGHTS
Hanger + 18 suitcases = 1191 kg (2626 lb.)
Because of the distance the front weight frame

assembly is mounted ahead of the front axle, if you
put 272 kg (600 lbs) of weights on the front only, the
front axle weight INCREASES 455 kg (1000 lbs) and
the rear axle weight will DECREASE.
NOTE: The use of front suitcase weights can be

useful in reducing rear axle weight on some tractor WITH 12 SUITCASE WEIGHTS
models equipped with hitch and PTO to help
MA01D059
maintain the recommended 60/40 weight distribution
ratio for hitch work without exceeding the maximum
operating weight. See Maximum Recommended
Operating Weight.
Rear Frame Weights

Rear suitcase weights can be mounted on the rear of
the tractor with a weight frame. Rear suitcase
weights cannot be used if the tractor is equipped with
a three point hitch.
A maximum of 14 suitcase weights at 45 kg (100 lb.)
each can be installed depending on implement 1
application, front mounted equipment, tractor static
weight split and soil conditions.
Assembly weight:
Weight frame = 468 kg (1032 lb.)
Frame + 14 suitcase weights = 1166 kg (2571 lb.)
The entire weight assembly can be removed from the
tractor by removing 2 bolts and using an overhead
hoist attached to the lifting bracket rear hole (1) on
each side. See your dealer for more information.
IMPORTANT: Total tractor static weight with all

equipment and ballast must never be more than the
recommended operating weight. See Maximum
Recommended Operating Weight.
MA00A011
194
WHEEL WEIGHTS
D C B A A B C D
MA00A012
When operating in the Auto mode it will be displayed 3. Bolts for mounting 500 lb. (227 kg) wheel weights
on the programmable display screen in place of the must pass through the hole in the weight first,
PTO display. The hour meter in the bottom half of the wheel second except when a 500 lb. (227 kg)
display is visible at all times. weight is mounted opposite another 500 lb. (227
kg) weight, then reverse the direction of the bolts
Cast wheel weights are recommended in place of
to allow re-torque of the nuts.
fluid filled tires. Cast wheel weights will allow the tire
to flex with the contour of the ground increasing tire 4. 1000 lb. (454 kg) wheel weights assemble only to
contact area, reducing compaction and providing a the concave side of the wheel.
smoother ride. Cast wheel weights will not increase
5. Bolts for mounting 1000 lb. (454 kg) wheel
rolling resistance due to internal friction (as fluid will),
weights must pass through the rim first, weight
this will increase the efficiency of your tractor. Wheel
second to allow re-torque of the nuts.
weights are available in 227 kg (500 lb.) and 454 kg
(1000 lb.) weights. 6. Maintain a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches)
clearance between wheel weight and tractor
Several points should be noted when installing and components.
using wheel weights (see diagram):
NOTE: 1000 lb. (454 kg) weights cannot be used on
1. 500 lb. (227 kg) weights can be assembled to
the inside of inner wheel (location A) set for 30 inch
either side of the wheel (locations -A through
(762 mm) tread setting.
location - D) or on top of another 500 lb. (227 kg)
wheel weight. A maximum of two - 500 lb. (227
IMPORTANT: The maximum weight per wheel is
kg) weights can be bolted together on the same
1500 lb. (680 Kg). Never exceed the maximum
side of the wheel.
recommended operating weight for your tractor.
2. Always assemble wheel weight mass as close to
the tractor frame as possible. Fill location A first,
B second, C third and D last.
WHEEL WEIGHT BOLT TORQUE

M16 Grade 10.9 Bolts/Nuts ........................................................................................ 270 to 350 Nm (200-260 ft. lb.)
NOTE: Lubricate bolt threads lightly with SAE 10W-30 oil.
IMPORTANT: After initial wheel weight installation, drive the tractor slowly in reverse a minimum of 100 ft. (305
Km) while using several LIGHT brake applications. Re-torque bolts to specifications. Recheck the bolt torque every
10 hours thereafter until the bolt torque stabilizes.
195
TIRE AND RIM SERVICE

Tire and Rim Repair
Always have a qualified tire mechanic service the
WARNING: Do not remove, install or make tires and rims on this machine. If the tire has lost all
repairs to a tire on a rim. If required, the tire and air pressure, take the tire and rim to a tire shop for
wheel rim should be removed from the machine service. The use of correct equipment and correct
by a qualified field tire technician with the pr ocedures will prevent accidents. Explosive
proper equipment. If required, the field separation of the tire can cause serious injury.
technician should take the tire and wheel rim to
a tire shop where persons with special training
! and special safety tools are available. If the tire
WARNING: DO NOT weld to wheel or rim
when a tire is installed. Welding will cause an
is not in correct position on the rim, or if too full
explosive air/gas mixture that will be ignited
of air, the tire bead can loosen on one side and
with high temperatures. This can happen to
cause air to leak at high speed and with large
force. Because the air leak can thrust the tire in
! tires inflated or deflated. Removing air or
breaking beads is not adequate. Tire MUST be
any direction, and with much force, you will be
completely removed from the rim prior to
in danger of injury. M169C
welding. SB134
Tire Installation
To get the traction and cleaning action of the lugs, the
tires must be installed on the wheels so the tread is
turning as shown. DO NOT try to remove, repair or
install a tractor tire on a rim. This should be done by
a qualified technician.
NOTE: Radial tires do not have tubes installed.
385L9
Tire Inflation Procedure

Use the safe tire inflation procedure specified below DO NOT inflate a tire that has had a complete loss of
to add air to a tire. See Tire and Rim Service for air. If the tire has lost all air pressure, have a qualified
instructions on recommended tire maintenance and tire mechanic service the tire.
tire or rim repair. To ADD air to a partly inflated tire, use the following
procedure:
WARNING: A tire can explode during inflation 1. Use an air hose with a remote shutoff valve and
and cause serious injury or death. Never a self-locking air chuck.
increase air pressure beyond 35 PSI to seat the 2. Stand behind the tread of the tire and make sure
bead on the rim. Replace a tire if it has a defect. all persons are away from the side of the tire
Replace a wheel rim which has cracks, wear or
! severe rust. Make sure that all the air is
before you start to add air.
removed from a tire before removing the tire Inflate the tire to the recommended air pressure. DO
from the rim. Never use force on an inflated or NOT inflate the tire more than the recommended
partially inflated tire. Make sure the tire is pressure.
correctly seated before inflation. M170A
196
Tire Inflation Specifications

For normal tractor operation and maximum tractor
perfor manc e, always inflate the ti res to the
pressures recommended in the tire pressure chart.
The inflation pressures are based on cold inflation
pressure recommendations by Tire and Rim
Association Inc. Use the Tire and Load Inflation Maximum
Charts to match the tire pressure to the tractor Pressure
Minimum
weight. Load
Do not use the severe service recommendations for

normal working conditions.
Example “A” shows the cross section of a tire

inflated for maximum load but with a minimum load MS95K025
on the tire. The tire tread is not making full contact
Example A
with the ground which will give poor performance.
Example “B” shows the cross section of a radial tire

with the inflated pressure correctly adjusted to the
load on the tire. The tire tread is making full contact
with the ground which will give maximum
performance.
Pressure
Adjusted to
Axle Load
MS95K025
Example B
Radial Tires
Radial tires achieve their high level of tractive The common practice of over inflating radial tires can
perfor mance because of a large contact area contribute to poor performance, tire wear, ride quality
between the rubber and the soil. To maintain this and power hop. A radial tire can be inflated to
large contact area it will be important to use the suppor t a wide range of loads as shown in the
correct inflation pressure to support the load carried inflation tables. For example, the 20.8 R38 tires used
by the tire. Load on the tires will change as a result of as duals, support approximately 3730 lb. (1695 kg) of
weight transfer under pull. The effect of this weight static load when inflated to 8 PSI (55 kPa) but will
transfer is accounted for in the Radial Tire and Load support 7080 lb. (3218 kPa) when inflated to 24 PSI
Capacity Chart. (165 kPa). In both cases, the tire sidewall deflects
approximately the same amount and the soil contact
These tables list radial tire pressures much lower length and area on the ground are the same. When
than those previously recommended for the various properly inflated, sidewall bulge (example B) in a
type of operating conditions. radial tire is normal and is referred to as “Rated
Deflection” of the tire.
197
Check Tire Air Pressure

Radial tires do not have tubes installed. Because of Some hitch mounted implements (such as rippers) or
the lower operating pressures, it will be ver y towed implements that place a heavy vertical load on
important to use an accurate digital or dial type tire the drawbar (scrapers, planters, etc.), and front
pressure gauge with 1 PSI (10 kPa) graduations. mounted dozer blades, chemical tanks etc. add static
Check the tire inflation pressures at least every 250 weight to the tractor and must be considered when
hours (or one time per month) or whenever loads or adjusting tire inflation pressures according to the
operations change. Check the condition of the tires inflation charts.
and rims for wear or damage. Check pressures
before operating when the tires are cool. See Tire The best method to determine the static axle load
P r e s s u r e a n d L o a d C a p a c i t y C h a r t s fo r under these conditions is to scale weigh the tractor.
recommended load inflation pressure for each tire Use the following procedure to weigh the tractor on a
size and type. Never exceed the maximum tire load scale to determine correct tire pressure.
rating.
1. Front axle weight with rear implement
LOWERED or, front axle weight with front
NOTE: The inflation tables for tires recommends the
implement RAISED.
same inflation pressure for outer tires as the inner tire
pressure. 2. Rear axle weight with rear implement RAISED,
o r r e a r a x l e we i g h t wi t h f r o n t i m p l e m e n t
Tractors used in steep hillside or plow furrow LOWERED.
operations should use inflation pressures 2 to 4 PSI
(14 to 28 kPa) above the pressures listed in the NOTE: If scale weighing is not possible, estimate the
inflation tables to compensate for lateral weight additional implement weight or use the weight stated
transfer. in the implement operator’s manual.
198
TIRE PRESSURE FOR MAXIMUM TIRE LOAD AT RATED INFLATION

To reach the best tire pressure and load capacity, scale weigh the front and rear axle of the tractor.
Determine proper ballast weight split.

60% Front/40% Rear - Tractor used with hitch mounted implements.
55% Front/45% Rear - Tractor used with drawbar towed high draft implement.
65% Front/35% Rear - Tractor used with high vertical drawbar loads.
See Tractor Ballast information for additional information.
Determine correct static load distribution and tire pressure from chart.
Example: Tractor used with standard drawbar implements, 18.4R-42 dual tires and a full tank of fuel. Desired
weight split = 55% Front/45% Rear.
Front Weight of Tractor = 14 000 lb. (6350 kg)
Rear Weight of Tractor = 9392 lb. (4260 kg)
Total Weight of Tractor = 23 392 lb. (10 610 kg)
Determine weight distribution by dividing front and rear weight by total weight.
Tractor Weight Distribution = 59.8% Front Axle
40.2% Rear Axle
Adjust the weight distribution by adding 2000 lb. (907 kg) weight to the rear wheels.
Adjusted Weight:
Front Weight = 14 000 lb. (6350 kg)
Rear Weight = 11 392 lb. (5167 kg)
Total Weight = 25 392 lb. (11 517 kg)
Total Weight Distribution = 55.1% Front Axle 44.9% Rear Axle
Front Static Load - Weight divided by number of tires.

14 000 lb./4 = 3500 lb.
(6350 kg/4 = 1588 kg)
From Chart: 18.4R-42 Dual Tires - 3500 lb. = 9 PSI (1588 kg = 62 kPa)
Rear Static Load - Weight divided by number of tires.

11 392 lb./4 = 2848 lb.
(5167 kg/4 = 1292 kg)
From Chart = 18.4R-42 Dual Tires - 2848 lb. = 7 PSI (1292 kg = 48 kPa
199
CONVENTIONAL SIZE RADIAL TIRE PRESSURE AND LOAD CAPACITY CHART

U.S. STANDARD - 25 MPH Travel Speeds
Inflation- PSI 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
Tire Size Wheels lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs
14.9R46 D 2000 2170 2360 2490 2710 3010 3290 3480 3780 4000 4220 4470
18.4R42 S 3080 3420 3740 3960 4180 4680 5080 5520 6000 6400 6600 6950
D 2710 3010 3290 3480 3680 4120 4470 4860 5280 5630 5810 6120
18.4R46 S 3300 3640 3860 4180 4400 4940 5360 5840 6150 6600 6950 7400
D 2900 3200 3400 3680 3870 4350 4720 5140 5410 5810 6120 6510
T 2710 2980 3170 3430 3610 4050 4400 4790 5040 5410 5700 6070
20.8R38 S 3640 3960 4300 4540 4800 5360 5840 6400 6800 7150 7600 8050
D 3200 3480 3780 4000 4220 4720 5140 5630 5980 6290 6690 7080
20.8R42 S 3740 4180 4540 4800 5080 5680 6150 6800 7150 7600 8050 8550
D 3290 3680 4000 4220 4470 5000 5410 5980 6290 6690 7080 7520
T 3070 3430 3720 3940 4120 4660 5040 5580 5960 6230 6600 7010
METRIC- 40 KPH Travel Speeds
Tire Inflation (kPa) 40 50 55 60 70 80 100 110 120 140 150 160
Inflation (bar) 0.4 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.6
Tire Size Wheels Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg
14.9R46 D 905 985 1070 1130 1230 1365 1495 1585 1715 1815 1920 2025
18.4R42 S 1400 1550 1700 1800 1900 2120 2300 2500 2725 2900 3000 3150
D 1230 1365 1495 1585 1670 1865 2025 2200 2400 2550 2640 2770
18.4R46 S 1500 1650 1750 1900 2000 2240 2430 2650 2800 3000 3150 3350
D 1320 1450 1540 1670 1760 1970 2140 2330 2465 2640 2770 2950
T 1230 1355 1435 1560 1640 1835 1995 2175 2295 2460 2585 2745
20.8R38 S 1650 1800 1950 2060 2180 2430 2650 2900 3075 3250 3450 3650
D 1450 1585 1715 1815 1920 2140 2330 2550 2705 2860 3035 3210
20.8R42 S 1700 1900 2060 2180 2300 2575 2800 3075 3250 3450 2650 2875
D 1495 1670 1850 1920 2025 2265 2465 2705 2860 3035 3210 3410
T 1395 1560 1690 1790 1885 2110 2295 2520 2665 2830 2995 3180
BIAS PLY TIRE PRESSURE AND LOAD CAPACITY CHART

Trelleborg Tires - 20 MPH (Kg)
Wheels
KPA 48 62 69 83 90 103 118
Tire Size
PSI 7 9 10 12 13 15 17
710/65 x 38 D 5916 6228 6810 7368 8394 8868 9898
8 Ply (2680) (2821) (3085) (3338) (3802) (4017) (4484)
750/65 x 38 D 6007 6677 7312 7903 8468 9004 10940
8 Ply (2721) (3025) (3312) (3580) (3836) (4079) (4956)
850/55 x 42 D 6603 7338 8038 8691
(2991) (3324) (3641) (3937)
Firestone Tires - 20 MPH (Kg)
Wheels
180
KPA 80 100 110 120 140 150 170
Tire Size 26
PSI 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
30.5L x 32 S 6950 7600 8250 8800 9350 9900 10500 11000
(3150) (3450) (3750) (4000) (4250) (4500) (4750) (5000)
35.5L x 32 S 9350 10200 11000 11700 12880 13200 13900 14800
(4250) (4625) (5000) (5300) (5800) (6000) (6300) (6700)
200
METRIC SIZE RADIAL TIRE PRESSURE AND LOAD CAPACITY CHART

U.S. STANDARD - 30 MPH Travel Speeds
Inflation- PSI 6 7 9 10 12 13 15 17 20 23 26 29
Tire Size Wheels lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs
380/90R54 D N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
420/80R46 D 2560 2820 3100 3400 3590 3870 4120 4580 5140 5630 5980 6120
480/80R42 D 3010 3290 3590 3870 4220 4580 4860 5410 6120 6690 N/A N/A
480/80R46 S 3640 3960 4300 4680 5080 5360 5680 6400 7150 7850 8250 8550
D 3200 3480 3780 4120 4470 4720 5000 5630 6290 6910 7260 7520
520/85R38 S 3860 4300 4680 5080 5520 5840 6150 6950 7850 8550 N/A N/A
D 3400 3780 4120 4470 4860 5140 5410 6120 6910 7520 N/A N/A
520/85R42 S 4080 4540 4940 5360 5680 6150 6600 7400 8250 9100 N/A N/A
D 3590 4000 4350 4720 5000 5410 5810 6510 7260 8010 N/A N/A
520/85R46 S 4300 4680 5080 5520 6000 6400 6800 7600 8550 9350 N/A N/A
D 3780 4120 4470 4860 5280 5630 5980 6690 7520 8230 N/A N/A
620/70R42 S 4540 4940 5360 5840 6400 6800 7150 8050 9100 9900 N/A N/A
D 4000 4350 4720 5140 5630 5980 6290 7080 8010 8710 N/A N/A
650/85R38 S NR NR 6600 7150 7850 8250 8800 9900 11000 12000 12800 13200
710/70R38 S NR NR 6400 6950 7400 8050 8550 9650 10700 11700
710/70R42 S NR NR 6600 7150 7850 8250 8800 9900 11000 12300 N/A N/A
800/70R38 S NR NR 7600 8250 9100 9650 10200 11700 12800 14300
900/50R42 S NR NR 6800 7400 7850 8550 9100 10200 11400 12300 N/A N/A
METRIC - 50 KPH Travel Speeds
Tire Inflation (kPa) 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 140 160 180 200
Inflation (bar) 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
Tire Size Wheels Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg Kg
380/90R54 D N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
420/80R46 D 1160 1275 1410 1540 1630 1760 1865 2140 2330 2550 2860 3035
480/80R42 D 1365 1495 1630 1760 1920 2075 2200 2465 2770 3035 N/A N/A
480/80R46 S 1650 1800 1950 2120 2300 2430 2575 2900 3250 3550 3750 3875
D 1450 1585 1715 1865 2025 2140 2265 2550 2860 3125 3300 3410
520/85R38 S 1750 1950 2120 2300 2500 2650 2800 3150 3550 3875 N/A N/A
D 1540 1715 1865 2025 2200 2330 2465 2770 3125 3410 N/A N/A
520/85R42 S 1850 2060 2240 2430 2575 2800 3000 3350 3750 4125 N/A N/A
D 1630 1815 1970 2140 2265 2465 2640 2950 3300 3630 N/A N/A
520/85R46 S 1900 2120 2300 2500 2725 2900 3075 3450 3875 4250 N/A N/A
D 1715 1865 2025 2200 2400 2550 2705 3035 3410 3740 N/A N/A
620/70R42 S 2060 2240 2430 2650 2900 3075 3250 3650 4125 4500 N/A N/A
D 1815 1970 2140 2330 2550 2705 2860 3210 3630 3960 N/A N/A
650/85R38 S NR NR 3000 3250 3550 3750 4000 4500 5000 5450 5800 6000
710/70R38 S NR NR 2900 3150 3350 3650 3875 4375 4875 5300
710/70R42 S NR NR 3000 3250 3550 3750 4000 4500 5000 5600 N/A N/A
800/70R38 S NR NR 3450 3750 4125 4375 4625 5300 5800 6500
900/50R42 S NR NR 3075 3350 3550 3875 4125 4625 5150 5600 N/A N/A
S = Singles D = Duals N/A = Not Available N/R = Not Recommended

NOTE: When using front frame mounted equipment or liquid tanks, remove all ballast from the front axle. Only the
dual tires listed in the charts have sufficient capacity to run at maximum weight.
201
WHEEL BOLT TORQUES

Bushing to Hub Bolts (See Note 1).................................................................................220-260 lb. ft. (300-350 Nm)
Wheel to Hub Bolts (See Note 2) ...................................................................................390-420 lb. ft. (530-570 Nm)
Spacer to Hub Bolts (See Note 2) ..................................................................................390-420 lb. ft. (530-570 Nm)
Wheel to Spacer Bolts (See Note 2)...............................................................................390-420 lb. ft. (530-570 Nm)
Dual Hub Outer Disc to Wheel (See Note 2) ..................................................................180-200 lb. ft. (245-271 Nm)
NOTE 1: Apply antisieze grease to the threads. Do not exceed 260 lb. ft. (350 Nm).
NOTE 2: Lubricate threads lightly with SAE 10W-30 engine oil.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT exceed the maximum specified wet torque values listed. Check the torque of all bolts after
the first 30 minutes of operation and every 10 hours of operation until the bolt torque stabilizes.
Wheel Offset Direction Change

If you need to change the direction of the wheel
offset (in or out), remove the tire and wheel from
one side of the tractor and mount on the other side
of tractor.
IMPORTANT: Do not use lubricant between the

bushing and the axle.
MT07F106
Tighten all wheel and/or hub bolts to the specified

wet torque value in the bolt sequence shown
whenever wheels and/or hubs are removed. If the
bushing is separated from the hub, apply antiseize
grease on the entire tapered surface of the bushing
before assembly into the hub.
RH97K069
202
Special Wheel Bolt Wrenches (Wheel Tractors)

Special offset wrenches are available for retorquing
the 30 mm hex head bushing bolts 32 mm hex head
spacer bolts, and the 34 mm hex head wheel bolts
when duals are installed and wheel spacing is close.
Contact your dealer for more information.
P/N CAS2725 for 30 mm hex head bushing bolts

P/N 380000518 for 32 mm hex head spacer bolts
P/N CAS2726 for 34 mm hex head wheel bolts
MK00C283
Dual Wheel Installation

When dual wheels are used, the inner wheel can be installed with the concave face IN and the outer wheel with the
concave face OUT. See Tire Tread Positions in this manual for dual tread settings.
Check the torque of all bolts after 30 minutes of operation. Check after every 10 hours of operation until the bolt
torque stabilize. See Special Wheel Bolt Wrench.
Tapered Bushing Hub

Use the following procedure to change the tread
settings:
1. Park the tractor on a solid, level surface so the
axle keyway is on top. Lift the tractor until the
1 1
wheels clears the ground. Put supports under
the axle or frame.
WARNING: Using a single point jack under

the center of the axle housing can cause the
axle housing to break and the tractor to fall. 1 1
! Failure to comply may result in machine
damage, death or serious injury.** 1 1
M1217 RD97J002
2. Remove all paint, dirt and rust from the axle.
NOTE: Put the wheel in a sling support to prevent

the wheel from tipping.
3. Loosen three alternate bushing bolts (1) 6 to 7
turns (6.4 mm) and remove the three remaining
bolts.
203
4. Clean the bolt threads and the threads in the jack

holes (2). Oil both the jack hole threads and the
bolt threads. 2
5. Install three of the bushing bolts into the
threaded jack holes. Tighten the three bolts
alternately and evenly in small increments to 2
break the bushing loose from the hub.
6. Install a wedge in the slot (3) of the bushing and
put only enough force on the wedge so you can
slide the bushing on the axle. Slide the wheel 2
assembly to the needed position.
3
NOTE: There is a large snap ring located in a groove RD97J003
on the end of the axle shaft (not shown) that must be

removed if tapered hub removal is required. Be sure
this snap ring is installed before tractor operation.
IMPORTANT: Do not use lubricant between the
bushing and the axle. Be sure tread setting allows 2
inch (50 mm) tire clearance to all tractor components.
7. Remove the three bushing bolts from the jack
holes and reinstall into the bushing through
holes.
NOTE: Lubricate the bolt threads with antisieze
grease.
8. Tighten the six bushing bolts evenly in intervals
of 50 lb. ft. (68 Nm) until the bolts will maintain a
torque of 220 to 260 lb. ft. (300 to 350 Nm).
Fol low th e tor qu e s equen ce sh ow n whe n
torquing the bolts. If necessar y to hold the
specified torque, tighten each bolt several times
after reaching the specified torque.
MT07F106
IMPORTANT: At no time during tightening is the
torque to be more than 260 lb. ft (350 Nm).
204
Dual Hub Wheel Removal (385, 425,

485 and 535 option) 2
The dual hub with 76 x 50-32 tire can be installed in
one position on the axle. The procedure for removing 2
the wheel and tire are as follows:
1. Park the tractor on a solid, level surface so the
axle keyway is on top. Lift the tractor until the 1
wheels clears the ground. Put supports under
the axle or frame.
3
2
WARNING: Using a single point jack under
the center of the axle housing can cause the MT07F110
axle housing to break and the tractor to fall.

! Failure to comply may result in machine
damage, death or serious injury.**
M1217
4
2. Remove all paint, dirt and rust from the axle.
NOTE: Put the wheel in a sling support to prevent the
wheel from tipping.
3. Remove the external snap ring from the axle.
The snap ring is accessible inside the cavity (1)
in the hub bushing. 6 5
4. Loosen three alternate bushing bolts (2) 6 to 7
turns (6.4 mm) and remove the three remaining
bolts.
5. Clean the bolt threads and the threads in the jack
MT07f112
holes. Oil both the jack hole threads and the bolt
threads.
6. Install three of the bushing bolts into the
threaded jack holes. Tighten the three bolts
alternately and evenly in small increments to
break the bushing loose from the hub.
7. Install a wedge in the slot (3) of the bushing and
put only enough force on the wedge so you can
slide the bushing on the axle.
8. Remove the outer disc mounting bolts (4),
remove the disc (5) hub (6) assembly.
9. Remove the inner wheel mounting bolts (7) and
remove the wheel from the inner hub.
7
MT07F106
NOTE: Do not loosen or move the inner hub. The
position set when the wheel was installed is critical
for tire clearance and installing the outer hub.
205
Dual Hub Wheel Installation (385, 435, 485 and 535 Option)
1. Lubricate the mounting bolts (1) with clean SAE 1

10-30 engine oil and install the wheel on the
inner hub. Tighten the bolts (1) evenly and in the
s e q u e n c e s h own b e l ow t o 3 9 0 - 4 2 0 l b f t .
(530-570 Nm).
2. Drive the tractor in a tight figure 8 pattern four
times.
3. Retighten the bolts to the specified torque.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the bolts maintain the
specified torque.
mt07f110
5. Install the outer hub (2) and disc (3) assembly on

the axle. align the locating hole on the mounting
3
ring near the valve. 4
6. Install the outer disc mounting bolts (4). Tighten
the bolts (4) evenly and in a crossing pattern to
180-200 lb ft (245-271 Nm). 6
7
7. Remove the wedge from slot (5) in the bushing
and slide the bushing (6) into the hub (2) until the 2
external snap ring can be installed on the axle.
8. Tighten the bushing bolts (7) evenly and in the
5
sequence shown to 220-260 lb ft (300-350 Nm).
MT07F112
9. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the bolts maintain the

specified torque.
MT07F106
206
Wheel Tread Setting - Singles (335)

This chart shows the available adjustment range of a CENTER OF TIRE
single tire. Maximum single wheel tread width
(measured at center of tire) must not exceed 98
inches (2490 mm) for standard axles with a 4 inch
(102 mm) bar diameter. DO NOT exceed single tire
load capacity.
CENTER OF
TRACTOR
1 INCH (25 mm)

MINIMUM CLEARANCE
AXLE HOUSING TO HUB
WHEEL TURNED IN
RT97H049
CENTER OF TIRE
CENTER OF
TRACTOR
1 INCH (25 mm)

MINIMUM CLEARANCE
AXLE HOUSING TO HUB
WHEEL TURNED OUT
RT98H050
TIRE WHEEL TURNED IN WHEEL TURNED OUT

SIZE MINIMUM-MAXIMUM TREAD WIDTH MINIMUM-MAXIMUM TREAD WIDTH
18.4/480 60 - 96 in (1524 - 2438 mm) 94 - 98 in (2388 - 2489 mm)
20.8/520 69 - 97 in (1753 - 2464 mm) 95 - 98 in (2413 - 2489 mm)
620 73 - 97 in (1854 - 2464 mm) 96 - 98 in (2438 - 2489 mm)
710 76 - 98 in (1930 - 2489 mm) 92 - 98 in (2337 - 2489 mm)
30.5 72 - 98 in (1829 - 2489 mm) 81 - 98 in (2057 - 2489 mm)
900 84 - 98 in (2133 - 2489 mm) 93 - 98 in (2362 - 2489 mm)
DH 35.5 84 - 98 in (2133 - 2489 mm) 89 - 98 in (2260 - 2489 mm)
WARNING: In single wheel operation the tractor can become unstable at

narrow tread setting and high speed. Always use dual wheels front and
! rear for hillside operation and avoid sharp uphill turns.
M300A
207
Articulation Steering Stops (335)

When required (depending on tire size and spacer
equipment) articulation cylinder stops are supplied
with the tractor.
Always articulate and oscillate the tractor in a full

turn after duals or triples have been installed or
wheel spacing changed to verify that the front and
rear wheels will not interfere with each other. Use
articulation cylinder steering stops as required to
prevent tire interference.
RI06H065
When ar ticulation cylinder steering stops are

required, install the clamp on type stops on the rod
end of each steering cylinder.
RI06H066
Articulation Steering Limit

(385/435/485/535)
Steer ing cylinder stops are not us ed to limit
articulation angle on the 385/435/485/535 model
tractors.
If front to rear wheel interference is noted in a full
1 2
turn, the articulation cylinder rod end anchor pins
must be moved from the inner hole (1) to the outer
hole (2) to limit articulation angle. See your dealer for
this service
When articulation cylinders are moved to the outer
hole, two of 403823A1 Articulation Cylinder Locking
Blocks are required.
MA03F075
WARNING: To avoid serious injury or death,
DO NOT attempt to relocate the steering
cylinder rod end pins or work in the center
! hinge area for any reason when the engine is
running.
M
208
Wheel Tread Setting - Duals (385/435/485/535)
Inner Minimum, Dual Range

This chart shows the available adjustment range of a dual tire with the inner tire set to the minimum tread setting.
The maximum dual wheel value can be increased by adding a 5 inch (127 mm), 10 inch (254 mm) or a 13 inch (330
mm) spacer.
CENTER OF TRACTOR
1 INCH (25 mm)

MINIMUM CLEARANCE
AXLE HOUSING TO HUB
INSIDE WHEEL TURNED IN DUAL WHEEL TURNED OUT
RT97H048
TIRE INSIDE WHEEL TURNED IN DUAL WHEEL TURNED OUT

WIDTH MINIMUM TREAD MINIMUM-MAXIMUM TREAD
20.8/520 75 in (1805 mm) 129 in (3327 mm)
620 76 in (1930 mm) 140 in (3556 mm)
650/710/750 79 in (2006 mm) 154 in (3912 mm)
800 83 in (2108 mm) 160 in (4064 mm)
850/900 84 in (2134 mm) 173 in (4394 mm)
A (5) inch, (10) inch or (13) inch spacer is indicated if needed.
SPACER REQUIREMENT
Tire Width Main Dual
20.8/520 N/R N/R
620 N/R 5 inch
650 N/R 10 inch
710/750 N/R 13 inch
800 N/R 5 & 13 inch
850/900 5 inch 10 & 13 inch
IMPORTANT: Check the torque on all bolts after 30 minutes of operation. Check after every 10 hours of operation
until the bolt torques stabilize.
209
Wheel Tread Setting - Duals (335)

Inner Row Set, Dual Range
Use this chart to see the dual tread setting range available if the inner tire is set for a specific row spacing. The
maximum dual value can be increased by adding a 5 inch (127 mm), 10 inch (254 mm) or a 13 inch (330 mm)
spacer.
CENTER OF TRACTOR
1 INCH (25 mm)

MINIMUM CLEARANCE
AXLE HOUSING TO HUB
RT97H048
INNER TREAD SETTING (WHEEL IN)

60 Inch 64 Inch 68 Inch 72 Inch 76 Inch 80 Inch
30 Inch Rows 32 Inch Rows 34 Inch Rows 36 Inch Rows 38 Inch Rows 40 Inch Rows
DUAL TREAD RANGE (MIN TO MAX INCHES, WHEEL OUT)
14.9/380 112-130 116-130 120-130 124-130 120-130 124-130
(2820-3302) (2945-3302) (3050-3302) (3150-3302) (3048-3302) (3150-3302)
***
420 112-130 116-130 120-130 124-130 120-130 124-130
(2820-3302) (2945-3302) (3050-3302) (3150-3302) (3048-3302) (3150-3302)
*** ***
18.4/480 111-129 115-129 119-129 123-129 126-129 130-129
(2819-3277) (2921-3277) (3025-3277) (3125-3277) (3200-3277) (3300-3277)
*** **
***
20.8/520 n/a 115-129 119-129 123-129 127-129 130-129
(2921-3277) (3025-3277) (3125-3277) (3226-3277) (3300-3277)
** **
***
620 n/a n/a 130-131 130-131 (5) 139-141 (5) 143-139
(3302-3327) (3305-3327) (3530-3581) (3630-3531)
** **
***
n/a = Dual Installation not achievable.

A (5) inch, (10) inch or (13) inch spacer is indicated if needed.
** Articulation steering stops required.
*** 5 inch spacer required for main wheel.
210
Inner Row Set, Dual Row Set, Spacer Requirement (335)

This chart is to determine if a dual spacer is required for a specific row spacing with dual tires. Spacers are
available in 5 inch (127 mm), 10 inch (254 mm) or 13 inch (330 mm) lengths.
CENTER OF TRACTOR
1 INCH (25 mm)

MINIMUM CLEARANCE
AXLE HOUSING TO HUB

RT97K045
INSIDE TREAD SETTING (WHEEL TURNED IN) DUAL TREAD SETTING (WHEEL TURNED OUT)
TIRE 60/120 Inch 64/128 Inch 68/136 Inch 72/144 Inch 76/152 Inch 80/160 Inch
WIDTH 30 Inch Rows 32 Inch Rows 34 Inch Rows 36 Inch Rows 38 Inch Rows 40 Inch Rows
SPACER LENGTH REQUIRED FOR DUAL (INCHES)
14.9/380 0 0 5 10 13 5 & 10
** **
420 0 0 5 10 13 5 & 10
** **
18.4/480 0 0 5 10 13 5 & 10
** **
20.8/520 n/a 0 5 10 13 5 & 10
** **
620 n/a n/a 5 10 10 5 & 10
** **
n/a = Tread setting not achievable.
** 5 inch spacer required for main wheel.

211
Wheel Tread Setting (335)
Triple Setup For 30 Inch Rows
1
2
4
5 6
RT97K044
Setup for 14.9 R46 Tires Only

1. 90.5 INCH (2300 mm) = 181 INCH 4. 30 INCH (760 mm) = 60 INCH (1525 mm)
(4600 mm) TREAD SETTING TREAD SETTING
2. 59.5 INCH (1510 mm) = 119 INCH 5. 10 INCH SPACER
(3020 mm) TREAD SETTING
3. CENTER LINE OF TRACTOR 6. 13 INCH SPACER
Triples are approved for use on tractors equipped with optional HD, 4.5 inch (114 mm) diameter bar axles only.
Triples are NOT approved for tractors equipped with standard axles with 4.0 inch (102 mm) diameter bar axles.
212
Triple Wheel Tread Setting (385/435/485/535)
1
2
3
MA00E027
Inside Wheel (3) Dual Wheel (2) Triple Wheel (1)

Tire Size (center to center) (center to center) (center to center)
18.4R46
480/80R46 74 In (1880 mm) 131 In (3327 mm) 188 In (4775 mm)
520/85R46
20.8R42 74 In (1880 mm) 131 In (3327 mm) 188 In (4775 mm)
520/85R42
4. Center line of tractor

5. 28 inch (711 mm) spacer
*Steering Limit Required. Move steering cylinder rod end pin to outer hole.
NOTE: The middle tire can be moved in to 130 inch (3302 mm) and the outside triple moved in to 186 inch (4724
mm) which will not require steering limit.
213
Track Drive Wheel-Idler Bolt Torques

*Drive Wheel Disc Bolts.......................................................................................... 425 to 465 ft. lb. (575 to 630 Nm)
*Idler Wheel Bolts ................................................................................................... 425 to 465 ft. lb. (575 to 630 Nm)
*Lubricated with SAE 10W-30 engine oil
IMPORTANT: Tighten driving wheel and idler wheel bolts after the first 3 hours of operation and every 10 hours
until the correct torque is maintained.
2 3
MT05M014
1. DRIVE WHEEL BOLTS 2. IDLER WHEEL BOLTS
Tighten the wheel bolts alternately and evenly until the bolts will hold the specified torque.
214
SCRAPER OPERATING PROCEDURES
MA98D047 MA98D050
Steiger Series wheel tractors used in drawbar supported scraper operations must have all rear ballast removed.
Use front end weights as required to achieve the recommended 65-35 split. Additional ballast is not recommended
for QUADTRAC tractors.
NOTE: Liquid ballast in tires is NOT recommended for Steiger Series tractors.
Tractors used in scraper applications MUST be equipped with front and rear differential locks. Both differential locks
must be engaged during the scraper loading cycle. Disengage the diff locks BEFORE turning or transporting.
In heavy duty scraper operations always start in 2nd gear.
Load scrapers in 4th, 5th or 6th gear only. Maintain rated engine operating speed during loading by controlling the
depth of cut. Throttle back to 1800 RPM or less BEFORE downshifting from transport speed or descending steep
grades to prevent engine overspeed.
When making multiple passes through the same cut be sure the tractor wheels (tracks) are always within the cut.
To prevent tractor damage in short turning operations, always watch for possible rear wheel or track interference
with the scraper tongue.
Scraper Tractor Operation Guidelines

The following guidelines must be observed for scraper tractors with factory equipped scraper drawbars. All
guidelines must be observed, not one or the other. Violation of these guidelines may void the tractor warranty.
Guidelines:
Vertical Drawbar Load (Max) ...................................................................................................... 20,000 lb. (9060 Kg)
Scraper Size (Max) ...................................................................................................... 18 cu. yards (13.8 cu. meters)
Number Scrapers (Max) ............................................................................................................................................2
Cutting Width for QT (Min)............................................................................................................ 10.5 ft (3.2 meters)
IMPORTANT: Soil density must be considered when filling scrapers to avoid exceeding the maximum drawbar
vertical load.
215
8 - LUBRICATION/FILTERS/FLUID/MAINTENANCE
The following section covers all the lubrication, system capacities, filters,
fluids and maintenance required on the tractor. Park the tractor on level
ground. Remove the key from the switch before performing maintenance.
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Environment
Before you service this machine and before you dispose of old fluids, lubricants and filters always remember the
environment.
DO NOT pour oil or fluids in the ground, down drains or into containers that can leak.
Dispose of all old fluids, lubricants and filters in accordance with local regulations.
Check with your local environment recycling center or your dealer for correct information.
Plastic and Resin Parts

DO NOT use gasoline, paraffin, paint thinner, naptha, etc., when cleaning plastic, e.g.; console, instrument cluster,
monitors and gauges etc.
Use ONLY water, mild soap and a soft cloth when you clean these parts. Using gasoline, paraffin, paint thinner etc.,
will cause discoloration, cracking or deformation of the part being cleaned.
WARNING: To prevent eye injury, always wear goggles or full face

! protection before using compressed air or high pressure washers.
M786
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

ENGINE
Oil Type ............................................................................................................. AKCELA No.1 Multigrade 15W-40
Oil Exchange Capacity with Filter (Approx.)
335 ..................................................................................................................................... 7.3 Gal. (27.4 Liters)
385, 435, 485 ..................................................................................................................... 8.2 Gal. (31.0 Liters)
535 ................................................................................................................................... 13.0 Gal. (49.0 Liters)
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Type ................................................................................................50-50 Water and Ethylene Glycol Mix
Coolant Capacity
335 ................................................................................................................................... 12.7 Gal. (48.0 Liters)
385-435............................................................................................................................... 21 Gal. (79.4 Liters)
485-535............................................................................................................................ 21.2 Gal. (80.0 Liters)
TRANSMISSION
Oil Type ............................................................................................................................ AKCELA Hy-Tran® Ultra
Oil Capacity - with PTO ........................................................................................................ 13.5 Gal. (51.1 Liters)
without PTO................................................................................................... 13.0 Gal. (49.2 Liters)
AXLE/HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Oil Type ............................................................................................................................ AKCELA Hy-Tran® Ultra
Oil Capacity - Reservoir (Approx.)........................................................................................ 25.0 Gal. (95.0 Liters)
Approx. Total System Capacity (See Note)
335 ................................................................................................................................. 63.0 Gal. (238.0 Liters)
385-435-485-535 ........................................................................................................... 71.0 Gal. (269.0 Liters)
QUADTRAC ................................................................................................................... 80.0 Gal. (303.0 Liters)
NOTE: Total System Capacity includes filters, front and rear axle and reservoir. If TPH equipped add 5.0 Gal. (19.0 Liters)
UNDERCARRIAGE IDLER/ROLLER WHEEL HUBS
Idler Hub Oil Capacity and Type (each) .................................................... 15 Fl. oz. (425 g) SAE 50W Engine Oil
Roller Hub Oil Capacity and Type (each) .................................................... 8 Fl. oz. (227 g) SAE 30W Engine Oil
216
ENGINE LUBRICATION
Engine Oil Selection

Case Akcela No. 1 15W-40 Multigrade Engine Oil is recommended for use in your Case Tractor Engine for normal
temperatures. Case Akcela Engine Oil will lubricate your engine correctly under all operating conditions.
If Case No. 1 Multi-Viscosity Oil is not available, use only engine oil meeting API Service Classification CI-4 that
meets or exceeds Cummins Engineering Specifications 20078.
NOTE: Do not use low ash API CJ-4 engine oil unless used with ultra-low sulfur diesel (less than 15 parts per
million).
NOTE: Do not put Performance Additives or other oil additive products in the engine oil. The oil change intervals
given in this manual are according to tests with Case lubricants. Oil change intervals must be reduced to 250 hours
or less if CI-4 oil is not used.
RH04F059 RR04F001
Synthetic Lubricants
Synthetic lubricants are available for your machine. Synthetics are used just as you would use mineral-based
lubricants.
IMPORTANT: The use of synthetic oils does NOT permit extension of recommended service intervals. All
synthetic oils must meet or exceed the API service requirements.
Engine Oil Viscosity/Temperature Usage Recommendation

See the chart below for recommended viscosity at ambient air temperature ranges.
RR05N002
217
Engine Coolant Solutions
WARNING: Check and service cooling system according to the maintenance

instructions. Hot coolant can spray out if deaeration tank cap is removed while system is
! hot. To remove the deaeration tank cap, let system cool, turn to first notch, then wait until
all pressure is released. Scalding can result from fast removal of deaeration tank cap.
R141C
Case recommends the use of fully formulated antifreeze or coolant containing a pre-charge of Supplemental
Coolant Additive (SCA). The antifreeze or coolant MUST meet the specifications outlined in TMC RP329 (ethylene
glycol) or RP330 (propylene glycol). The use of fully formulated antifreeze or coolant greatly simplifies cooling
system maintenance.
NOTE: Copies of the TMC specifications can be obtained through Cummins Engine Company, Inc.
Fully formulated ANTIFREEZE contains balanced amounts of antifreeze, SCA and buffering compounds, but does
NOT contain 50% water. Fully formulated COOLANT contains balanced amounts of antifreeze, SCA and buffering
compounds already premixed 50/50 with deionized water.
COMPLEAT™ engine coolant is premixed with ethylene or propylene antifreeze, deionized water and SCA in
proper proportions available in one-gallon containers. When using this premix coolant, no extra dilution or mixing is
required. However, periodic testing must be done to ensure SCA levels are within the recommended range. See
SCA Service Requirements in this manual.
Antifreeze must be used in any climate for both freezing and boiling point protection. Case recommends a 50%
concentration level of ethylene glycol or propylene glycol in most climates. Ethylene and propylene glycol can be
mixed if necessary.
IMPORTANT: You must check the concentration level using a refractometer. Both propylene and ethylene glycol
protection levels (or a mixture of both) can be measured with the refractometer. Do NOT use a floating ball
hydrometer. Using floating ball hydrometers can give incorrect readings.
Do NOT use sealing additives in the cooling system. The use of sealing additives will build up in coolant low flow
areas, clog coolant filters, and plug radiators and coolers. Do NOT install any additives or inhibitors that are not
approved.
Change the coolant solution at the change interval recommended. The heat generated by the diesel engine causes
a natural change in the inhibitors in the coolant which results in loss of protection.
Coolant loss can lead to dilution of corrosion and liner-pitting protection due to incorrect top-off practices. The
top-off process is simplified by the use of fully formulated antifreezes and coolants because SCA addition is not
required. Even small leaks at the hose clamps, radiator cores, cylinder head gaskets, and water pumps result in
significant coolant loss over time. Dilution of cooling system protection is avoided, regardless of the amount of
coolant loss, by using fully formulated coolant for system top-off.
Cooling System
The cooling system dearearation tank is located 1
under the hood on the top of the engine.
1. Pressure Cap
MT05M135
218
8 - LUBRICATION/FILTERS/FLUIDS/MAINTENANCE
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART

N FREQUENCY IN HOURS
O
C G
C H C R D
O
L A H E R
F
E N E A A
P
A G C S I
O
N E K E N
I
N
SERVICE POINTS T
S
Engine Oil Level 1 10
Hydraulic/Axle Oil Level 1 10
Transmission Oil Level 1 10
Engine Coolant Level 1 10
Fuel Level 1 10
General Tractor Inspection (See Note 1) 10
Articulation Hinge - Upper - Front 1 50
Oscillation Hinge - Rear 1 50
Articulation Hinge - Lower 1 50
Articulation Cylinder - Front - LH and RH 2 50
Articulation Cylinder - Rear - LH and RH 2 50
Water Trap - Fuel Tank and Fuel Filter (See Note 7) 2 50
Hitch Cylinder Pin - Upper - LH and RH 2 50
Hitch Cylinder Pin - Lower - LH and RH 2 50
Hitch Rockshaft - LH and RH 4 50
Hitch Lift Links and Top Link 12 50
Driveshaft Carrier Bearing 1 50
Air Filter Cab - Outside (See Note 2) 1 250
Air Tubing Engine 1 500
Alternator/Water Pump Belt 1 500
Compressor Belt 1 500
Battery Electrolyte Level 2 500
Engine Oil (See Note 6) 1 500
Engine Oil Filter 1 500
Engine Fuel Filter (See Note 7) 1 500
PTO Carrier Bearing 1 500
PTO Slip Joint 2 500
Radiator and Coolers 3 500
Engine Coolant SCA Level 1 500
Engine Crankcase Breather Filter (385-435-485) 1 1000
Engine Exhaust Blanket (485) 1 1000
Engine Air Filter - Primary (See Note 3) 1 1500
Engine Air Filter - Secondary 1 1500
Axle/Hydraulic Oil 1 1500
Axle Lube Filter (See Note 7) 1 1500
Hydraulic Oil Filter (See Note 7) 1 1500
TwinFlow Oil Filter (Option) (See Note 7) 1500
Hydraulic Oil Vent 1 1500
Transmission Oil 1 1500
Transmission Oil Filter (See Note 7) 1 1500
219
N FREQUENCY IN HOURS
O
C G
C H C R D
O
L A H E R
F E N E A A
P A G C S I
O
N E K E N
I
N
SERVICE POINTS T
S
Idler and Roller Wheel Oil (See Note 9) 1 1500
Transmission Vent 1 1500
Fuel Tank Vent 1 1500
Engine Coolant Filter (See Note 5) (335 and 535) 1 1500
Air Filter Cab - Outside (See Note 2) 1 1500
Door Lock and Hinges (See Note 4) 3 1500
Engine Valves and Injectors (See Note 8) 1 1500
Engine Exhaust Blanket (485) 1 4000
Engine Coolant - Drain and Flush 2 6000
NOTE 1: Check the tractor for oil leaks, rubbing hoses, loose bolts and trash build up. Repair all oil leaks, hoses
and loose bolts before field operation.
NOTE 2: In dusty conditions the cab filter may require more frequent cleaning. Clean whenever the engine air
cleaner service monitor illuminates.
NOTE 3: Clean or change the filter element whenever the service monitor displays.
NOTE 4: Use graphite to lubricate door hinges and locks.
NOTE 5: Change whenever SCA testing indicates the need.
NOTE 6: Reduce to 250 hours or less if Case No. 1 oil is not used.
NOTE 7: Change after first 100 hours or when service icon is displayed.
NOTE 8: Every 3000 hours on QSX 15 engine.
NOTE 9: Change oil at 1000 hours in severe service or scraper operation.
IMPORTANT: Always dispose of used fluids, filters and containers in an environmentally safe manner according to
local laws and regulations.
Engine Hourmeter
Service your tractor at the intervals and locations
given in the Lubrication and Maintenance Chart.
When you service your tractor, use only high quality
lubricants of the type recommended.
The engine hourmeter shows the amount of actual

hours the engine has run. Use the engine hourmeter
along with the Lubrication and Maintenance Chart to
service your tractor at the correct time periods.
IMPORTANT: Recommended service intervals may

vary according to operating conditions. Shor ten
intervals in severe operating conditions.
MT04M017
220
10 HOURS OR DAILY
Fuel Tank
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each work day to
prevent condensation from forming on the walls of
the tank.
Clean the fuel cap (1) and adjacent area before 1

removing the cap. Use the sight gauge (2) while
filling the tank to prevent overfilling.
NOTE: The platform in front of the fuel tank has a

larger hole (3) for holding the fuel nozzle when
climbing the steps to fill the tank.
2
NOTE: The tabs on the cap (4) and fill neck (5) are
for installing a lock on the tank. MK00A120
Diesel Fuel
Use Diesel Fuel conforming to specifications SAE 3
ASTM EN590 Grade 2-D or equivalent in your
engine. Do not use other types of grades of fuel. The
use of other low grade fuels will result in loss of
engine power and high fuel consumption.
NOTE: When the temperature is very cold, the use
of blended fuel is permitted for a short period of time.
See your fuel dealer for winter fuel requirements in
your area.
MT07F141
MT07144
221
Fuel Storage
If you keep fuel in storage for a period of time, you can get foreign material or water in the fuel storage tank. Many
engine problems are caused by water in the fuel.
Keep the fuel storage tank outside and keep the fuel as cool as possible. Remove water from the fuel storage tank
at regular intervals.
WARNING: Never refuel the machine when the engine is hot or running. Never smoke while refueling.*
! M139C
WARNING: Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause infection
or other injury. To Prevent Personal Injury: Relieve all pressure, before disconnecting fluid lines. Before
! applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and components are in good condition. Never use
your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose.
If injured by leaking, see your doctor immediately. M149B
Biodiesel Fuel
The use of biodiesel blends meeting Specification ● Biodiesel is an excellent solvent. It may be
Standards ASTM 6751 or EN14214 is approved for necessary to change fuel filters more frequently
all Case-IH engines up to B5 (5% blend ratio). B20 during the early stages of biodiesel use.
(20% blend ratio) is approved for all engines when
● On site storage tanks should be clean and free of
Case-IH Guidelines above 5% are followed. B100
sediment. The use of a fuel filter and water
(100% blend ratio is approved for 385 and 435
separator is recommended. It is also
engines when Case-IH Guidelines above 5% are
recommended that the tank, hose(s) and seal
followed. Contact your dealer for correct information.
materials used are compatible with biodiesel.
It is highly recommended that you use biodiesel fuel
from a BQ-9000 accredited supplier to maintain the
With B20 and B100
quality and consistency of the fuel.
● Check your engine oil daily. If the oil level
● Biodiesel fuel does not have a long term stability
increases, contact your dealer.
and should not be left in engines or stored for
more than three months, the engine should be ● The use of biodiesel blends requires greater
flushed by running for a minimum of 20 minutes attention to fuel quality and handling. Biodiesel
with conventional diesel fuel. requires additional vehicle maintenance and
service. See your dealer who will provide the
● Biodiesel fuel has a higher cloud point than
details of these special requirements. Make sure
conventional diesel fuels and is not recommended
your biodiesel customer agreement suppor ts
for use in winter months when temperatures are
these requirements.
lower than 5° C (41° F). Cold flow properties for
biodiesel are extremely important. If fuel begins to
With B100
gel, it can clog filters or can eventually become too
thick to pump from the fuel tank to the engine. ● Engine performance may be reduced when using
Consult your fuel dealer for winter fuel a higher blended biodiesel fuel. DO NOT make
requirements for your area. any modifications to your engine to compensate
reduced performance.
● Biodiesel fuel attracts moisture and may have a
higher water content than conventional diesel fuel.
Fuel tanks should be kept as full as possible to
limit the amount of air and water condensation. It
may be necessary to drain the fuel filter water trap
more frequently.
222
GRILLE AND HOOD ACCESS
Opening The Hood
STEP 1
To open the grille screen, pull forward on the latch
handle.
MT06A015
STEP 2
Open the grille screen until the restraint rod drops in
the pocket.
1
MT06A017
STEP 3
Pull outward on the hood latch release bar (1) to
release the hood.
Grasp the hood crossbar and release bar together

and pull forward to raise the hood. 1
MT06A016
223
STEP 4
Pull forward to raise the hood until it latches in the
safety support. Close the grille screen.
1
Use the steps and hand hold (1) provided when
performing under hood maintenance.
MK00B179
Closing the Hood
STEP 5
Pull forward slightly on the release bar to release the
tension on the support latch. Release the latch bar
and push rearward on the crossbar to close the hood
until latched.
MT05M109
STEP 6
Lift up on the grille screen restraint rod (1) to close
the grille screen.
1
MT06A017
224
Access To Batteries And Hydraulic

Oil Filter
The batteries and axle lube oil filter are located in a
compartment on the RH side of the tractor. To open
the compartment, remove the retaining pin (1) or lock
and pull the door open.
NOTE: To lock the battery compar tment door a
1
padlock may be used in place of the pin (1).
MT07F139
Swing the door rearward to the full open position to
service the batteries, hydraulic oil filter and window
washer reservoir.
MT05M133
Engine Trash Shields (If Equipped)

The RH side trash shield must be removed to service
the engine.
To remove the shield, open the hood, pull outwards

on the screen and lift upwards.
MA03F081
225
Remove the LH side trash shield to service the

engine.
To remove the trash shield, open the hood, pull

outward on the top of the screen and lift upwards.
NOTE: The shields are attached to the front frame

by a tether cable. DO NOT disconnect or remove the
tether cable.
MA03F084
226
10 HOURS OR DAILY
Engine Oil Level

To check the engine oil level, put the tractor on a level
surface and stop the engine. After the engine has
been stopped for 5 to 10 minutes, remove the
dipstick (1) to check the oil level.
IMPORTANT: Be sure the dipstick is pushed

completely down before checking the oil level.
2
If the oil level is below the ADD mark, add oil through 1
the filler tube (2) to raise the oil level to the FULL
mark. DO NOT raise the oil level above the FULL
mark.
NOTE: The dipstick, oil fill port and coolant recovery

MK00B003
reservoir are located on the RH side of the engine on
335
385-435-485 tractors.
MT05M122
385, 435, 485
MT01G102
535
227
Coolant Reservoir Level

Check the coolant level in the coolant recovery
reservoir every 10 hours or daily.
Check the coolant level when the coolant is cold and
the engine is stopped.
The coolant must be within the normal cold range
marks on the reservoir.
If the level is near or below the ADD mark, fill the
reservoir to the top mark of the normal cold range
with the specified coolant in this manual.
MK00B003
335
MT05M115
385, 435, 485
MK01G102
535
228
Deaeration Tank
W h e n ev e r t h e h o o d i s o p e n e d t o p e r fo r m
mai ntena nce, Check th e c ool ant level i n th e
deaeration tank. If coolant level is low, remove the
cap and fill to the neck with the specified coolant.
NOTE: The deaeration tank is located on top of the

engine.
MT04N005
335
MT05M135
385, 435, 485, 535
229
10 HOURS OR DAILY
Transmission Fluid Level

Check the transmission oil level every 10 hours or
daily. The tractor should be on level ground. Check
the oil level cold before starting the engine. An oil
level sight gauge is located at the lower rear LH side
of the transmission. The oil level must be at or near
the upper FULL mark on the sight gauge (1).
MK98N009
If the fluid level is at or near the LOW mark, add the
recommended oil through the transmission fill tube
(2)
IMPORTANT: Use only oil of the type specified in

this manual. Do not overfill the transmission.
Overfilling the transmission will cause excessive heat 2
to be generated.
MK01G285
230
10 HOURS OR DAILY
Axle/Hydraulic Oil Level

To check the axle/hydraulic oil level. Park the tractor
on level ground and shut off the engine after at least
half an hour of continuous operation. 3
If the oil level on the sight gauge (1) is within the
stabilized range shown on the hydraulic oil level
decal (2), do not adjust the reservoir level.
1
If the oil level on the sight gauge (1) is outside of the
stabilized range shown on the hydraulic oil level
decal (2), adjust the reservoir level to be within the 2
refill range through the filler tube (3).
NOTE: When implements are connected to the

MK01G285
tractor, cycle all remote cylinders, lower the three
point hitch then check the hydraulic oil level.
Daily Tractor Inspection

Do a daily walk-around visual inspection of the tractor. Check for such things as hoses or wires rubbing against
other components, oil leaks, trash buildup, loose bolts or anything that would affect the normal operation of the
tractor.
Make any necessary corrections before operating the tractor.
Wheel And Hub Bolts

Torque wheel and hub bolts as specified. See Wheel Bolt Torques.
231
50 HOUR MAINTENANCE
NOTE: Complete all 10 hour requirements plus the following.
Fuel Tank Water Drain

open the drain valve and drain the water and
sediment from the fuel tank into a container. Close
the drain valve when the fuel is clear of water and
sediment.
IMPORTANT: The handle for the drain valve is

stored in the cab. Do not leave the handle on the
drain valve during operation. Keep the handle for the
drain valve in the cab. If the handle is left on the
valve, field trash may open the valve and drain the
fuel tank.
MK99K093
Fuel Filter Drain

Every 50 hours or when the instrument panel service
icon indicates, drain the water from the primary fuel
filter. The drain valve is located at the bottom of the
primary fuel filter. Tighten the valve once the water is
drained.
NOTE: The fuel filter is located on the LH side of the

engine on the 335 and 535 and on the RH side of the
articulation driveline shield on the 385, 435 and 485.
MT07F130
335
MT05M116
385, 435, 485
232
MK01G105
535
Auxiliary Fuel Filter (335 AND 535,

If Equipped)
If your tractor is equipped with an auxiliary fuel filter,
check the sediment bowl for the presence of water or
dirt. If draining is required, open the bleed screw (1)
on top of the filter head. Push in and turn the drain 1
valve (2) to drain the filter.
Tighten the bleed screw and close the drain valve

before starting the engine.
MK01E094
233
50 HOUR MAINTENANCE
Grease Fittings
Use NLGI No. 2 Multi-Purpose Lithium EP Grease on all grease fittings.
MK99K046 MK99K102
ARTICULATION HINGE-LOWER ARTICULATION HINGE - UPPER
MK99K045
OSCILLATION HINGE - REAR
MK99K050
REAR DRIVELINE CARRIER BEARING (1 PLACE)
234
50 HOUR MAINTENANCE
MK99K047 MK99H158
ARTICULATION CYLINDER-REAR ARTICULATION CYLINDER - FRONT

(1 EACH SIDE) (1 EACH SIDE)
MK99K049 MK99K043
HITCH UPPER CYLINDER PIN HITCH LOWER CYLINDER PIN (1 EACH SIDE)
(1 EACH SIDE)
235
50 HOUR MAINTENANCE
MK99K042 MK99K044
HITCH CENTER LINK HITCH ROCKER SHAFT

(6 PLACES) (2 EACH SIDE)
MK99K041 MK99K094
HITCH LIFT LINKS PIVOT PIN-FRONT

(3 EACH SIDE) (ACCUSTEER ONLY)
236
250 HOUR MAINTENANCE
Cab Outside Air Filter
WARNING: Cab air filters remove dust in

the air, but are not capable of removing
chemicals used in spraying crops or in weed
control. Many chemicals used for these
purposes are toxic when improperly used,
and can be hazardous to operator’s and
! others in the area. Follow the instructions of
manufacturers of both the equipment and the
chemicals regarding prohibitions against 2
inhalation of dust or spray, personal hygiene
practices, and other precautions noted by the
manufacturers. M108A 1
MK98C028
1 3
WARNING: To prevent injury, always wear
! eye protection when working with
compressed air. SM459
The outside cab air filter must be cleaned every 250

hours or whenever the engine air filter ICON comes
on. The filter is located under the LH rear corner of
the cab.
2
Conditions of high humidity and extreme dust may
require a more frequent cleaning of the filter.
Release the filter cover latch (1) and remove the MK98C029
filter element (2).
Either one of two methods can be used in cleaning

the filter: tapping or compressed air.
TAPPING: After removing the filter, clean the filter
by tapping it gently on a flat surface with the dirty
side down, being careful not to damage filter.
COMPRESSED AIR: Direct compressed air, at 35
PSI (241 kPa) maximum pressure, through the filter
from the inside.
Install the filter and secure the cover latch to hold
the filter in place.
237
Cab Recirculation Filter

The cab air recirculation filter (1) is located directly
behind the operator’s seat. The recirculation filter
element must be removed and cleaned each time the
cab outside air filter is serviced.
1
To remove the screened mesh type filter, lift the filter
element straight upwards far enough to remove the
element out one side to clear the wire harnesses.
Use a mild detergent and warm water to clean the
filter. Rinse the element in clear water, dry and
reinstall the element.
MK99H026
Windshield Washer (If Equipped)

The windshield reservoir (2) is located in the battery
compartment on the RH side of the tractor.
2
Fill the reservoir as needed with a good quality
windshield washer solvent. In cold temperatures use
a non-freezing type solvent to prevent damage to the
windshield washer equipment.
MK99K090
335
MK00E022
385, 435, 485, 535
238
NOTE: Complete the 10, 50 and 250 hour maintenance plus the following. Use NLGI No. 2 Multi-Purpose Lithium
EP Grease on all grease fittings.
Grease the PTO shaft carrier bearing every 500

service hours.
MK99K050
Grease the front PTO shaft slip yoke every 500
service hours.
MK99H155
Grease the rear PTO shaft slip yoke every 500
service hours.
MK00D161
239
Engine Air Induction System
Check to make sure ALL air intake hoses, tubing and

clamps are tight on the engine air induction system.
Replace any hoses, tubing and clamps that are
damaged or cracked.
MK99K075
EXAMPLE: 335 AIR CLEANER
MK00D359
EXAMPLE: 535 AIR INDUCTION TUBES
240
Compressor Belt Check (335)

NOTE: Check the belt tension after the first 50 hours
and then use the scheduled interval. Measure the
compressor belt for correct tension using a belt
tension gauge. Check the belt to the following
specifications:
New Belt ....................... 95 to 115 lb. (422 to 516 N)
Used Belt ...................... 90 to 110 lb. (400 to 489 N)
To adjust the belt tension, loosen the two compressor
pivot bo lts and adjus ting strap bolt. Pul l th e
compressor up until the correct tension for the belt is
reached. Tighten the compressor adjusting strap bolt
and the pivot bolts.
MK99K052
NOTE: Adjust new belts to the used belt
specifications after a 10 minute run-in.
Engine Accessory Drive Belt (335)

The engine accessory drive belt is self-adjusting and
does not require tension adjustments. Visually check
the belt for damage or wear. Replace the belt if
damage or wear is found.
To remove and replace the belt, use a 3/8 inch (9.5
mm) square drive socket wrench flex handle in the
square hole (1) provided in the tension bracket. Lift
the spring loaded belt tensioner pulley to remove and
replace the belt.
NOTE: The air conditioner compressor belt must be

removed first. 1
MK99J042
241
Water Pump And Accessory Drive Belt Check
535
The engine water pump and accessory drive belts
are self-adjusting and do not require tension
adjustments.
Visually inspect the belts for damage. Cracks that
appear across the belt width (transverse) are
acceptable. Longitudinal (direction of belt length)
cracks that intersect with transverse cracks are NOT
acceptable. Replace the belt(s) if it has unacceptable
cracks, is frayed or has pieces of material missing.
To remove the belts, use a 1/2 inch (50 mm) square
drive flex handle in the square hole (1) and (2) 1
provided in each belt tensioner. Lift upward on the
flex handle to release the belt tension.
NOTE: The water pump drive belt must be removed

first to replace the accessory drive belt. 2
MK99H089
385, 435, 485
Th e 3 85 , 4 3 5 a n d 4 85 t ra c t o r s u s e a s i n g l e
serpentine belt and self-adjusting belt tensioner to
drive the engine water pump and accessories.
MT05N018
242
Engine Oil Change

Change the engine oil and filter every 500 hours or
once a year or before storage, whichever occurs first.
Your dealer has approved oil and filters. Do not use
other types of oil or filters.
NOTE: For best results change the oil and filter while
the engine is still warm to the touch from operation.
The tractor must be on a level surface.
1. Remove the oil pan drain plug, (1) and drain the
oil from the engine. Reinstall and tighten the
1
drain plug.
2. Clean the area around the oil filter head. Use a
filter strap wrench to remove the spin-on type MK00B059
filter. 335 SHOWN
NOTE: Be sure the seal did not remain on the filter

head.
3. Fill the new filter with new oil of the specified
type. Apply a light film of clean oil to the seal on
the new filter.
4. Install the filter (2). Turn the filter clockwise until
the seal contacts the filter head. Tighten the filter
an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn by hand.
2
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use a filter wrench to install
the filter. If the filter is too tight you can damage the
seal and filter.
MK00B062
335
All 280-330-480-530 Steiger Series tractors use one

spin-on type filter mounted on the RH side of the
engine.
380-430 tractors have two filters mounted on the LH
side of the engine.
NOTE: Refill oil capacity will depend on how much

oil actually drained out of the engine. DO NOT fill
above the high mark on the dipstick.
2
MT05M121
385, 435, 485
243
MK00D348
535
5. Put the correct type and amount of new oil into
the engi ne o il fil l ( 3) . Re fer to eng ine oil
specifications and capacities in the front of this 4
section.
NOTE: Total oil refill capacity will be determined by

how completely the crankcase drained. DO NOT fill
above the high mark on the dipstick when refilling. 3
6. Operate the engine for five minutes at 1000 rpm.
Check for oil leaks at the filter base and drain
plug.
MK00A082
335
7. Stop the engine. Wait approximately five minutes

for the oil to return to the oil pan. Check the oil 4
level on the dipstick (4) and add oil if needed.
NOTE: The oil fill port and oil level dipstick are
located on the RH side of the engine on 385, 435 and
485 Steiger Series tractors.
MT05M122
385, 435, 485
244
MK01G102
535
Engine Fuel System
WARNING: Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can

penetrate the skin and cause infection or other injury.
To Prevent Personal Injury:
Relieve all pressure, before disconnecting fluid lines.
! Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and
components are in good condition.
Never use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose.
If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately. M149B
The fuel system consists of a fuel tank, fuel filters, fuel cooler and fuel injection parts. To prevent dirt or water from
damaging the fuel injection parts, use clean fuel, keep the fuel tank full, clean the fuel tank water trap at regular
intervals and replace the filters.
245
Fuel Filter Replacement

Change the fuel filters at the recommended time
interval. Your dealer has approved filters. Do not use
other types of filters. Change the fuel filter as follows:
1
1. Turn the fuel shutoff valve (1) to the OFF
position. The fuel shutoff valve is located on the
lower front side of the fuel tank on the RH side of
the tractor.
MK01G298
2. 335 AND 535 ONLY - Open the valve (2) on the
bottom of the filter to drain the fuel from the filter.
NOTE: Fuel filters are located on the LH side of the

335 and 535 engines and on the RH side for the 385,
435 and 485 engines.
2
MT07F130
335
3. 335 and 535 ONLY - Disconnect the wire

harness (3) from the water in fuel sensor.
4
MK01G106
535
246

4. Clean the filter head and adjacent area of all
dirt. Use a filter wrench to turn the filter (4)
counterclockwise to remove the filter.
NOTE: Be sure the seals did not remain on the 4

filter head.
5. Install and turn the filter clockwise until the filter
comes in contact with the filter head and tighten
1/2 to 3/4 of a turn. To get the correct seal, 3
loosen the filter one turn and again tighten by
hand 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn after the seal contacts
the filter head.
6. If equipped connect the water in fuel sensor MT07F130
wire harness (3) to the filter. 335
MT05M124
385, 435, 485
MK01G105
535
247

7. 335 ONLY - Loosen the clamps and remove the
in-line filter (5), from the fuel line and install a
new filter.
NOTE: Be sure the arrow on the filter points toward

the injection pump.
8. Turn the fuel shutoff valve (1) to the ON
position.
5
9. Turn the key switch ON for two minutes to allow
the electric booster pump to fill the filter and
lines before cranking the engine to start.
MK00B006
Coolers, Condenser and Radiator

Area
1. To clean or inspect the fuel cooler, condenser,
air to air after cooler, hydraulic/transmission
cooler and radiator, open the grille screen and
raise the hood.
MK00B179
2. Remove the two bolts retaining the clean-out
trap door. Support the door when removing the
bolts.
MT05M125
248

3. The clean-out trap door shown in the open
position.
MT05M126
4. Use a pressure washer to clean all grille
screens, fuel cooler, condenser and air to air
cooler from the front side.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to bend or damage

the fins during cleaning. DO NOT exceed 1000 PSI
(6890 kPa) nozzle pressure when cleaning.
MT05M127
5. Use the LH and RH side opening to clean the
front side of the radiator and back side of the
hydraulic/transmission oil cooler.
NOTE: After cleaning the coolers wash all trash

from the bottom trap door.
MK99M119
249

6. Close the hood and grille screen.
MT05M105
7. Close the lower trap door and install and tighten
the retaining bolts.
MT05M126
Coolant SCA Test (335 and 535 Only)

To make sure that the cooling system has the
correct amount of corrosion protection the coolant
MUST be tested with a Supplemental Coolant
Additive (SCA) Test Kit at each 500 hour engine oil
change inter val. Also s ee SCA Ser v ic e
Requirements in this section.
WARNING: Wear required eye protection

! when using or working with chemical
additives. M290A
NOTE: Never pour coolant into the radiator if the

engine is very hot or you may cause damage to the MK96M086
engine. Coolant Test Kit - P/N CC2602
250
Batteries
Every 500 hours (or annually) open the battery
compartment door to check the water level in each - + - +
battery cell. Remove each cell cap carefully. Water
must be added before the top of the separator
plates are exposed. Unless the water you use has
no minerals, add distilled water until the water level
is at the split ring at the bottom of each cell opening.
When water is added at ambient temperatures
below 0° C (32° F) the batteries must have a charge
immediately to mix the water and electrolyte and
prevent the water from freezing.
NOTE: When operating in high ambient
temperatures and/or extreme battery load
MK00B010
requirements. Check the battery water level every
250 hours. 335
WAR NIN G : BA T TE RY A CI D CA US E S
SEVERE BURNS. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Antidote: EXTERNAL - flush with water.
INTERNAL - Drink large quantities of water or
milk. DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek medical
attention immediately. EYES - Flush with
! water for 15 minutes and seek prompt medical
attention. BATTERIES PRODUCE
EXPLOSIVE GASES. Keep sparks, flame and
cigarettes away. Ventilate when charging or
using in enclosed space. Always shield eyes
when working near batteries. Wash hands MA03G010
after handling. KEEP OUT OF REACH OF 385-435-485-535
CHILDREN.M144B
Keep your batteries in good operating condition as 4. If a battery will not keep a charge, install a new
follows: battery that has the specifications given in the
1. Add distilled water as needed to keep separators SPECIFICATIONS section.
under water. 5. Before you add water, check each cell with a
2. Keep the batteries with a full charge as shown on hydrometer. The specific gravity in each cell must
a hydrometer. have full charge.
3. Keep the batteries clean and dry. Make sure the 6. When using a battery charger, charge at the
batteries are fastened in position. lowest rate possible to reduce gas formation. DO
NOT charge a frozen battery, it can explode.
251
Battery Cables And Terminals

The battery cable terminals must be kept clean and tight. Remove all corrosion with a wire brush, then wash with a
weak solution of baking soda or ammonia. Put some petroleum jelly or light grease on terminals to prevent more
corrosion.
Inspect the battery cables for damage. Replace any battery cable that has damage.
When Batteries Are Not In Use

When the tractor is not in use, the batteries will need a charge every six weeks. A storage battery not in use will
slowly discharge. A battery that has discharged can freeze at low ambient temperatures and cause damage to the
battery and tractor.
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
Air Filter Service Monitor

When the air filter service icon on the instrument
cluster illuminates, the engine primar y air filter
element needs service. If the service icon illuminates
during the work day, you can service the element
after the days work is done.
NOTE: If the air filter service icon illuminates with

frequency, or after the primary filter has been
serviced, check the following items for needed
service:
1. Aspirated system tube is dirty.
2. Secondary (inner) element is dirty.
MT04M029
3. Air stack screen is dirty.
NOTE: If the air filter monitor illuminates with

frequency and the air induction system is clean, see
your dealer to check the restriction indicator sensor.
MT06A020
252
Engine Crankcase Filter (385, 435 and 485 Only)

The engine crankcase filter used on the 380 and
430 tractors must be replaced every 1000 hours of
service. Use the following procedures to replace
this filter:
1. Open the grille screen and raise the hood.
MT06A016
2. The crankcase cover and filter are located on
the backside of the engine. Remove the eight
M5 socket head screws (1) retaining the cover
and remove the cover.
MT06A002
3. Remove the filter element (2) from the engine.
MT06A004
253
4. Install a new filter element (2) on the engine.

Reinstall the filter cover and 8 socket head
retaining screws.
MT06A003
5. Close the hood and grille screen.
MT06A015
Engine Exhaust Blanket (485 Only)

I n s p e c t t h e e n g i n e ex h a u s t fo r d a m a g e o r
deterioration. Replace if necessary. Replacement
procedures are in the 4000 HOUR MAINTENANCE
section.
MT07F134
254
Air Filter
Your tractor is equipped with a two-stage air filter
system consisting of a primary filter and a secondary 1 2
filter.
The primary filter is a high capacity filter designed to

provide optimum protection to the engine. The
primary filter can be cleaned as required between
filter changes. See Air Filter Ser vice for more
information.
The secondary filter gives extra protection to the

engine if there is damage to the primary filter. The
secondary filter cannot be cleaned. Replace the filter
if the filter has damage or is dirty. MK99K083
335 Only
1. SECONDARY 2. PRIMARY
2
NOTE: Washing air filters is NOT recommended.
The primary filter must be replaced after four 1
cleanings.
MT05K087
Engine Air Tubing Inspection 1. SECONDARY 2. PRIMARY
To prevent the entrance of dirt into the engine, it is

absolutely essential that 1500 hour inspections of the
flexible rubber connections and piping from air
cleaner to the intake manifold be made. Hose or
flexible connections must be replaced before they
deteriorate. To eliminate any undue strain on the
connections, make sure the pipes line up. See that all
joints between the air cleaner and intake manifold do
not leak; this includes hose connections, manifold
joints and gaskets.
All gaskets must be in good condition and all clamps
drawn up tight.
Maintenance and care of the air intake system which MK00D359
includes the filter elements is the responsibility of the

535 SHOWN
customer.
255
Engine Air Filter Replacement

The engine air filter is located under the hood. To
access the air filter for service open the grille screen
and hood.
NOTE: Air filters may vary in size and/or

configuration between tractor models, however the
service procedures will be the same for all models.
MT06A015
STEP 1
Release the spring clamps securing the air cleaner
housing cover. Remove the cover.
MT05M062
335
MT05K088
385, 435, 485, 535
256
STEP 2
385, 435, 485 and 535 Tractors
Support the cover and secondary filter by the strap
on the cover and hook on the rear of the hood.
MT05K089
STEP 3
Remove the primary filter from the housing.
MK99K069
335
MT05K091
385, 435, 485, 535
257
STEP 4
Use a vacuum cleaner or cloth to clean the inside of
the air cleaner housing, seal and cover.
MK99K070
335
MT05M128
385, 435, 485, 535
258
STEP 5
385, 435, 485 AND 535 Tractors 1
Remove the secondary element (1) by pulling it
straight out of the cover.
335 Tractor
Remove the secondary element (2) from the filter
housing.
NOTE: Do not remove the secondary element unless
it is to be replaced.
MT05K092
MK99K071
259
STEP 6
385, 435, 485 AND 535 Tractors 1
If removed, install a new secondary element (1) in
the housing cover. Push the element in until it is fully
seated in the cover.
335 Tractor
If removed, install a new secondary element (2) in
the air cleaner housing. Push the element in until the
seal is seated in the housing.
MT05K092
MK99K071
260
STEP 7
Install a new primary filter by pushing it straight into
the housing until it is seated against the seal. 1
MK99K068
335
MT05K091
385, 435, 485, 535
261
STEP 8
Install the housing upper cover and latch all cover
snaps.
IMPORTANT: The top cover must be positioned so

that the flex tubing is not making contact with any
objects. The tubing must have clearance all around
its full length.
MT05M066
335
MT05K088
385, 435, 485, 535

STEP 9
Close the hood and grille screen.
MT06A015
262
Coolant System Filter/Conditioner (335 and 535 Only)

The cooling system filter (1) located on the RH side
of the engine on all Steiger Series tractors, and
contains an element which filters the coolant and
provides chemicals (SCA) to condition the coolant.
To maintain protection of the cooling system from
corrosion, deposit formations, chemical attack and
cavitation erosion of cylinder sleeves, the coolant
filter/conditioner must be changed every 1500 hours
or once a year or when SCA testing indicates the
need.
1
NOTE: DO NOT add coolant STOP LEAK to the
cooling system. Adding STOP LEAK will cause
MK01G287
premature plugging of the filter.
Coolant Filter Replacement
WARNING: Hot coolant can spray under

! pressure. Close valve before removing filter.
M153A
After the engine has cooled down, to change the 2

coolant filter, turn off the water filter valve (2). Use a
strap type filter wrench to turn the filter
counterclockwise and remove the filter.
NOTE: The arrow will point to the 9 o’clock position

when the valve is closed.
MK01G288
Lubricate the seal on a new filter with a light coat of

clean oil. Turn the filter clockwise until the seal makes
contact with the filter head and tighten 1/2 to 3/4 of a
turn. Open the valve (2) on the filter head.
The arrow will point straight down (6 o’clock) when
the valve is open on 335 tractors and will point 2
straight up (12 o’clock) on 535 tractors.
NOTE: The above procedures will be the same for

the 535 tractors with the QSX 15 engine.
MK01G287
263
Transmission Oil Change

To change the Powershift or 24 speed manual shift NOTE: For the best results, drain the oil while the
transmission oil, put the tractor on level ground transmission is still warm to the touch (not hot). Use
remove the key from the switch and perform the a catch pan that has at least a 57 litre (15 gallon) oil
following steps. capacity when draining the oil.
1. Loosen the transmission drain plug (1) (do not
remove) to control the oil drain rate. When the
drain rate slows the drain plug can be removed.
NOTE: If equipped with a transmission heat 1

maintainer, disconnect the power cord and loosen
the heater element.
2. Reinstall and tighten the drain plug or heater
element.
MK00A101
3. Remove and clean the transmission breather (2).
The breather is located on the RH upper side of
2
the transmission.
MK99J224
4. Fill the transmission to the correct operating level
with the oil specified in this manual
IMPORTANT: DO NOT overfill the transmission.

Overfilling will cause fluid aeration which will cause
excessive heat to be generated in the transmission.
5. Install a new transmission filter.
MS99H001
264
Transmission Filter
The transmission filter is located on the inside of the
LH side front frame. Change the transmission oil filter
at the recommended interval or when indicated by
the programmable display service monitor. Your
dealer has approved filters. Do not use other types.
U s e t h e fo l l o w i n g p r o c e d u r e t o c h a n g e t h e
transmission filter.
1. Clean the filter head, use a strap type filter
wrench and turn the filter counterclockwise to
remove the filter.
2. Apply clean oil to the seal on the new filter.
3. Install the new filter. Turn the filter clockwise until MT05M134
the gasket comes in contact with the filter head.

Tighten the filter by hand another 1/2 to 3/4 turn.
the transmission filter. When the filter is too tight you
can cause damage to the gasket and filter.
Hydraulic/Axle Oil Change

The hydraulic oil reservoir serves as a common
sump for both the hydraulic circuit and the front and
rear axle lube and cooling circuit. Separate filters are
used for each of the circuits. When changing the
hydraulic oil, the reservoir and both the front and rear
axles must be drained. For best results, drain the oil
while the reservoir and axles are still warm to the
touch (not hot).
To change the oil, park the tractor on level ground,
remove the key from the switch before performing the
following steps:
1. Remove the drain plug from the bottom of the
hydraulic reservoir. Reinstall and tighten the plug MK01G231
after draining.
2. Remove the front and rear axle center housing
drain plug and the drain plugs from each final
drive housing. Approximately 15 gallons (57L)
will drain from each axle. Reinstall and tighten
the plugs after draining.
MK00A102
265
Axle Lube Circuit Filter

Change the axle oil filter at the scheduled time
interval or when indicated by the service monitor.
Your dealer has approved filters. Do not use other
types.
3. The axle lube filter (1) is located on the inside of
the RH side front frame.
To remove the filter, use a strap type filter wrench
to turn the filter counterclockwise.
4. Apply clean oil to the seal on a new filter. Install
the new filter. Turn the filter clockwise by hand 1
until the seal comes in contact with the filter
head. Tighten the filter another 1/2 to 3/4 turn.
MT05M132

the new filter. When the filter is too tight you can
cause damage to the seal and filter.
Hydraulic Charge Circuit Filter

Change the main hydraulic oil filter at the scheduled
time inter val or when indicated by the ser vice
monitor.
5. The hydraulic filter (2) is located inside the
battery compartment.
2
Use the same procedures as described in Step 3
and 4 to remove and replace the filter.
NOTE: This is a high capacity filter with a 5 micron

performance specification.
TwinFlow Hydraulic Filter

MK00B011
(If Equipped)
Tractors equipped with TwinFlow have an oil filter
located on the LH side of the tractor in the center
hinge area. Use the same procedures stated above
to change the filter element at the same time interval.
MK01G152
266
6. Remove and replace the hydraulic reservoir

breather. The breather is located on top of the
reservoir and is accessible inside the frame on
the LH side of the tractor.
MK00A121
7. Remove the steering cylinder locking blocks
from storage and install the locking blocks on
each articulation cylinder.
MK00A082
8. Fill the hydraulic reservoir to the top of the
stabilized range with the correct oil specified in
this manual.
MK99H102
267

9. Put the Powershift transmission control lever (1)
i n t h e PA R K p o s i t i o n o r t h e 2 4 s p e e d
transmission in NEUTRAL and apply the park
brake. Start the engine and run at low idle.
NOTE: The engine must be run to fill the front and

rear axles with oil.
MK99M130
10. Monitor the oil level sight gauge on the
hydraulic reservoir. When the oil level falls to
the low mark, shut down the engine.
MK01G285
11. Refill the hydraulic reservoir to the stabilized
operating level and repeat Steps 9 and 10.
Continue to perform Steps 9, 10 and 11 until
both axles are filled and the oil level stabilizes in
the normal operating range on the hydraulic
reservoir sight gauge. Shut down the engine.
NOTE: The axle filling procedure could take 30

minutes or more.
12. Remove the articulation cylinder locking blocks
before operating the tractor.
MK99H102
268
Door Latch and Hinge Lubrication

Use graphite to lubricate the LH door lock, latch
mechanism, striker and hinges and the RH window
hinges.
MK00E001
Engine Valves and Injectors

On 335 tractors, all overhead valves and injectors must be adjusted every 1500 hours. Adjustments should also be
made after any major repair and then every 1500 hours thereafter. Contact your dealer for this service.
NOTE: This is a 3000 hour service requirement on 385-435-485-535 tractors.
269
Undercarriage Idler/Roller Wheel Hub Oil Change

Every 1500 hours (1000 hours in severe service or
scraper operation) drain the oil from each idler and
roller wheel hub. Refill the hubs with new oil of the
specified type only. See Lubricants and Capacities
in this section.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT substitute with oil of any

other type or the seals may be damaged.
MT05M014
Clean the area around each hub drain/fill plug. The

plug must be located at or near the bottom (6
o’clock) position of hub to drain the oil. Remove the
plug from each hub that is in the correct position for
draining. Reposition the tractor as required until all
hubs are drained.
IMPORTANT: Protect the track from oil.
MA03F078
The drain plug hole must be at the top (12 o’clock)
location for filling. Fill each hub to the bottom of each
plug hole that is located at the top. Clean the threads
of the plug. Install and tighten the plug. Reposition
the tractor as required to fill all remaining hubs.
NOTE: Special care must be taken not to allow any

dirt or debris to enter the hubs during the draining
and filling procedure.
MA03F079
270
Engine Exhaust Blanket Change
STEP 1
Loosen the clamps (1) and move away from the
blanket.
MT07F134
STEP 2
Rotate the blanket to allow access to the blanket
fasteners (2). Pull the fasteners apart to remove the
blanket.
NOTE: If the snap fasteners will not release, cut the
blanket from the exhaust.
MT07F136
STEP 3
Install a new blanket (3) on the exhaust pipe and
snap the fasteners (4) to secure the blanket over the 3
exhaust pipe.
MT07F135
271
STEP 4
Rotate the blanket with the fasteners facing down.
Install and tighten the clamps (5).
5
5
MT07F134
272
Coolant Change
Every 6000 hours, or 2 years whichever comes first,
drain, flush and change the engine coolant. To
change the engine coolant, do the following:
1. Park the tractor on a level surface and turn the
engine OFF. Remove the key from the switch.
WARNING: Check and service the cooling

system according to maintenance
instructions. Hot coolant can spray out if the
deaeration tank cap is removed while the
! system is hot. To remove the deaeration tank
cap, let system cool, turn cap to first notch,
then wait until all pressure is released. MK01G302
Scalding can result from fast removal of the

deaeration tank cap. SM513
2. After the engine has cooled down, loosen the

deaeration tank cap (1) to the first notch.
MT04N005
335
MT05M135
335, 435, 485, 535
273

3. Open the radiator drain (2) and collect the
coolant in a container.
MK00D342
4. Open the engine oil cooler drain (3) or
disconnect the lower radiator hose and collect
the coolant in a container.
NOTE: Close both drains after the coolant is

drained.
MK00D065
5. If equipped, turn OFF the coolant filter valve (4).
NOTE: 385, 435 and 485 tractor engines are not

equipped with coolant filters and do not require SCA
Additive.
MK00B153
274

6. Remove the deaeration tank cap (5) and install a
good commercial grade radiator cleaner and fill 5
the system with clean water.
IMPORTANT: Follow the instructions given on the
product label for use. Be sure the cleaner is
compatible with the aluminum radiator core.
7. Remove the radiator cleaner solution and flush
the system with clean water as directed on the
product label.
8. Inspect all cooling system hoses and fittings
including the heater hoses for condition and
leaks.
MT04N005
335
MT05M135
385, 435, 485, 535

9. If equipped, remove and install a new cooling
system filter (1). Turn the valve (2) to the OPEN
position.
IMPORTANT: 335 And 535 Only - See SCA Service
Requirements for Supplemental Cooling Additive
pre-charge requirements when coolant is changed.
2
10. Fill the cooling system with the 50/50 Coolant
Solution and Supplemental Coolant Additive
specified in this manual to the fill neck of the
deaeration tank. 1
NOTE: Refer to Coolant Solutions at the front of this
section.
MK00B154
275

11. Start the tractor engine and run at low idle for
one to two minutes. Stop the engine and check
the coolant level in the deaeration tank. If
necessary, fill the tank to the fill neck and install
the pressure cap.
MT05M083
12. Fill the coolant recovery reservoir with coolant
solution to the full line and install the cap.
13. Start the engine and run the engine at
1200-1500 RPM to increase the coolant
temperature to the normal operating range.
14. Stop the engine and allow the coolant to cool.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
15. After the engine is cold, check the coolant level
at the recovery reservoir only. DO NOT remove
the deaeration tank cap. If necessar y, add
coolant solution to the recovery reservoir.
MK99K056
335
MT05M115
385, 435, 485
276
MK01G102
535
277
AS REQUIRED MAINTENANCE
Cleaning The Engine Primary Air Filter
WARNING: To prevent eye injury, always

wear goggles or full face protection before
! using compressed air or high pressure
washers. M786
The primary filter can be cleaned a maximum of 4

times between filter changes. If the war ning
message shown appears on the programmable
display, the primary filter element needs service. If
the message comes on during the work day, you
can generally service the element after the days
work is done.
NOTE: Washing air filters is NOT recommended.
To clean the engine pr imar y air filter do the

following:
MT06A020
STEP 1
The primary engine air filter is located under the
hood. Open the grille screen and raise the hood.
MT05M105
STEP 2
Release the spring latches securing the top cover.
Lift the cover from the main housing.
MT05M062
335
278
MT05K088
385, 435, 485, 535
STEP 3
385, 425, 485, 535 Tractors
Suspend the top cover with the secondary filter
from the hook provided on the back side of the
hood.
NOTE: Do not remove the secondary filter from the

top cover unless it is to be replaced.
MT05K089
STEP 4
335 Tractors
Remove the primary element by pulling straight out.
DO NOT remove the secondary element.
MK99K068
279
385, 435, 485, 535 Tractors

Remove the primary element by using the handles
and lifting straight out.
MT05K091
STEP 5
Use a vacuum cleaner or cloth to clean the filter
housing and cover.
MK99K070
335
MT05M128
285, 435, 485, 535
280
STEP 6
335 Tractors
If most of the dirt is dry, tap the outer edge of the
end of the filter with the heel of your hand while
rotating the filter in a vertical position.
MK96M003
385, 435, 485, 535 Tractors
Place the filter on a flat surface with the dirty end
down. With your hands opposed on the outside of
the filter, use a clapping motion to loosen the dust
packed in the individual channels. Working from the
top down, clap three or four times. Rotate the filter
in small increments and repeat the top down
clapping until you have completed one revolution.
After each revolution, lift the filter by the handles
and drop squarely from 6 inches several times.
Clear the removed dust and repeat the clapping and
dropping sequence for about ten minutes or until it
is obvious that most of the dust has been removed.
MT05K112
281
STEP 7
335 Tractors
If the filter must be cleaned with compressed air,
wear eye protection and clean the element with
compressed air from the inside of the element to
the outside. Keep the air nozzle about four inches
(100 mm) from the element and move the nozzle up
and down while turning the element.
IMPORTANT: The air nozzle pressure must not be

more than 30 psi (207 kPa).
NOTE: If the filter has oil or soot on it, do not use

MK99K088
compressed air to clean. Replace the element.
385, 435, 485, 535 Tractors

Compressed air can now be used to blow out
additional dust. Set pressure at 100 psi. Lay the
filter on its side. Using a nozzle with a minimum
orifice of 1/8” diameter and positioned about one
inch from the clean end of the filter (the end with the
handles), blow air into the channels. Keep the
nozzle moving and observe the amount of dust
coming out. When it appears most of the dust has
been blown out, lift the filter by the handles and
drop a few times as before. Blowing for five minutes
should be adequate. a larger diameter nozzle is
more effective if your compressor can keep up with
demand. MT05K113
After cleaning inspect for damage. Do not re-use a

filter with holes in the outside layer of paper. Do not
clean more than four times.
Never attempt to clean the secondary filter.
282
STEP 8
335 Tractors
To check the cleaned element for damage or holes,
put a lamp inside the element and turn the lamp.
Visually check the rubber gasket for damage.
Check the metal mesh cover and filter material for
damage. Replace the element if damage is found.
MK99K087
STEP 9
335 Tractors
Install the primary element by pushing it straight
into the housing. Ensure the element is fully seated.
MK99K068
385, 435, 485, 535 Tractors
Use the handles to lower the primary filter into the
housing until seated.
MT05K091
283
STEP 10
385, 435, 484, 535 Only
Unlock the top cover and secondary filter from the
hood. Position the top cover on the top of the
primary filter housing. Be sure the cover is seated in
the seal.
MT05K089
STEP 11
Install the housing top cover and latch all cover
snaps. Close the hood and grille screen.
IMPORTANT: 385, 435, 485 and 535 Only - The

top cover must be positioned so that the flex tubing
is not making contact with any objects. The tubing
must have clearance all around its full length.
.
MT05M066
335
MT05K088
385, 435, 485, 535
284
Cab Air Filter

Remove and clean the cab air filter element
whenever the engine air cleaner service message is
displayed on the programmable display monitor.
Clean and inspect the cab filter element in the same
manner described for the engine air filter element.
MK98C029
285
PRESSURE COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING: Check and service the cooling system according to
maintenance instructions. Hot coolant can spray out if the deaeration tank
cap is removed while the system is hot. To remove the deaeration tank
! cap, let system cool, turn cap to first notch, then wait until all pressure is
released. Scalding can result from fast removal of the deaeration tank cap.
SM513
1. The pressure cap on a pressure cooling system

has a control valve that operates as a SAFETY
RELIEF VALVE to keep the pressure within the
system operating range. Operating the engine
without a pressure cap or with a pressure cap
that has a control valve that is not set to operate
at the correct pressure, can cause damage.
NOTE: The hood must be opened to access the

deaeration tank and pressure cap.
2. A pressure cooling system decreases the loss of
coolant caused by evaporation or boiling. The
system must have good seals at the radiator cap,
MT05M083
hoses and hose connections. It is important that
you stop ALL LEAKS OF ANY SIZE as soon as
the leaks are found.
A small leak can become a large flow when
pressure is increased in the cooling system. While
the tractor is in operation, a weak hose can break
and cause injury or damage. Check all hoses and
hose connections with frequency. KEEP HOSES,
HOSE CONNECTIONS AND PRESSURE CAP IN
GOOD CONDITION.
Thermostat
DO NOT operate the tractor without a thermostat or with a defective thermostat. The engine can run too hot or too
cold causing possible engine damage. See your dealer for service.
SCA SERVICE REQUIREMENTS (335 and 535 Only)

When the coolant is replaced, the cooling system must be precharged. Add 1 pint of SCA liquid (5 units) for each 4
gallons of coolant (1.2 units per gallon). In addition, a service coolant filter containing 1 unit of SCA for each 4
gallons of coolant must be installed. This will result in a total precharge of approximately 1.5 SCA units per gallon of
coolant.
Coolant should be tested a minimum of once every 6 months or 500 hours. When excessive coolant loss occurs
and coolant is replaced, dilution of the SCA chemical results. If excessive coolant loss is suspected, coolant should
be tested at every oil change and liquid SCA added to make up for the chemical lost due to dilution.
NOTE: Low levels of SCA will result in cylinder liner pitting failure. Testing should not be used to maintain only
minimum SCA levels.
286
The following action is required after testing coolant at the normal change interval for SCA concentration:
Below 1.2 units per gallon:
Replace the service filter and add 1 pint of SCA liquid (5 units) for each 4 gallons of coolant (1.2 units per
gallon of coolant).
1.2 to 3 units per gallon:
Continue to replace the service coolant filter at each change interval.
Above 3 units per gallon:
Do not replace the service filter until the Supplement Coolant Additives (SCA) level falls below 3 units per
gallon when tested at every subsequent change interval.
Inspection And Maintenance Of Operator And Instructional Seat Belts

WARNING: Securely fasten your seat belt. Your machine is equipped
with a ROPS cab, ROPS canopy or ROPS frame for your protection. The
seat belt can help insure your safety if it is used and maintained. Never
wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the belt system. Never wear the
! belt in a twisted condition or pinched between the seat structural
members. Inspect seat belt webbing, buckle and retractors to ensure they
are not damaged. If damage is apparent, repair before operating the
tractor. M437A
1. Keep sharp edges and items that can cause damage away from the belts.
2. From time to time, check belts, buckles, retractors, tethers, slack take-up system and mounting bolts for
damage.
3. Replace all parts that have damage or wear.
4. Replace belts that have cuts that can make the belt weak.
5. Check that bolts are tight on the seat bracket or mounting.
6. If belt is attached to seat, make sure seat or seat brackets are mounted securely.
7. Keep seat belts clean and dry.
8. Clean belts only with a soap solution and warm water.
9. Do not use bleach or dye on the belts because this can make the belts weak.
Tire Pressures
For peak performance of your tractor and to control power hop, tire pressures must be checked and adjusted
whenever loads or applications change. Refer to the Tire Pressure and Load Capacity Charts.
Viscous Fan Drive (335, 385 And 435 Models)

During cleaning and maintenance of the engine and radiator, be careful not to cause damage to the viscous fan
drive.
DO NOT use steam or high pressure jets to clean the drive.
DO NOT restrict the fan blade rotation during engine operation.
DO NOT remove the bi-metal coil on the front of the drive.
Periodically check the fan and drive for external damage. See your dealer if service is required.
287
INSPECTION OF TRACKS AND UNDERCARRIAGE
MT05M014
The rubber tracks and undercarriage should be visually inspected daily for damage or fluid leaks.
Occasionally strands of wire may separate from the cables and protrude through the rubber. This is not cause for
alarm. Any exposed cable wire strand should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent further damage to the
cable or belt. Repair cables by clipping or grinding the wire strand so that the wire is below the surface of the belt.
Cuts, gouges and minor scuffing and wear on the drive lugs will not cause operational problems. However, a track
that is missing two or more consecutive drive lugs may cause the track to come off the drive wheel. This could
damage other components on the tractor.
Parts of traction lugs that separate from the belt will not significantly reduce traction.
TRACK ROTATION
If your tractor is operating in special applications such as side hill, scraper work, or anytime accelerated drive lug
wear is noticed, it may be beneficial to rotate the belts from side to side or front to back as required to distribute the
wear pattern evenly and extend track life.
Rotate the tracks from side to side for side wear on the drive lugs. Rotate the tracks from front to rear if heavy wear
is occurring from traction conditions. Contact your dealer for this service.
NOTE: Also refer to Track Alignment in this section. Track alignment should be checked every 100 hours in scraper
operation and every 200 hours in Ag operations.
288
TRACK (BELT) TENSION RELEASE

When removal of the track (belt) is required, the track
tension cylinder pressure must be released. For this
reason a Track Tension Cylinder Drain Valve (P/N
31-3183) is supplied with your QUADTRAC tractor.
If necessary to release track tension, perform the

following steps:
NOTE: Track tension cylinder pressure can be 2900

PSI (19 980 Kpa).
MK97A491
WARNING: **Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can have enough

force to penetrate the skin. Hydraulic fluid may also infect a minor cut or
opening in the skin. If injured by escaping fluid, see a doctor at once.
Serious infection or reaction can result if medical treatment is not given
immediately. Make sure all connections are tight and that hoses and lines
! are in good condition before applying pressure to the system. Relieve all
pressure before disconnecting the lines or performing other work on the
hydraulic system. To find a leak under pressure use a small piece of
cardboard or wood. Never use hands.**
M252A
STEP 1
Remove the cap from the track tension cylinder bleed
valve male nipple.
MK99N022
289
STEP 2
Install the drain valve female coupler assembly on
the cylinder bleed valve male nipple. Place the end
of the drain valve hose into a 1 gallon (3.8 liter) or
larger enclosed container.
NOTE: The coupler may have to be rotated slightly

to line up the locking balls in the female coupler with
the dimples in the male nipple while making the
connection.
MK99N023
STEP 3
Use a wrench to SLOWLY turn the female coupler
CLOCKWISE to open the male nipple valve and
relieve the pressure in the track tension cylinder.
NOTE: At this position the female coupler can not

be disconnected from the male nipple until the
female coupler is rotated COUNTERCLOCKWISE
to close the male nipple.
MK99N024
290
TRACK (BELT) ALIGNMENT

Your QUADTRAC tractor is equipped with a POSITIVE drive track system. Periodic inspections should be done to
ensure the track drive lugs are centered from side to side through the drive wheel and the front and rear idler
wheels to prevent accelerated scuffing of the drive lugs.
Alignment Procedure:
STEP 1
On a flat level surface, drive the tractor 50 to 100 ft
(15 to 30 M) in a straight line. Take your hands off
the steering wheel and depress the inching pedal
and let the tractor COAST to a stop. Turn the key
switch OFF and remove the key from the switch.
MK99M003
STEP 2
The track drive lugs should be centered between
the inside and outside idler wheels. Check the
distance from the tractor drive lug to the inside and
outside idler wheel. The distance from the lug to the
idler wheel must not be less than 1/4 inch (6.35
mm). If the distance is less than 1/4 inch (6.38 mm)
between the drive lug and the INSIDE or OUTSIDE
idler wheel, proceed to Step 3 for adjustment
procedure. If the distance between the drive lug and
the INSIDE idler wheel is less than 1/4 inch (6.35
mm) proceed to Step 4.
MK00E024
291
STEP 3
Loosen the three front and three rear yoke adjusting
plate bolts (1) until you can move the washers. 1
Tur n the adjusting bolt (2) ac cording to the
following:
To move the track inward (towards the tractor),
adjust the yoke plate rearward (towards the rear of
the tractor). 2
To move the track outwards (away from the tractor),
adjust the yoke plate forward (towards the front of
the tractor).
MT06A023
STEP 4
Turn the adjusting bolt (2) one full turn. Tighten the
yoke bracket bolts (1) to a torque of 678 - 793 Nm 1
(500 - 585 lb. ft.). Repeat Steps 1, 2 and 3 as
necessary until the measurement is correct.
MT06A023
292
9 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The following section covers all electrical specifications, fuse and fuse locations, relay
and relay locations and battery requirements on the tractor.
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical System
Type of system.....................................................................................................................12 Volt, Negative Ground
Batteries ...............................................................................Two, 12 Volt, Low Maintenance Type Group Size 4 DLT
Alternator 335 and 535 Standard ...................................................................... Heavy Duty, 12 volt, 150 amp output
385, 435 and 485 Standard (335 and 535 Option)........................................ Heavy Duty, 12 volt, 175 amp output
Starter............................................................................................................................. 24 Volt with Solenoid Switch
FUSES
Fuse/Relay Location
The fuses and relays are located under the electrical compartment cover on the RH side of the operator’s seat.
MK99H161 MK99H164
1. COVER 2. FUSES AND RELAYS
4. DECALS
MK99H174
For specific fuse location and function for your tractor configuration, refer to the decals located on the under side of
the cover.
293
Fuse/Relay Identification - For Deluxe Cab And Powershift Transmission
MT07F137
294
Fuse/Relay Identification - For Deluxe Cab And 24 Speed Transmission
MT07F138
295
Removal And Installation Of Batteries

To remove batteries, disconnect the battery negative (-) cables first (1), then positive (+) second (2). Remove the
battery bracket third (3). When the batteries are installed, make sure the cables are installed on the correct
terminals. This is a 12 volt, negative ground electrical system and must be so connected.
IMPORTANT: Do not start or operate the engine with the electrical system not completely connected.
NOTE: The batteries can be disconnected without affecting any programmed or stored information in the digital
instrument cluster. When the batteries are connected again the instrument cluster will remember and use all stored
information such as Total Area, Equipment Width, Ground Speed Calibration Number, etc.
WARNING: Sparks or flame can cause hydrogen gas in a battery to

explode. To prevent an explosion, do the following:
1. When you disconnect the battery cables, always disconnect the
negative (-) battery cable first.
! 2. When you connect the battery cables, always connect the negative (-)
battery cable last.
3. Do not short circuit the battery posts with metal items.
4. Do not weld, grind or smoke near a battery. M512
1
2 3
1 3
MA03C035
1. NEGATIVE (BLACK) 3. BATTERY BRACKET
2. POSITIVE (RED)
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead

! and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. M-793
When Batteries Are Not In Use

When the tractor is not in use, the batteries will need a charge every six weeks to keep the specific gravity at or
above 1.250. Storage batteries not in use will slowly discharge. A battery that has discharged can freeze at low
ambient temperatures causing damage to the battery and tractor.
296
Battery Troubleshooting
If the battery is discharged and does not indicate some battery voltage, check each battery for an open circuit with
a voltmeter. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable from the battery. Connect the voltmeter between the negative
(-) and the positive (+) battery terminals. If the voltmeter shows no voltage, the battery has an internal open circuit.
Replace the battery. Connecting a battery charger or an auxiliary battery to a battery with an open circuit can
cause a spark inside the battery. The spark can cause a battery explosion.
If the voltmeter shows a voltage, a battery charger or an auxiliary battery can be connected to the discharged
battery.
When using a battery charger, make sure that the charger is turned off before connecting to the battery. Charge the
battery in a well ventilated area only. Do not try to charge a frozen battery.
Battery Charging Or Booster Starting

Boost starting is not recommended and should be avoided whenever possible. If boost starting must be done, use
the following procedures:
WARNING: Battery explosion and/or damage to electrical components

can result from improper connection of booster batteries or charger.
! Connect positive to positive and negative to negative. Externally, battery
acid can cause burns and blindness, and taken internally it is poison.
M146B
WARNING: This is the only safe method to start the tractor engine with
an external power supply. Any other method of starting can cause injury
or death to the operator or other persons. Do not connect auxiliary battery
! cables across the terminals of the starter. Start the engine from the
operator’s seat. After the engine is started disconnect cables in the
reverse order of connection.
M-794
NOTE: The tractor uses a 12 volt electrical system with a negative ground. Making connections to the electrical
system in reversed polarity can cause damage to the electrical system components.
Steiger model tractors have two 12 volt, low

maintenance type, 1000 CCA batteries connected
together in parallel (positive to positive, negative to
negative) for a 12 volt electrical system.
During the engine star ting cycle, batteries are

temporarily connected in SERIES to produce 24 volts
for the starter
WARNING: Always wear eye protection or

full face shield when working on or near
! batteries.
MA03C035
297
Battery Charging Post

A 1 2 vo l t , p o s i t i ve p o s t ( 1 ) i s p r ov i d e d fo r
connecting an external battery charger or for boost
starting if necessary. Before using this post for
charging or boost starting, be sure all accessories
and the key switch is turned off.
WARNING: Never connect 24-volt supply to

! the positive charging post.*
1
MA03C032
Use the following procedures to connect a battery
charger or a 12-volt external power source to the
positive post.
1. Remove the red plastic cover (1) from the
charging post (2).
WARNING: Never connect 24-volt supply to

! the charging post.
2
1
MA03C033
2. Connect the positive cable (1) from the charger
or 12 volt power source to the positive charging
post.
3. Connect the negative cable from the charger or
12 volt power source to the negative (ground)
post (2).
4. If boost starting, while sitting in the operator’s
seat, start the tractor in the normal manner.
5. After the tractor is running disconnect the
cables in the reverse order of connection. Install 2
the plastic covers on the charging post and 1
ground post.
MA03G010
298
GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION
Work Light Adjustments
Cab Roof Lamps

T h e c a b r o o f w o r k l a m p s m ay b e a d j u s t e d
horizontally and vertically as needed. Loosen pivot
bolt (1) for IN/OUT horizontal adjustment. Loosen
pivot bolt (2) for UP/DOWN vertical adjustment as
required. Tighten the pivot bolt securely after
adjusting.
1
2
MK00D196
Rear Fender Lamps

To adjust rear fender work lamps, remove the tail light
assembly and loosen mounting bolt (1) to adjust the 2
lamp from SIDE/SIDE horizontally as needed.
Loosen pivot bolt (2) to adjust the lamps UP/DOWN
vertically as needed. Tighten the bolts securely after
adjustment. Install the tail lamp assembly.
MS00D033
Alternator Charging System

Follow these general rules to prevent damage to the electrical system:
1. Before working on the electrical system, disconnect the battery cables.
2. Do not make a reverse battery connection.
3. When you use an auxiliary battery for starting, connect negative to negative and positive to positive.
4. Do not use a battery charging machine for starting the tractor.
5. Never operate the tractor when the battery cables are disconnected.
6. When you do maintenance on the engine, prevent foreign material from entering the alternator.
Welding
If you must do welding on the tractor or connected implement, disconnect the ground cables from the batteries. Put
the welder ground cable as close as you can to the weld area. Do not put the ground cable where the current can
flow through bearings or along channels with wire harnesses.
NOTE: Damage to alternator or electronic controllers can result and is not considered for warranty if the above
procedure is not followed.
299
10 - SPECIFICATIONS
The following section covers all engine specifications, power train specifications, travel
speeds, weights and dimensions on the tractor.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Diesel Engine
Tractor Model 335 385 435 (M)* 435 (PS)* 485 535
Engine CDC IH CASE IH CASE IH CASE IH CASE IH CUMMINS
Make/Model 6TAA-9004 CURSOR CURSOR CURSOR CURSOR QSX
Type In-Line, Six Cylinder, Four Stroke Cycle
Aspiration Turbo Charged, Air To Air After Cooled
Emission Level (tier) 2 3 3 3 3 3
Firing Order 1-5-3-6-2-4 1-4-2-6-3-5 1-5-3-6-2-4
Bore 4.49 (114) 5.26 inch (135 mm) 6.5 inch (137 mm)
Stroke 5.69 (144.5) 5.85 inch (150 mm) 6.7 inch (168 mm)
Displacement 543 (9.0) 787 cu. inch (12.9 Liter) 912 cu. inch (15.0 Liter)
Compression Ratio 16.6:1 16.5:1 17:1
Cylinder Sleeves
High Idle (no load) 2125-2165 2030-2155 2125-2165 2230-2288
RPM RPM RPM RPM
Rated Speed 2000 RPM 2000 RPM 2000 RPM 2100 RPM
Idle Speed 830-870 RPM 850-900 RPM
Power Rating-HP (kw) 328 (252) 388 (290) 439 (329) 439 (329) 489 (365) 540 (403)
Peak Torque at 1198 1430 (1939) 1614 1614 1801 1891
1400 RPM (1625) (2188) (2188) (2442) (2563)
lb-ft (Nm)
Torque Rise - % 35 40 30 40 40 40
*M - Manual Shift
PS - Power Shift
Engine Lubrication System

Oil Pressure at Idle Speed (Minimum)
335 .............................................................................................................................................10 PSI (69 kPa)
385-435-485..............................................................................................................................44 psi (300 kPa)
535 ...........................................................................................................................................20 PSI (138 kPa)
Oil Pressure at High Idle
335 .....................................................................................................................40 to 50 PSI (276 TO 344 kPa)
385-435-485.............................................................................................................................65 PSI (450 kPa)
535 .............................................................................................................................. 35-40 PSI (240-276 kPa)
Type of System ............................................................................................................................ Pressure and Spray
Fuel System
Fuel Injection Pump (385/435/485 Bosch) .................................................................................................CUMMINS
Fuel Injectors (385/435/485 Bosch)............................................................................................................CUMMINS
Tank Capacity
335 ............................................................................................................................... 200 Gallons (758 Liters)
385-435-485-535 ....................................................................................................... 300 Gallons (1136 Liters)
300
10 - SPECIFICATIONS
Air Intake System

Type ........................................................................................................ Dry Type, Two Stage Aspirator System with
Service Indicator in Instrument Cluster
Transmission - Power Shift
Type .......................................................................... 16 Speed Full Power Shift, 16 Forward and 2 Reverse Speeds
Shift Control.................................................................................... Electronically Controlled, Hydraulically Operated
Transmission - Manual Shift

Type ......................................................................................................... 24 Speeds Forward, 6 Speeds in Reverse,
Constant Mesh, Synchronized Shift
Gear Shift Control................................................................................................................................Lever Actuated
Rangeshift Control...............................................................................................................................Lever Actuated
HI-LO Power Shift Control ........................................................... Actuated Electrically by Switch on Throttle Control
Brakes
Service Brake ....................................................................................Hydraulic Multiple Disc Wet Brake Integral with
Front and Rear Differentials
Park Brake ................................................................................................Electrically Controlled. Spring Applied and
Pressure Released. Integral with
Front/Rear Differentials
Axle Differential And Final Drives

Type .................................................................................................... Bar Type with Integral Wet Brake, Spiral Bevel
Ring/Pinion Gears. Pressure Lubed and Oil Cooled
Final Drive
335 (Std.) .............................................................................................................................. 3-Pinion Planetary
385-435-485 (Std.)................................................................................................................ 4-Pinion Planetary
385-435-485-535 (HD)...................................................................................................... Compound Planetary
385-435-485-535 QUADTRAC .............................................................................................. Inboard Planetary
Total Axle Reduction (Ratio)
335 (Std.) ..................................................................................................................................................25.7:1
385-435-485 (Std.)................................................................................................................................25.396:1
385-435-485-535 (HD)..........................................................................................................................25.193:1
385-435-485-535 QUADTRAC .............................................................................................................12.160:1
Axle Bar Diameter
335 (Std.) ............................................................................................................................4.0 Inch (101.6 mm)
385-435-485-535 (Std.) (335 HD) and QUADTRAC ..............................................................4.5 inch (115 mm)
Axle Bar Length
Wheel..................................................................................................................................120 Inch (3048 mm)
QUADTRAC ...........................................................................................................................90.3 Inch (2294 mm)
Power Takeoff (If Equipped)

PTO Type............................................................................................................................ Live Independent System
Integral with Transmission
Type Clutch.................................................................................................................. Electro/Hydraulically Actuated
Rotation ......................................................................................................................Clockwise from Rear of Tractor
1000 RPM....................................................................................................................20 Splines 1.75 Inch Diameter
Engine Speed for 1000 RPM ......................................................................................................................2000 RPM
301
10 - SPECIFICATIONS
Hydraulic System
Type ............................................................................................................................. Closed Center, Load Sensing,
Pressure Compensating System
Remote Valve
Standard................................................................................................................ Mechanically Operated, Closed
Center Stack Type with Line
Locks on Lift Ports
Optional ......................................................................................................... Electro/Hydraulic Controlled, Closed
Center Stack Type with In-Cab Variable
Flow Control for Each Section Also Line
Locks on all Lift Ports
Standard System Pump Capacity
at 2000 PSI - 2000 RPM ..................................................................................................... 40 GPM (151.4 L/min)
at 2000 PSI - 2100 RPM (535)............................................................................................... 42 GPM (159 L/min)
High Output Pump Capacity (If Equipped)
at 2000 PSI - 2000 RPM ........................................................................................................ 55 GPM (208 L/min)
at 2000 PSI - 2100 RPM (535)............................................................................................... 57 GPM (216 L/min)
Steering .................................................................................. Articulated, Full Priority, Two Double Acting Cylinders
Maximum Steering Pressure ........................................................................................................ 2800 PSI (193 bar)
Couplings................................................................................................................................ISO Standard Couplers
Maximum System Pressure.......................................................................................................... 3050 PSI (210 bar)
TwinFlow Hydraulics (If Equipped)

Type System ................................................................................................................................... PFC Piston Pump
Pump Capacity (at 2000 PSI - 2000 RPM)................................................................................. 35 GPM (132 L/Min)
Remote Valve ..........................................................................................................Two-Electro/Hydraulic Controlled
Couplers ..................................................................................................................... ISO Standard 7241-1 Series A
Hitch System (If Equipped)

Type Control ................................................................................................................................................ Electronic
Type Valve .........................................................................................................Three Position - Lift, Hold and Lower
Type Draft Arms.............................................................................. Rigid, Swing Type with Manual Float Adjustment
Type Hitch..........................................................................................................................Three Point Category IV-N
Hitch Coupler (adjustable) ............................................................................................................ Category III or IV-N
Lift Capacity (OECD Static)
24 Inch (610 mm) Back
335 ............................................................................................................. 16 000 lb. (7248 Kg)
385-435-485-535........................................................................................ 19 620 lb. (8900 Kg)
Quad Track.................................................................................................. 19 728 lb. (8949 Kg)
Drawbar
Type ...............................................................................................................Yoke Type, Side Swing and Extendable
Pin Diameter ................................................................................................................................2.0 Inch (51 mm)
Pin Length ..................................................................................................................................8.7 Inch (220 mm)
Static Load Rating (vertical)
Standard
335 ........................................................................................................................................ 5300 lb. (2400 Kg)
385-435-485-535................................................................................................................... 6000 lb. (2722 Kg)
Optional HD............................................................................................................................ 11 000 lb. (4983 Kg)
302
10 - SPECIFICATIONS
Track And Undercarriage (If Equipped)

Track Drive Type .................................................................................................Independent, 4-Track Positive Drive,
...................................................................................................................................... Self Tensioning Track System
Track Undercarriage ................................................. Integral Center Pivot Design, 10 Degrees Up/Down Oscillation
Track Type......................................................................................................................... Self Cleaning, Rubber Belt
Track Width
Standard......................................................................................................................................30 inch (762 mm)
Optional .......................................................................................................................................36 inch (914 mm)
Track Length ................................................................................................................................252 inch (6400 mm)
Ground Surface Length .............................................................................................................72 inch (1829 mm)
Track Gauge (Center to Center) ....................................................................................................88 inch (2235 mm)
Ground Contact Area with 30 inch track (each)........................................................ 2160 Square Inch (54864 mm2)
Total.................................................................................................................... 8640 Square Inch (219456 mm2)
Ground Pressure (w 1/2 tank fuel)
30 inch Track ..............................................................................................................................5.7 PSI (39.2 kPa)
36 Inch Track .................................................................................................................................4.8 PSI (33 kPa)
303
10 - SPECIFICATIONS
TRACTOR WEIGHTS
Approximate Base Shipping Weights

335 with 20.8 R-42 Duals ....................................................................................................... 29 760 lbs (13 499 Kg)
385-435 MS with 20.8 R42 Duals........................................................................................... 35 075 lbs (15 889 Kg)
385HD-435 with 620/70 R42 Duals ........................................................................................ 38 340 lbs (17 368 Kg)
485-535 with 800/70 R38 Duals ............................................................................................. 42 369 lbs (19 193 Kg)
385-435 QUADTRAC ............................................................................................................... 48 150 lbs (21 812kg)
485-535 QUADTRAC ............................................................................................................... 51 000 lbs (23 133kg)
NOTE: Estimated base shipping weights listed are with 20 gal. (76 L) of fuel, less operator, no TPH, PTO or other
operational equipment.
Approximate Component Weights

Three Point Hitch .............................................................................................................................. 2097 lb. (950 kg)
Hitch Coupler...................................................................................................................................... 458 lb. (207 kg)
PTO System ....................................................................................................................................... 700 lb. (318 kg)
NOTE: Calculate fuel weight at 7.2 lb. (3.3 kg) per gallon.
Maximum Tractor Operating Weight

The maximum recommended tractor operating weight includes the operator, tractor, tractor equipment and ballast.
The maximum weight is with a 60% front and 40% rear static weight distribution.
Maximum Tractor Operating Weight

335 ..................................................................................................................................... 39 000 lbs (17 690 Kg)
385 ..................................................................................................................................... 45 600 lbs (20 720 Kg)
435 ..................................................................................................................................... 51 600 lbs (23 426 Kg)
485- 535............................................................................................................................. 54 000 lbs (24 561 Kg)
385-435-485-535 QUADTRAC ........................................................................................... 54 000 lbs (24 516 kg)
385-435-485-535 QUADTRAC WITH TPH OR PTO .......................................................... 58 000 lbs (26 308 kg)
NOTE: The maximum tractor operating weight for single tire operation is limited to the maximum tire load capacity
for single wheel operation (see tire manufacturers data book) and must not exceed the maximum tractor operating
weight.
304
10 - SPECIFICATIONS
APPROXIMATE TRAVEL SPEEDS (MPH)

SPEED CHART: Steiger 335 - Power Shift Transmission
All Speeds in MPH at 2000 Engine RPM
Steiger 335
380/90R54 - R1W
480/80R46 - R1W
520/85R46 - R1W
620/70R42 - R1W
650/85R38 - R1W
710/70R38 - R1W
710/70R42 - R1W
800/70R38 - R1W
900/50R42 - R1W
520/85R42 - R1
480/80R42-R1
18.4R42 - R1
20.8R42 - R2
Tire Size
Rolling Circumference (mm) 5570 5601 5793 5905 6160 5825 6144 5841 6126 5761 6176 6145 5841
Rolling Radius (mm) 886.5 891.5 922.0 939.8 980.4 927.1 977.9 929.6 975.0 916.9 983.0 978.0 929.6
Forward Gears 1 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.5 2.6 2.5 2.6 2.5 2.7 2.6 2.5
2 2.9 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.0 3.2 3.0 3.2 3.0 3.2 3.2 3.0
3 3.5 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.6 3.8 3.6 3.8 3.6 3.9 3.8 3.6
4 4.2 4.2 4.4 4.4 4.6 4.4 4.6 4.4 4.6 4.3 4.6 4.6 4.4
5 4.8 4.8 5.0 5.1 5.3 5.0 5.3 5.0 5.3 5.0 5.3 5.3 5.0
6 5.3 5.3 5.5 5.6 5.8 5.5 5.8 5.5 5.8 5.5 5.9 5.8 5.5
7 5.8 5.8 6.0 6.1 6.4 6.1 6.4 6.1 6.4 6.0 6.4 6.4 6.1
8 6.4 6.4 6.6 6.7 7.0 6.7 7.0 6.7 7.0 6.6 7.1 7.0 6.7
9 7.0 7.0 7.3 7.4 7.7 7.3 7.7 7.3 7.7 7.2 7.8 7.7 7.3
10 7.7 7.7 8.0 8.1 8.5 8.0 8.5 8.1 8.5 8.0 8.5 8.5 8.1
11 8.4 8.5 8.8 8.9 9.3 8.8 9.3 8.8 9.3 8.7 9.3 9.3 8.8
12 9.3 9.3 9.6 9.8 10.2 9.7 10.2 9.7 10.2 9.6 10.3 10.2 9.7
13 10.6 10.7 11.1 11.3 11.8 11.1 11.7 11.1 11.7 11.0 11.8 11.7 11.1
14 12.8 12.9 13.3 13.6 14.2 13.4 14.1 13.4 14.1 13.2 14.2 14.1 13.4
15 15.5 15.6 16.1 16.4 17.1 16.2 17.1 16.2 17.0 16.0 17.1 17.1 16.2
16 18.6 18.7 19.4 19.7 20.6 19.5 20.5 19.5 20.5 19.3 20.7 20.5 19.5
Reverse Gears 1 3.6 3.6 3.8 3.8 4.0 3.8 4.0 3.8 4.0 3.7 4.0 4.0 3.8
2 8.0 8.1 8.3 8.5 8.9 8.4 8.8 8.4 8.8 8.3 8.9 8.8 8.4
NOTE: Shifting from F16-LO to F16-HI, the engine speed exceeds the high idle setting by 200 RPM, providing
approximately 40 KPH (24 MPH) road travel speed (dependent on tire size).
305
10 - SPECIFICATIONS
APPROXIMATE TRAVEL SPEEDS (KPH)

SPEED CHART: Steiger 335 - Power Shift Transmission
All Speeds in KPH at 2000 Engine RPM
Steiger 335
380/90R54 - R1W
480/80R46 - R1W
520/85R46 - R1W
620/70R42 - R1W
650/85R38 - R1W
710/70R38 - R1W
710/70R42 - R1W
800/70R38 - R1W
900/50R38 - R1W
520/85R42 - R1
480/80R42-R1
18.4R42 - R1
20.8R42 - R2
Tire Size
Forward Gears 1 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.1 4.3 4.0 4.2 4.0 4.2 4.0 4.3 4.2 4.0
2 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 5.1 4.8 5.1 4.9 5.1 4.8 5.1 5.1 4.9
3 5.6 5.6 5.8 5.9 6.2 5.9 6.2 5.9 6.2 5.8 6.2 6.2 5.9
4 6.7 6.8 7.0 7.1 7.5 7.0 7.4 7.1 7.4 7.0 7.5 7.4 7.1
5 7.7 7.8 8.0 8.2 8.6 8.1 8.5 8.1 8.5 8.0 8.6 8.5 8.1
6 8.5 8.6 8.8 9.0 9.4 8.9 9.4 8.9 9.4 8.8 9.4 9.4 8.9
7 9.3 9.4 9.7 9.9 10.3 9.7 10.3 9.8 10.3 9.6 10.3 10.3 9.8
8 10.2 10.3 10.7 10.9 11.3 10.7 11.3 10.7 11.3 10.6 11.4 11.3 10.7
9 11.3 11.3 11.7 11.9 12.5 11.8 12.4 11.8 12.4 11.6 12.5 12.4 11.8
10 12.4 12.4 12.9 13.1 13.7 12.9 13.6 13.0 13.6 12.8 13.7 13.6 13.0
11 13.6 13.6 14.1 14.4 15.0 14.2 15.0 14.2 14.9 14.0 15.0 15.0 14.2
12 14.9 15.0 15.5 15.8 16.5 15.6 16.4 15.6 16.4 15.4 16.5 16.4 15.6
13 17.1 17.2 17.8 18.1 18.9 17.9 18.9 17.9 18.8 17.7 19.0 18.9 17.9
14 20.6 20.7 21.4 21.8 22.8 21.6 22.7 21.6 22.7 21.3 22.8 22.7 21.6
15 24.9 25.0 25.9 26.4 27.5 26.0 27.5 26.1 27.4 25.7 27.6 27.5 26.1
16 30.0 30.1 31.2 31.8 33.2 31.3 33.1 31.4 33.0 31.0 33.2 33.1 31.4
Reverse Gears 1 5.8 5.9 6.1 6.2 6.4 6.1 6.4 6.1 6.4 6.0 6.5 6.4 6.1
2 12.9 13.0 13.4 13.7 14.2 13.5 14.2 13.5 14.2 13.3 14.3 14.2 13.5
306
10 - SPECIFICATIONS

SPEED CHART: Steiger 385-535 - Power Shift Transmission
Steiger 385-535
480/80R46 - R1W
520/85R46 - R1W
620/70R42 - R1W
650/85R38 - R1W
710/70R38 - R1W
710/70R42 - R1W
800/70R38 - R1W
900/50R42 - R1W
520/85R42 - R1
480/80R42-R1
18.4R42 - R1
20.8R42 - R2
19T Track
Tire Size
Forward Gears 1 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.5 2.7 2.6 2.7 2.5 2.7 2.7 2.6 2.6
2 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.2 3.1 3.2 3.0 3.3 3.2 3.1 3.2
3 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.7 3.9 3.7 3.9 3.7 3.9 3.9 3.7 3.8
4 4.3 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.5 4.7 4.5 4.7 4.4 4.7 4.7 4.5 4.6
5 4.9 4.9 5.1 5.2 5.1 5.4 5.1 5.4 5.1 5.4 5.4 5.1 5.3
6 5.4 5.4 5.6 5.7 5.6 5.9 5.6 5.9 5.6 6.0 5.9 5.6 5.8
7 5.9 5.9 6.1 6.3 6.2 6.5 6.2 6.5 6.1 6.5 6.5 6.2 6.4
8 6.5 6.5 6.7 6.9 6.8 7.2 6.8 7.1 6.7 7.2 7.2 6.8 7.0
9 7.1 7.2 7.4 7.6 7.5 7.9 7.5 7.8 7.4 7.9 7.9 7.5 7.7
10 7.8 7.9 8.1 8.3 8.2 8.6 8.2 8.6 8.1 8.7 8.6 8.2 8.5
11 8.6 8.6 8.9 9.1 9.0 9.5 9.0 9.4 8.9 9.5 9.5 9.0 9.3
12 9.4 9.5 9.8 10.0 9.9 10.4 9.9 10.4 9.8 10.5 10.4 9.9 10.2
13 10.8 10.9 11.3 11.5 11.3 11.9 11.4 11.9 11.2 12.0 12.0 11.4 11.7
14 13.0 13.1 13.6 13.8 13.6 14.4 13.7 14.3 13.5 14.5 14.4 13.7 14.1
15 15.8 15.8 16.4 16.7 16.5 17.4 16.5 17.3 16.3 17.5 17.4 16.5 17.0
16 19.0 19.1 19.7 20.1 19.8 20.9 19.9 20.9 19.6 21.0 20.9 19.9 20.5
Reverse Gears 1 3.7 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.9 4.1 3.9 4.1 3.8 4.1 4.1 3.9 4.0
2 8.2 8.2 8.5 8.6 8.5 9.0 8.6 9.0 8.4 9.0 9.0 8.6 8.8
307
10 - SPECIFICATIONS

SPEED CHART: Steiger 385-535 - Power Shift Transmission
Steiger 385-535
480/80R46 - R1W
520/85R46 - R1W
620/70R42 - R1W
650/85R38 - R1W
710/70R38 - R1W
710/70R42 - R1W
800/70R38 - R1W
900/50R42 - R1W
520/85R42 - R1
480/80R42-R1
18.4R42 - R1
20.8R42 - R2
19T Track
Tire Size
Forward Gears 1 3.9 3.9 4.1 4.2 4.1 4.3 4.1 4.3 4.1 4.3 4.3 4.1 4.2
2 4.7 4.7 4.9 5.0 4.9 5.2 5.0 5.2 4.9 5.2 5.2 5.0 5.1
3 5.7 5.7 5.9 6.0 6.0 6.3 6.0 6.3 5.9 6.3 6.3 6.0 6.2
4 6.9 6.9 7.1 7.3 7.2 7.6 7.2 7.6 7.1 7.6 7.6 7.2 7.4
5 7.9 7.9 8.2 8.4 8.2 8.7 8.3 8.7 8.2 8.7 8.7 8.3 8.5
6 8.7 8.7 9.0 9.2 9.1 9.6 9.1 9.5 9.0 9.6 9.6 9.1 9.4
7 9.5 9.6 9.9 10.1 9.9 10.5 10.0 10.4 9.8 10.5 10.5 10.0 10.3
8 10.4 10.5 10.9 11.1 10.9 11.5 10.9 11.5 10.8 11.6 11.5 10.9 11.3
9 11.5 11.5 11.9 12.2 12.0 12.7 12.0 12.6 11.9 12.7 12.7 12.0 12.4
10 12.6 12.7 13.1 13.4 13.2 13.9 13.2 13.9 13.0 14.0 13.9 13.2 13.6
11 13.8 13.9 14.4 14.6 14.5 15.2 14.5 15.2 14.3 15.3 15.2 14.5 14.9
12 15.2 15.3 15.8 16.1 15.9 16.7 15.9 16.7 15.7 16.8 16.7 15.9 16.4
13 17.4 17.5 18.1 18.5 18.2 19.2 18.3 19.2 18.0 19.3 19.2 18.3 18.8
14 21.0 21.1 21.8 22.3 22.0 23.2 22.0 23.1 21.7 23.3 23.2 22.0 22.7
15 25.4 25.5 26.4 26.9 26.5 28.0 26.6 27.9 26.2 28.1 28.0 26.6 27.4
16 30.5 30.7 31.8 32.4 31.9 33.7 32.0 33.6 31.6 33.9 33.7 32.0 33.0
Reverse Gears 1 5.9 6.0 6.2 6.3 6.2 6.6 6.2 6.5 6.1 6.6 6.6 6.2 6.4
2 13.1 13.2 13.7 13.9 13.7 14.5 13.8 14.4 13.6 14.6 14.5 13.8 14.2
NOTE: Shifting wheel tractors from F16-LO to F16-HI, the engine speed exceeds the high idle setting by 200
RPM, providing approximately 40 KPH (24 MPH) road travel speed (dependent on tire size).
308
10 - SPECIFICATIONS

SPEED CHART: Steiger 335 - 24 Speed Manual Shift Transmission
All Speeds at 2000 Engine RPM
Model Steiger 335
Axle
Reduction 25.672
380/90R54 GOODYEAR
520/85R46 GOODYEAR
900-50R42 DT830-R1W
620/70R42 DT820 R1W
710/70R38 DT820 R1W
710/70R38 MICHELIN
18.4R42 DTR-R1
18.4R46 DTR-R1
20.8R42 DTR-R1
Tire
Size
Rolling 5601 5898 5819 6165 6150 5850 5780 6080 5834
Circ.
Gear LO - HI LO - HI LO - HI LO - HI LO - HI LO - HI LO - HI LO - HI LO - HI
A1 2.4 - 2.5 2.5 - 2.7 2.5 - 2.6 2.6 - 2.8 2.6 - 2.8 2.5 - 2.7 2.4 - 2.6 2.6 - 2.8 2.5 - 2.7
A2 3.2 - 3.4 3.4 - 3.6 3.3 - 3.6 3.5 - 3.8 3.5 - 3.8 3.4 - 3.6 3.3 - 3.6 3.5 - 3.7 3.3 - 3.6
A3 4.4 - 4.7 4.6 - 5.0 4.6 - 4.9 4.8 - 5.2 4.8 - 5.2 4.6 - 4.9 4.5 - 4.9 4.8 - 5.1 4.6 - 4.9
B1 4.0 - 4.3 4.2 - 4.5 4.1 - 4.4 4.4 - 4.7 4.4 - 4.7 4.2 - 4.5 4.1 - 4.4 4.3 - 4.6 4.1 - 4.4
B2 5.4 - 5.8 5.7 - 6.1 5.6 - 6.0 5.9 - 6.4 5.9 - 6.3 5.6 - 6.0 5.6 - 6.0 5.8 - 6.3 5.6 - 6.0
B3 7.4 - 7.9 7.8 - 8.3 7.6 - 8.2 8.1 - 8.7 8.1 - 8.7 7.7 - 8.2 7.6 - 8.2 8.0 - 8.6 7.7 - 8.2
C1 6.3 - 6.8 6.6 - 7.1 6.5 - 7.0 6.9 - 7.4 6.9 - 7.4 6.6 - 7.1 6.5 - 7.0 6.8 - 7.3 6.6 - 7.0
C2 8.5 - 9.1 9.0 - 9.6 8.8 - 9.5 9.4 - 10.1 9.3 - 10.0 8.9 - 9.5 8.8 - 9.4 9.2 - 9.9 8.9 - 9.5
C3 11.6 - 12.5 12.3 - 13.2 12.1 - 13.0 12.8 - 13.8 12.8 - 13.7 12.2 - 13.1 12.0 - 12.9 12.6 - 13.6 12.1 - 13.0
D1 9.9 - 10.6 10.4 - 11.2 10.3 - 11.0 10.9 - 11.7 10.9 - 11.7 10.3 - 11.1 10.2 - 11.0 10.7 - 11.5 10.3 - 11.1
D2 13.4 - 14.4 14.1 - 15.1 13.9 - 14.9 14.7 - 15.8 14.7 - 15.8 14.0 - 15.0 13.8 - 14.8 14.5 - 15.6 13.9 - 15.0
D3 18.3 - 19.6 19.3 - 20.7 19.0 - 20.4 20.1 - 21.6 20.1 - 21.6 19.1 - 20.5 18.9 - 20.3 19.9 - 21.3 19.1 - 20.5
AR 3.4 - 3.6 3.6 - 3.8 3.5 - 3.8 3.7 - 4.0 3.7 - 4.0 3.5 - 3.8 3.5 - 3.7 3.7 - 3.9 3.5 - 3.8
BR 5.7 - 6.1 6.0 - 6.4 5.9 - 6.3 6.2 - 6.7 6.2 - 6.7 5.9 - 6.4 5.8 - 6.3 6.2 - 6.6 5.9 - 6.3
CR 19.0 - 9.6 9.4 - 10.1 9.3 - 10.0 9.9 - 10.6 9.8 - 10.6 9.4 - 10.0 9.2 - 9.9 9.7 - 10.4 9.3 - 10.0
309
10 - SPECIFICATIONS

SPEED CHART: Steiger HD385-435 24-Speed Manual Shift Transmission
Steiger HD385-435
480/80R46 - R1W
520/85R46 - R1W
620/70R42 - R1W
650/85R38 - R1W
710/70R38 - R1W
710/70R42 - R1W
800/70R38 - R1W
900/50R42 - R1W
520/85R42 - R1
480/80R42-R1
18.4R42 - R1
20.8R42 - R2
Tire Size
Rolling Circum.
5570 5601 5793 5905 5825 6144 5841 6126 5761 6176 6145 5841
(mm)
Rolling Radius
886.5 891.5 922.0 939.8 927.1 977.9 929.6 975.0 916.9 983.0 978.0 929.6
(mm)
Gear LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI
A1 2.4 2.6 2.4 2.6 2.5 2.7 2.5 2.7 2.5 2.7 2.7 2.8 2.5 2.7 2.6 2.8 2.5 2.7 2.6 2.8 2.7 2.8 2.5 2.7
A2 3.3 3.5 3.3 3.5 3.4 3.6 3.4 3.7 3.4 3.6 3.6 3.8 3.4 3.7 3.6 3.8 3.4 3.6 3.6 3.8 3.6 3.9 3.4 3.7
A3 4.4 4.8 4.5 4.8 4.6 5.0 4.7 5.1 4.7 5.0 4.9 5.3 4.7 5.0 4.9 5.3 4.6 5.0 4.9 5.2 4.9 5.3 4.7 5.0
B1 4.0 4.3 4.1 4.4 4.2 4.5 4.3 4.6 4.2 4.5 4.4 4.8 4.2 4.5 4.4 4.8 4.2 4.5 4.4 4.7 4.4 4.8 4.2 4.5
B2 5.5 5.9 5.5 5.9 5.7 6.1 5.8 6.2 5.7 6.1 6.0 6.5 5.7 6.1 6.0 6.4 5.7 6.1 6.0 6.4 6.0 6.5 5.7 6.1
B3 7.5 8.0 7.5 8.0 7.8 8.3 7.9 8.5 7.8 8.4 8.2 8.8 7.8 8.4 8.2 8.8 7.7 8.3 8.1 8.7 8.2 8.8 7.8 8.4
C1 6.4 6.8 6.4 6.9 6.6 7.1 6.8 7.3 6.7 7.2 7.0 7.5 6.7 7.2 7.0 7.5 6.6 7.1 7.0 7.5 7.0 7.5 6.7 7.2
C2 8.6 9.3 8.7 9.3 9.0 9.6 9.1 9.8 9.0 9.7 9.5 10. 9.0 9.7 9.5 10. 9.0 9.6 9.4 10. 9.5 10. 9.0 9.7
2 2 1 2
C3 11. 12. 11. 12. 12. 13. 12. 13. 12. 13. 13. 14. 12. 13. 13. 13. 12. 13. 12. 13. 13. 14. 12. 13.
8 7 9 7 3 2 5 4 3 2 0 0 4 3 0 9 2 1 9 8 0 0 4 3
D1 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. 11. 10. 11. 10. 11. 11. 11. 10. 11. 11. 11. 10. 11. 10. 11. 11. 11. 10. 11.
0 8 1 8 4 2 6 4 5 2 1 9 5 3 0 8 4 2 9 7 1 9 5 3
D2 13. 14. 13. 14. 14. 15. 14. 15. 14. 15. 15. 16. 14. 15. 14. 16. 14, 15. 14. 15. 15. 16. 14. 15.
6 5 6 6 1 1 4 4 2 2 0 0 2 3 9 0 1 1 8 9 0 0 2 3
D3 18. 19. 18. 20. 19. 20. 19. 21. 19. 20. 20. 21. 19. 20. 20. 21. 19. 20. 20. 21. 20. 22. 19. 20.
5 9 6 0 3 7 7 1 4 8 5 9 4 9 4 9 2 6 2 7 5 0 4 9
AR 3.4 3.7 3.4 3.7 3.6 3.8 3.6 3.9 3.6 3.8 3.8 4.1 3.6 3.9 3.8 4.0 3.6 3.8 3.7 4.0 3.8 4.1 3.6 3.9
BR 5.7 6.2 5.8 6.2 6.0 6.4 6.1 6.5 6.0 6.4 6.3 6.8 6.0 6.5 6.3 6.8 6.0 6.4 6.3 6.7 6.3 6.8 6.0 6.5
CR 9.1 9.7 9.1 9.8 9.4 10. 9.6 10. 9.5 10. 10. 10. 9.5 10. 10. 10. 9.4 10. 9.9 10. 10. 10. 9.5 10.
1 3 2 0 8 2 0 7 1 6 0 8 2
310
10 - SPECIFICATIONS

SPEED CHART: 24 Speed Manual Shift Transmission
Steiger HD385-435
480/80R46 - R1W
520/85R46 - R1W
620/70R42 - R1W
650/85R38 - R1W
710/70R38 - R1W
710/70R42 - R1W
800/70R38 - R1W
900/50R42 - R1W
520/85R42 - R1
480/80R42-R1
18.4R42 - R1
20.8R42 - R2
Tire Size
Rolling Circum.
5570 5601 5793 5905 5825 6144 5841 6126 5761 6176 6145 5841
(mm)
Rolling Radius
886.5 891.5 922.0 939.8 927.1 977.9 929.6 975.0 916.9 983.0 978.0 929.6
(mm)
Gear LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI LO HI
A1 3.9 4.2 3.9 4.2 4.0 4.3 4.1 4.4 4.0 4.3 4.3 4.6 4.1 4.4 4.3 4.6 4.0 4.3 4.2 4.5 4.3 4.6 4.1 4.4
A2 5.2 5.6 5.3 5.6 5.4 5.8 5.5 6.0 5.5 5.9 5.8 6.2 5.5 5.9 5.8 6.2 5.4 5.8 5.7 6.1 5.8 6.2 5.5 5.9
A3 7.2 7.7 7.2 7.7 7.4 8.0 7.6 8.1 7.5 8.0 7.9 8.5 7.5 8.1 7.9 8.5 7.4 8.0 7.8 8.4 7.9 8.5 7.5 8.1
B1 6.5 7.0 6.5 7.0 6.8 7.2 6.9 7.4 6.8 7.3 7.2 7.7 6.8 7.3 7.1 7.7 6.7 7.2 7.1 7.6 7.2 7.7 6.8 7.3
B2 8.8 9.4 8.8 9.5 9.1 9.8 9.3 10. 9.2 9.9 9.7 10. 9.2 9.9 9.7 10. 9.1 9.8 9.6 10. 9.7 10. 9.2 9.9
0 7 4 3 4
B3 12. 12. 12. 13. 12. 13. 12. 13. 12. 13. 13. 14. 12. 13. 13. 14. 12. 13. 13. 14. 13. 14. 12. 13.
0 9 1 0 5 4 7 7 6 5 2 2 6 5 2 2 5 4 1 1 2 2 6 5
C1 10. 11. 10. 11. 10. 11. 10. 11. 10. 11. 11. 12. 10. 11. 11. 12. 10. 11. 11. 12. 11. 12. 10. 11.
3 0 3 1 7 5 9 7 7 5 3 1 8 5 3 1 7 4 2 0 3 1 8 5
C2 13. 14. 14. 15. 14. 15. 14. 15. 14. 15. 15. 16. 14. 15. 15. 16. 14. 15. 15. 16. 15. 16. 14. 15.
9 9 0 0 4 5 7 8 5 6 3 4 6 6 3 4 4 5 2 3 3 4 6 6
C3 19. 20. 19. 20. 19. 21. 20. 21. 19. 21. 20. 22. 19. 21. 20. 22. 19. 21. 20. 22. 21. 22. 19. 21.
0 4 1 5 8 2 1 6 9 3 9 5 9 4 9 4 7 1 7 2 0 5 9 4
D1 16. 17. 16. 17. 16. 18. 17. 18. 16. 18. 17. 19. 16. 18. 17. 19. 16. 18. 17. 18. 17. 19. 16. 18.
1 3 2 4 8 0 1 3 9 1 8 1 9 1 7 0 7 0 6 9 8 1 9 1
D2 21. 23. 21. 23. 22. 24. 23. 24. 22. 24. 24. 25. 22. 24. 24. 25. 22. 24. 23. 25. 24. 25. 22. 24.
8 4 9 5 7 3 1 8 8 5 1 8 9 5 0 7 6 3 8 6 1 8 9 5
D3 29. 32. 30. 32. 31. 33. 31. 33. 31. 33. 32. 35. 31. 33. 32. 35. 31. 33. 32. 35. 32. 35. 31. 33.
8 0 0 2 0 3 6 9 2 5 9 3 1 6 8 2 0 2 6 0 9 3 3 6
AR 5.5 5.9 5.5 5.9 5.7 6.2 5.8 6.3 5.8 6.2 6.1 6.5 5.8 6.2 6.1 6.5 5.7 6.1 6.0 6.5 6.1 6.5 5.8 6.2
BR 9.2 9.9 9.3 10. 9.6 10. 9.8 10. 9.7 10. 10. 10. 9.7 10. 10. 10. 9.6 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. 9.7 10.
0 3 5 4 2 9 4 2 9 3 1 8 2 9 4
CR 14. 15. 14. 15. 15. 16. 15. 16. 15. 16. 16. 17. 15. 16. 16. 17. 15. 16. 16. 17. 16. 17. 15. 16.
6 7 7 8 2 3 5 6 3 4 1 3 3 4 1 2 2 3 0 1 1 3 3 4
311
10 - SPECIFICATIONS
APPROXIMATE OVERALL MEASUREMENTS

Steiger 335, 385, 435, 485 and 535 Wheel Tractors
A
B
J
K
H
C
F G D
E
MA99G016
335 With 20.8R42 Tires/Wheels, Static Loaded Radius 869mm (33.9 inch)
A. 96.0 inch (2438 mm) F. 86.0 inch (2192 mm)
B. 69.0 inch (1754 mm) G.139.0 inch (3531 mm)
C. 37.0 inch (929 mm) H. 17.0 inch (443 mm)
D. 141.0 inch (3592 mm) J. 137.0 inch (3476 mm)
E. 276.0 inch (7010 mm) K. 142.0 inch (3608 mm)
General Dimensions
Frame Articulation: 42 Degrees Left/Right
Frame Oscillation: 11 Degrees (22 Degrees Total)
*Steering Turn Radius: 15.1 ft (4.6 m)
*Centerline of rear axle.
385/435/485/535 With 710-70R42 Tires/Wheels, Static Loaded Radius 869mm (33.9 inch)
A. 98.0 inch (2488 mm) F. 91.0 inch (2320 mm)
B. 69.0 inch (1753 mm) G. 154.0 inch (3911 mm)
C. 44.0 inch (1116 mm) (380-430) H. 23.6 inch (600 mm)
C. 52.0 inch (1321 mm) (480-530)
D. 150.6 inch (3827 mm) J. 143.0 inch (3631 mm)
E. 298.0 inch (7558 mm) K. 155.6 inch (3952 mm)
General Dimensions
Frame Articulation: ± 42 Degrees Left/Right
Frame Oscillation: ± 13 Degrees (26 Degrees Total)
*Steering Turn Radius: 16.7 ft (5.09 m)
Shipping Width: 10.0 ft (3.0 m)
312
10 - SPECIFICATIONS
APPROXIMATE OVERALL MEASUREMENTS

Steiger 385, 435, 485 and 535 QUADTRAC
A
B
K
L M
J
C
C
G H D
F E
MA99G015
STX 385-435-485-535 QUADTRAC

A. 98.0 inch (2487 mm) G. 91.0 inch (2323 mm)
B. 66.0 inch (1688 mm) H. 154.0 inch (3912 mm) Standard
C. 44.0 inch (1116 mm) (380-430) J. 18.0 inch (471 mm)
C. 52.0 inch (1321 mm) (480-530)
D. 88.0 inch (2235 mm) K. 143.0 inch (3671 mm)
E. 117.0 inch (2997 mm) L. 150.0 inch (3842 mm)
F. 295.0 inch (7558 mm) M. 81.2 inch (2084 mm)
General Dimensions
*Turning Radius: 18.8 FT (5.7 m)
Frame Articulation: ± 38 Degrees Left/Right
Frame Oscillation: ± 13 Degrees (26 Degrees Total)
Undercarriage Oscillation: ±10 Degrees Up/Down
313
DETAIL INDEX
Numerics B
10 Hours Or Daily Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Ballast
1000 Hour Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
1500 Hour Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
24-Speed Transmission Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Using Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
250 Hour Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4000 Hour Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
50 Hour Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 273 Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
500 Hour Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
5th Remote When Not In Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 295
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Battery
Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Cables And Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
6000 Hour Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Charging Or Booster Starting . . . . . . . . . . . 296
6th And 7th Electric Remote Valves Remote Charging Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6th-7th/Twin Flow Electric Remote Valves . . . . 52 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Before Starting The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
A
Bias Ply Tire Pressure And Load Capacity
Air
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Discharge Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Blower Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 59
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Business Band Radio Radio Ready . . . . . . . . . 10
Filter Service Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Induction System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Alternator Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 C
Approximate Overall Measurements . . . .311, 312 Cab
Approximate Travel Speeds Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
KPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305, 307, 310 Outside Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
MPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 306, 308, 309 Recirculation Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Armrest Console Roof Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Control Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Cab Door
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Articulation Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cylinder Locking Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Cab Windows, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Only Steering Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Category
Steering Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 III and IV-N Implement Dimensions . . . . . . 146
Steering Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 IV-N to Category III Conversion . . . . . . . . . 152
As Required Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Center
Auto Console Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Field Operation (AFO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 HID Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Guidance Roading Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Changing
Road Operation (ARO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Tire Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Shift Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 U.S. Standard or Metric Display Units . . . . . . 72
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Chart
Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Bias Ply Tire Pressure And Load Capacity . 199
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Conventional Size Radial Tire Pressure &
Autoshift Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Load Capacity-Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Auxiliary Conventional Size Radial Tire Pressure &
Auto Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Load Capacity-U.S. Standard . . . . . . . . . 199
Auto Mode Switch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Lubrication And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Cab Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . 182 Metric Size Radial Tire Pressure and Load
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Capacity-Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Implement Power Connections . . . . . . . . . 181 Metric Size Radial Tire Pressure and Load
Axle Capacity-U.S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Lube Circuit Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Speed - KPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305, 307, 310
Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Speed - MPH . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 306, 308, 309
Axle/Hydraulic Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
314
DETAIL INDEX
Chemical Tank Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Displays
Reference Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Critical Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Chemicals - Hazardous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Level 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Cleaning Level 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Cab Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Non-Critical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Engine Primary Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Warning Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Clutch Pedal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Door
Cold Latch and Hinge Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Temperature Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Lock and Hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Weather Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Draft Arm Mechanical Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Combination Steering Operation . . . . . . . . . . 117 Drawbar
Compressor Belt Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Drop Pin Hammerstrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Connecting Heavy Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
PTO Driven Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Load Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Remote Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
The Implement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Standard With Three Point Hitch . . . . . . . . 142
Connector Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Standard Without Three Point Hitch . . . . . . 142
Constant Engine Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 136 Dual Hub Wheel
Control Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Blower Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Defog/Dehumidify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Dual Wheel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Hitch Drop Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 158 Dynamic Rolling Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74
Hitch Upper Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 158
Mode Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 E
Power Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Electric Remote
Slip Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47, 159 Control Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Valve Function Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Controls Electrical Fuses and Relay Location . . . . . . . . . 63
24-Speed Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Electronic
Armrest Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 End of Row Step Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Hitch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Electronic Remote Valve Function . . . . . . . . 45 End Of Row System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Hydraulic Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Engine
Hydraulic Valve Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Accessory Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 240
Right Hand Armrest Console . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Air Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 255
Conventional Size Radial Tire Pressure & Load Air Induction System . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 239
Capacity Chart Air Tubing Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 254
Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Before Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 102
U.S. Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Compression Brake . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 136
Coolant Compression Brake Switch . . . . . . .. .. . . . . 49
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Constant Speed Adjust Switch . . . .. .. . . . . 55
Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Constant Speed Power Switch . . . .. .. . . . . 55
Reservoir Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 112
SCA Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Coolant Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 217
System Filter/Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Crankcase Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 252
Coolers, Condenser and Radiator Area . . . . . 247 Exhaust Blanket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 253
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217, 285 Exhaust Blanket Change . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 270
Critical Warning Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 244
Grid Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 107
D Hourmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 219
Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 242
Deaeration Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 226
Defog/Dehumidify Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . 216
Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Oil Viscosity/Temperature Usage
Display Monitor Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
315
DETAIL INDEX
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . 105 H
Starting Using Ether Starting Fluid .. . .. . 108 Hand Throttle Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . 110 Hard Surface Road Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Trash Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . 224 Hazardous Chemicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Valves and Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . 268 Heater
Ether Start Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . 108 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Engine Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
F HI-LO Range
Filter Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 133
Air Service Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Hitch
Axle Lube Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Coupler - Catergory III Or IV-N . . . . . . . . . . 151
Cab Outside Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Drop Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Cab Recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Coolant,Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Lower Limit Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Engine Air,Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Engine Crankase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Position Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 156
Fuel,Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Position Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Hydraulic Charge Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Raising And Lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Hydraulic Oil Filter Access . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 System Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Up/Down Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fire Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Upper Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Foot Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Hood, Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Front Hose Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Differential Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 HVAC Control
Frame Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Steering Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Suitcase Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Hydraulic
Sun Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Charge Circuit Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Wiper/Washer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Flow Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fuel Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Auxiliary Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Oil Filter Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Power Beyond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Valve Timer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Filter Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Hydraulic/Axle Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Hydraulics Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 I
Tank Water Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Implement
Fuse/Relay Identification Cable Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Deluxe Cab And 24 Speed Transmission . 294 Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Deluxe Cab And Powershift Transmission . 293 Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fuse/Relay Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Potentiometer Connector Plug . . . . . . . . . . 177
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 SMV Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Warning Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
G Inching Pedal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Gear Shift Inner Row Set, Dual Row Set, Spacer
Lever Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Switches (Powershift Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Inspection
General Daily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1 Daily Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Operator And Instructional Seat Belts . . . . . 286
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Tracks and Undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Grease Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Instructional Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Grille And Hood Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Instrumentation Cluster Display Functions . . . . 94
Area Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Area Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
316
DETAIL INDEX
Constant Engine RPM Screen . . . . . . . . . . 101 Map Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Distance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Measuring Wheel Slip W/Out True Ground
Electronic End Of Row Information . . . . . . 101 Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fuel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Metric Size Radial Tire Pressure and Load
Implement Area Counter Switch . . . . . . . . . 96 Capacity Chart
Implement Width Setup Information . . . . . . 95 Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Individual Remote Valve Timer Information . 99 U.S. Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Percent of Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Mode Door Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Percent Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Monitor Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Remote Hydraulic Information . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Motor Case Drain Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Remote Timer Screen Editing . . . . . . . . . . 100 Mounting And Dismounting The Tractor . . . . . . 25
Service Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 MP3 Player Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Service Reminder Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Steering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 N
Timer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Non-Critical Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Instrumentation Cluster Operation . . . . . . . . . . 90 Non-Detented Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Interior
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 O
Rear View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Old Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Introduction to this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1 Opening The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
ISO 11783 Implement Connector System . . . 184 Operator Manual Storage Compartment . . . . . . .1
Operator’s Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
K Outside Extendable Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Keyswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
P
L Park Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
LH Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Performance Instrumentation Cluster Display . . 92
Light Personal Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Playback Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Playing A Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Link Adjustment Position
Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 147 Full Function (Neutral) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Upper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 148 Neutral Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Loads Matched To Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 185 No Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Low Pressure Return Circuit . . . . . . . . . . .. . 176 Power Mirror Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Lower Front Side Wiper/Washer Switch . .. . . 54 Power Takeoff (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Lubricants Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Drawbar Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Lubrication And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Safety Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Three Point Hitch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Powershift Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . 118
M Pre-Conditioning Rubber Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Machine Operation Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Pressure Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Maintaining Operating Temperatures . . . . . . 112 Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Maintenance Program Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
10 Hours Or Daily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Programming the Display Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1000 Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
1500 Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 R
250 Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Radar Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4000 Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Radial Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
50 Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
500 Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Rear
6000 Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Differential Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
As Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Fender Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Operator And Instructional Seat Belts . . . . 286 Remote Hitch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Suitcase Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
317
DETAIL INDEX
Sun Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Service
Wiper/Washer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Record/Play Standby Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Tire And Rim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Recording Seven Terminal Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Shade
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Front Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Remote Rear Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Hoses Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Shifting the Powershift Transmission . . . . . . . 120
Hydraulic Auto Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Shuttle Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Hydraulic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Slip Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 159
Hydraulic Valve Timer Control . . . . . . . . . . 171 System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 SMV Symbol
Valve Function Control Operation . . . . . . . 173 Implement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Valve Line Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Valves And Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Spacer Requirement
Removal And Installation Of Batteries . . . . . . 295 Dual Row Set, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
RH Armrest Console Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Inner Row Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
RH Armrest Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Special Wheel Bolt Wrenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
RH Service Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
RH Side Service Window Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Speed Chart
Right Hand Armrest Control Console . . . . . . . . 42 KPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305, 307, 310
Road Lamp/Flasher Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 MPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 306, 308, 309
Rollover Protective Structure (ROPS) . . . . . . . 26 Standard Instrumentation Cluster Display . . . . . 91
Instrument Cluster Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Starting
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4 Fluid Container Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Roll-Over Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Statement Of Tractor Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . 1
Rubber Tracks Static Weight Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Pre-Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Steering
Articulation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
S Articulation Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Column Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Combination Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Cylinder Locking Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Hazardous Chemicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Display Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Instructional Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Front Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Stopping The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Strobe or Beacon Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Sway Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Roll-Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Switch
Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 14, 15 Auto Guidance Roading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
SCA Service Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Auto Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Scraper Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Center HID Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 103 Engine Constant Speed Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Inspection And Maintenance Of Operator Engine Constant Speed Power . . . . . . . . . . . 55
And Instructional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Front Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Seat Safety - Instructional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Front Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Selecting Hitch Up/Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 157
Direction of Travel W/ Tractor Stationary . . 121 HVAC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Transmission Gear W/ Tractor Stationary . 121 Lower Front Side Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . 54
Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Power Takeoff (PTO) Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Rear Differential Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 5 Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Rollover Protective Structure (ROPS) . . . . . . 4 Remote Hydraulic Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Road Lamp/Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
318
DETAIL INDEX
Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Strobe or Beacon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Transport Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Work Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Transporting
Synthetic Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Hard Surface Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 12
Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 116
T Triple Wheel Tread Setting . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 212
Tapered Bushing Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 True Ground Speed Sensor Connector . .. . . . 184
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 TwinFlow
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Hydraulic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Three Point Hitch Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Remote Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Tire
And Rim Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 U
Average Rolling Radius Chart . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Undercarriage
Changing Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Idler Wheel Hub Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Check Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Roller Wheel Hub Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Inflation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Upper Console Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Inflation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Using
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Ether Starting Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Pressure For Maximum Tire Load At Rated Infla- Weights To Ballast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 V
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Variable Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Viscous Fan Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Rim Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Towing The Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 W
Track Warning Fault Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Warning Lamps
Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Implement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Drive Wheel-Idler Bolt Torques . . . . . . . . . 213 Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Water Pump And Accessory Drive Belt Check 241
Tension Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Weights
Tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Front And Rear Suitcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Track and Undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Front Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Tractor Front Suitcase Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Front Tie Bolt & Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Ballast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Rear Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Model Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Product Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Wheel
SMV Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Bolt Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Statement Of Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Dual Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Offset Direction Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Special Bolt Wrenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Warning Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Tread Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Weight Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Tread Setting - Duals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 209
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Tread Setting - Singles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Transmission Triple Tread Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
24-Speed Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Weight Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Control System Actuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Wheel And Hub Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 When Batteries Are Not In Use . . . . . . . . 251, 295
Kick-Out to Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Wide Marker Lamp Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Oil Heat Maintainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Work
Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Shift Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Light Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
319
CNH America LLC Technical Manuals
Manuals are available from your Dealer for the operation, service and repair of your machine. For prompt
convenient service, contact your Dealer for assistance in obtaining the manuals for your machine.
Your Dealer can expedite your order for Operators Manuals, Parts Catalogs, Repair Manuals and maintenance
records.
Always give the Machine Name, Model and P.I.N. (Product Identification Number) or S.N. (Serial Number) of your
machine so your Dealer can provide the correct manuals for your machine.
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
The company is continually striving to improve its products and therefore reserves the right to make improvements
and changes when it becomes practical and possible to do so, without incurring any obligation to make changes or
additions to the equipment sold previously.
All data given in this manual is subject to production variations. IMPORTANT: OPERATING AND SERVICE
MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE ELECTRONIC OPERATING PANEL MAY VARY FROM WHAT IS SHOWN IN
THE OPERATOR’S MANUAL. SHOULD THIS OCCUR ADHERE TO THE LATEST INSTRUCTION ON THE
ELECTRONIC OPERATING PANEL.
Dimensions and weights are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show the machine in
standard condition. For exact information about any particular machine, please consult your dealer.
CASE
Printed in France
FOR THOSE WHO DEMAND MORE © 2007 CNH Global N.V.

Operator Manual en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator Manual en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator Manual en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Steiger 335

Print No. 87562869

DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION are defined as follows:

ISO two panel pictorial symbol decals are defined as follows:

● The first panel indicates the nature of the hazard.

● The second panel indicates the appropriate avoidance of the hazard.

● Background color is YELLOW.

● Prohibition symbols such as and STOP if used, are RED.

● Is instructed in safe and proper use of the machine.

● Reads and understands ALL Safety Decals on the machine.

● Clears the area of other persons.

6-FIELD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

7-IN-FIELD PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

9-ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

11-DETAIL INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Introduction to this Manual

Statement of Tractor Intended Use

Operator Manual Storage Compartment

The standard tractor front frame (2) incorporates the

STEIGER SERIES TRACTORS

STEIGER WHEEL TRACTOR

STEIGER QUADTRAC TRACTOR

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS

Tractor Model and Product

Located on the upper back side of the LH front

Rollover Protective Structure

Located under the cover of the LH front ROPS post.

Engine Serial Number (335)

Located on the top LH side of the engine fuel pump

Engine Serial Number (385 - 435)

Located on the LH upper side under the heat shield.

Engine Serial Number (485) 1 3

Located on the LH upper side behind compound

Engine Serial Number (535) 1 3

Located on the LH upper side under the heat shield.

Transmission Serial Number 1 3

Located on the LH rear side of the transmission.

Axle Serial Number (335)

Located on the side of the axle center housing.

Axle Serial Number (385, 435, 485, 1 3

Located on the final drive housing.

This Page Left Blank

Chemical Tank Mounting

CHEMICAL TANK MOUNTING

IMPORTANT: The tanks MUST NOT be individually

BUSINESS BAND RADIO READY (If Equipped)

The antenna mast mounting threaded spud (1) and

A locating dimple (2) in the cab top marks the

NOTE: The antenna mast for a one-quarter (1/4)

The radio antenna lead wire (if equipped) (3) and

The recommended location for mounting the

NOTE: See your Case IH dealer for additional

QUADTRAC UNITS ONLY

TRACK AND UNDERCARRIAGE

Pre-Conditioning Rubber Tracks Hard Surface Road Transporting

This section gives important safety information for your tractor.

WARNING: THIS SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL INDICATES IMPORTANT

● Check and service cooling system according to

● DANGER: Indicates an immediate hazardous ● Background color is YELLOW.